JP2020075049A - Pachinko game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a Pachinko game machine capable of enhancing amusement of a game.SOLUTION: A Pachinko game machine can execute a final battle victory performance during execution of a specific variation display, when the result of a win/lose determination of a special symbol in a specific variation display is a big winning. Even if the result of the win/lose determination of the special symbol in the specific variation display is a failure, when an operation holding ball is present that is to be a big winning in the operation holding ball of a second special symbol that remains at the start of the specific variation display or at a predetermined timing during execution of the specific variation display, the Pachinko game machine can execute the final battle victory performance during execution of the specific variation display.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 87

Description

  The present invention relates to a pachinko game machine.

  Generally, the pachinko gaming machine acquires a random number value for lottery when a game ball enters the starting opening, and temporarily stores it as an operation holding ball up to a predetermined upper limit number. One such operation-holding ball is sequentially exhausted every time a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and whether or not a big hit is hit is determined. When the result of the winning / judgment is a big hit, the symbols consisting of a plurality of columns are variably displayed, and then the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning manner, and the large winning opening which is normally closed is set to the open state. A special game (big hit game) is established.

  In this type of Pachinko gaming machine, the normal gaming state in which the winning probability of the above winning determination is set to the normal probability, the probability variation gaming state in which the winning probability of the above winning determination is increased, and the result of the above winning determination is suggested or notified. Equipped with various game states such as a time-shortening game state in which the efficiency of symbol fluctuations has been increased, and the transition to the normal game state is triggered by the fact that the number of symbol fluctuation display times reaches a predetermined number in the probability variation game state or the time-shortening game state. There are known ones (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2011-182873, A

  Since the pachinko game machine that adopts such a configuration already exists as a conventional model, further enhancement of the excitement of the game is required in order to differentiate it from the conventional model.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a pachinko gaming machine capable of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In order to achieve such an object, the pachinko game machine according to the present invention has a game board in which a game area is formed, and a first starting opening which is provided at a predetermined position in the game area and into which a game ball can enter. , A second starting opening provided at a position different from the first starting opening in the game area and in which the game ball changes between an open state where it is easy to enter and a closed state where it is difficult to enter, and the first starting opening A first random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number value upon the entry of the game ball into the second starting random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number value upon the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening; 1 first hit / miss judgment means for executing the hit / miss judgment based on the random number value acquired by the random number acquisition means; second hit / fail judgment means for executing the hit / miss judgment based on the random number value acquired by the second random number acquisition means; 1 If the result of the hit determination by the hit determination means or the result of the hit determination by the second hit determination means is a big hit, special game execution means that can shift to a special game that is advantageous to the player, and a normal entry state, An easy-to-enter state in which the easiness of entering the second starting opening is higher than that of the normal-entering state, and a normal-entering state or an easy-entering state can be set. When a random number value is acquired by the control unit and the first random number acquisition unit, the acquired random number value is stored as a first hold up to a predetermined upper limit number until the first win / fail judgment permission condition is satisfied. 1 When the random number value is acquired by the holding storage means and the second random number acquisition means, until the second win / fail judgment permission condition is satisfied,
The second hold storage means for storing the acquired random number value as a second hold up to a predetermined upper limit number, and the first symbol showing the result of the hit / no hit judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means is variably displayed and stopped. A symbol display device, a second symbol display device in which a second symbol indicating the result of the hit determination by the second hit determination device is variably displayed and stopped, and a first symbol is variably displayed in the first symbol display device and First symbol display control means for stop display, second symbol display control means for variable display and stop display of the second symbol in the second symbol display device, effect display device for displaying a predetermined effect, and the effect With a production determination means for determining the production to be displayed on the display device, the total number of variable display times of the first symbol and the second symbol is a predetermined upper limit number after the game state is set to the easy entry state. A specific variation that is a variation display that is configured to end the easy-to-enter state when it reaches the total number of variation display times of the first symbol and the second symbol reaches a predetermined upper limit number. The specific effect can be executed in the display, and the display mode of the specific effect can be determined based on the second hold remaining at the start of the specific change display or at a predetermined timing during the execution of the specific change display. As a display mode, at least a first display mode and a second display mode are provided, and the result of the win / fail judgment by the first win / fail judgment means or the result of the win / fail judgment by the second win / fail judgment means in the specific variation display is a big hit. In such a case, the specific effect of the first display mode is configured to be executable during the execution of the specific variation display, and the result of the hit determination by the first hit determination means in the specific variation display or the second hit determination means. Even if the result of the judgment of success / failure due to is incorrect, the result of judgment by the second judgment means by the second judgment means within the second hold remaining at the start of the specific fluctuation display or at a predetermined timing during execution of the specific fluctuation display. If there is a specific hold for which the result of the determination is a big hit, the specific effect of the first display mode can be executed while the specific variation display is being executed, while the first hit / absence determining means in the specific variation display is used. When the result of the judgment of success or failure or the result of the judgment of judgment by the second judgment means is out of order, the specific suspension does not exist in the second suspension remaining at the predetermined timing during the execution of the specific variation display, and A second hold, which is a specific hold, is generated from a predetermined timing during execution of the specific change display to the end of the specific change display. In this case, the specific effect of the second display mode can be executed during the execution of the specific variation display, and occurs between the predetermined timing during the execution of the specific variation display and the end time of the specific variation display. It is characterized in that a special effect different from the specific effect can be executed when the variable display related to the specific suspension is executed.

  According to the pachinko machine according to the present invention, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko game machine. It is a control block diagram of the pachinko game machine. It is a functional block diagram of the main control board and the effect control board of the pachinko game machine. It is a schematic diagram showing a special symbol win / loss table. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a first special symbol jackpot symbol table, (B) is a schematic diagram showing a second special symbol jackpot symbol table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation pattern table 1 of a special symbol. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation pattern table 2 of a special symbol. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation pattern table 3 of a special symbol. It is a schematic diagram which shows the design attribute of a decorative design. It is a schematic diagram showing a correspondence relationship between a big hit type combination of a big hit type and a decorative pattern, and a big hit medium effect pattern. It is a schematic diagram showing an outline of super-jutsu big hit production. It is a schematic diagram showing an outline of the big hit A production. It is a schematic diagram showing an outline of a big hit B production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the outline of a big hit A production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the outline of a big hit B production. It is a schematic diagram showing a basic screen during a round game. It is a conceptual diagram for explaining a configuration of a prize-related effect. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect of over-winning prize effect. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a special winning hole count-up effect. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a bonus winning effect. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of general winning a prize count-up effect. It is a time chart used for explaining the priority of the special winning opening count-up effect. It is a schematic diagram with which explanation of emphasis production is offered. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the error type of the gaming machine. It is a time chart for explaining whether or not to execute an over-winning effect at the end of a big hit. It is a time chart for explaining whether or not the bonus winning effect is executed at the end of the big hit. It is a time chart showing the relationship between the detection state of the touch sensor and the over-winning effect and the general winning effect. It is a time chart showing the relationship between the game state in which the game start preparation effect is executed and the game state in which the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect are executed. It is a schematic diagram which shows a volume adjustment screen. It is a time chart used to explain the overlapping execution of the over-winning prize effect and the bonus winning prize effect. It is a time chart when over-winning prizes and bonus winnings each occur multiple times within a predetermined period. It is a time chart of the prize ball signal when a game ball enters the general winning opening. It is a time chart of the prize ball signal when a game ball enters the big winning opening. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing by the side of main control. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing following FIG. 35 of the main control side main processing. It is a flow chart which shows main control side timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows a starting opening monitoring control process. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control processing. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation start monitoring process. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol control general-purpose processing. It is the flowchart which shows the special design fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart showing a process during special symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop symbol displaying process. It is a flow chart which shows special electric auditors product control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing following FIG. 47 of special electric auditors product control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a reset start process. It is the flowchart which shows the production control side main processing. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flowchart showing a winning effect content determination process. It is the flowchart which shows production control command reception interruption processing. It is the flowchart which shows the production control side timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows image control command transmission interruption processing. It is a figure which shows typically the special symbol winning / missing lottery table of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the special symbol big hit symbol table of 2nd Embodiment. It is a transition diagram of the game state and the effect mode of the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the game state setting table of 2nd Embodiment. It is the comparison table of the fluctuation time of the special design of 2nd execution form. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the normal symbol lottery of the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the simultaneous fluctuation process (fluctuation interruption process, fluctuation forced stop process) of 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine according to a modification of the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing a special symbol winning / winning lottery table of the third embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a first special symbol big hit symbol table of the third embodiment, (B) is a schematic diagram showing a second special symbol big hit symbol table of the third embodiment. It is a transition diagram of the game state and the effect mode of the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the game state setting table of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation pattern selection state table of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation pattern selection state transition table of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation pattern table 0 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation pattern table 1 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation pattern table 2 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation pattern table 3 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation pattern table 4 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation pattern table 5 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation pattern table 6 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation pattern table 7 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation pattern table 8 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the symbol fixed time table of 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a time chart showing the end timing of the electric power support state of the prior art, and (B) is a time chart showing the end timing of the electric power support state of the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the production flow of the chance mode of 3rd Embodiment. (A) A schematic diagram showing the variation effect pattern table referred to in the variation display of the 1st to 14th rotations of the chance mode of the third embodiment, and (B) a variation display of the 15th rotation of the chance mode of the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation production pattern table referred by. It is a schematic diagram which shows the production flow of the normal battle production of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the production flow of the final battle production of 3rd Embodiment. It is a time chart of the 1st fixed time production of a 3rd embodiment. It is a time chart of the first fixed time effect and relief effect of the third embodiment. It is a time chart of the second fixed time effect of the third embodiment. It is a control block diagram of the pachinko game machine of the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the jackpot probability setting value table of the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of production | generation of the 1st setting suggestion production of the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a time chart of the 1st setting suggestion production of the modification of a 3rd embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of production | generation of the 2nd setting suggestion production of the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a time chart of the 2nd setting suggestion production of the modification of a 3rd embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the 2nd setting suggestion production pattern table of the further modification of 3rd Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

[First Embodiment]
1 and 2 are a front view and a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be outlined with reference to the drawings. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment is a model in which two functions corresponding to the conventional first type pachinko gaming machine are mixed, and a first game (first special symbol game) and a second game A game (second special symbol game) can be developed.

<Basic configuration of pachinko machine>
First, the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko game machine PM (also simply referred to as “game machine PM”) is aligned with the opening front surface of the outer frame 1 which is a vertically-oriented fixed holding frame configured to have an outer rectangular frame size. A front frame 2 configured to have a rectangular frame size and forming an open / close mounting frame is laterally opened and closed and attached detachably by an upper and lower hinge mechanism 3 disposed on the front left edge of each other, and is attached to the front right edge. A lock device 4 called a double lock provided is used to constantly keep the outer frame 1 in a closed state in which the outer frame 1 is engaged and connected.

  A rectangular glass frame 5 matching the upper front area of the front frame 2 is attached to the front frame 2 by means of the upper and lower hinge mechanisms 3 so that it can be opened and closed laterally and detachably attached, and the locking device 4 is used. It is always held in a closed state covering the front surface of the front frame 2. The game board 20 is detachably set and held on the front frame 2, and the game area PA in front of the game board 20 is visibly viewed through the multilayer glass of the glass frame 5 which is always closed and held. There is.

  On the front side of the glass frame 5, a frame lamp (LED lamp) 10 that emits light according to the development situation of the game and a speaker 11 that produces a sound effect according to the development situation of the game are provided. At the bottom of the glass frame 5, upper and lower ball plates (upper ball plate 8 and lower ball plate 9) for storing game balls are provided, and the front of the upper ball plate 8 is pressed by the player. A button (effect switch) 15 is provided, and a firing handle 12 for performing a game ball firing operation is provided on the right side of the front surface of the lower bowl plate 9. Hereinafter, for the sake of convenience, the operation input means for effect is referred to as “effect button 15”, but the effect button 15 in this example is an on / off operation type button type switch, and an output according to the direction of the operation input. Cross-shaped switch (cross-shaped key, cross-shaped button) to perform, tilt operation type lever type switch, rotary operation type dial switch, proximity switch that outputs when the player's hand approaches or touches, touch sensor , Touch panel, etc. are used in the concept including all operation input means.

  The game board 20 is configured with a substrate formed in a rectangular flat plate shape using a synthetic resin material such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, or an ABS resin as a base. On the front surface of the game board 20, an outer rail 41 and an inner rail 42 are fixed in an arc shape, and a substantially circular game area PA in which a game ball can roll is defined. Further, a guide passage (not shown) for guiding the game ball to the game area PA is formed by the outer rail 41 and the inner rail 42, and a position near the exit opening of the game ball in this guide passage (of the inner rail 42). At the tip end), a ball return prevention valve 43 is provided which prevents the game balls released from the outlet opening into the game area PA from returning to the guide passage again. In this game area PA, along with a windmill and a large number of game nails, various kinds of first starting opening 51, second starting opening 52, actuation gate 53, special winning opening 54, general winning opening 61, 62, 63, 64, etc. Other than the winning hole, the first special symbol display device 71, the second special symbol display device 72, the first special symbol holding lamp 73, the second special symbol holding lamp 74, the normal symbol display device 75, the universal symbol holding lamp 76, etc. Various display devices are provided. A center ornament 21 is provided at substantially the center of the game area PA, and the screen of the effect display device 70 is provided so as to be visible through the center opening of the center ornament 21.

  The game area PA has a left side area PA1 which is an area on the left side of the center decoration 21 (a board surface area corresponding to left striking) and a right side area of the center decoration 21 (corresponding to right striking on the basis of the center decoration 21 at the center). And a right side area PA2 which is a board surface area). A top plate portion 22 that is opposed to the outer rail 41 in a substantially vertical direction is integrally formed on the upper portion of the center ornament 21, and in the extension of the guide passage, the top plate portion 22 and the outer rail 41 are provided. A communication passage 44 through which the game ball can pass to the right side area PA2 is formed. In the present embodiment, the game ball flowing down the left side area PA1 can mainly enter either the first starting opening 51 or the general winning openings 61 to 63 arranged below the center decoration 21. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA2 can mainly enter any of the operation gate 53, the general winning opening 64, the second starting opening 52, and the big winning opening 54 arranged on the right side of the center decoration 21. Is. At the lower end of the game area PA, there is provided an outlet 29 for discharging the rolling-down gaming balls to the back side of the gaming board 20 without entering the winning openings. Hereinafter, each component provided on the game board 20 will be described in order.

  The first starting port 51 is provided as a starting winning port corresponding to the first special symbol game, and is provided with a first starting port switch 511 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The first starting opening 51 is a normally open type winning opening that is open upward, and mainly allows a game ball (left-handed game ball) flowing down the left side area PA1 to enter. The entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 51 is a trigger for the first special symbol lottery. In the present embodiment, the special symbols that are displayed in a variable or stopped manner on the first special symbol display device 71 are referred to as “first special symbols”.

  The second starting opening 52 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the second special symbol game, and is provided with a second starting opening switch 521 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The second starting opening 51 is disposed in the right side area PA2 which is a board surface area corresponding to right-handedness, and mainly allows a game ball (right-handed game ball) flowing down the right-side area PA2 to enter. Entering the game ball into the second starting opening 52 is a trigger for the second special symbol lottery. In the present embodiment, the special symbol that is variably displayed or stopped on the second special symbol display device 72 is referred to as a "second special symbol". The second starting port 52 includes an ordinary electric accessory 522, which is generally referred to as an electric chu, and an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 523 for opening and closing the ordinary electric accessory 522. The normal electric accessory 522 is changed into an open state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter the second starting opening 52. In other words, the normal electric auditors role product 522 has a structure in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting opening 52 unless it is displaced to the open state, and at a predetermined trigger (an opportunity to win the normal symbol lottery) described later. In the open state, the ease of entering the game ball increases. The ordinary electric accessory 522 includes a front-rear slide type movable member 524 for opening and closing the second starting opening 52. The movable member 524 closes the second starting port 52 to make it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball (protruding position), and opens the second starting port 52 to allow the game ball to enter. It is slidable in the front-rear direction (direction orthogonal to the board surface) between an easily opened position (retracted position). The upper surface of the movable member 524 has a passage width of about one game ball or more in the front-rear direction, and is formed to incline downward from the right side to the left side in a front view. Therefore, when the movable member 524 is in the closed position (when the second starting opening 52 is in the closed state), the game ball can flow down using the upper surface of the movable member 524 as a guideway, and the guideway on the right to the left. It flows downwards and falls from the left end of the ordinary electric accessory 522.

  The operation gate 53 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to a normal symbol game, and is provided with an operation gate switch 531 for detecting passage of a game ball. The passage of the game ball to the operation gate 53 is a trigger for the ordinary symbol lottery for determining whether or not to open the second starting opening 52.

The special winning opening 54 is formed as a horizontal rectangular winning opening that is opened when the winning / winning lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. The special winning opening 54 is a big winning opening switch 541 for detecting the entry of a game ball, a special electric accessory 542 generally called an attacker, and a big winning for opening and closing the special electric accessory 542. And a mouth solenoid 543. The special electric accessory 542 is changed into an open state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter the special winning opening 54. In this example, the special winning opening 54 is provided in the right side area PA2 in the game area PA. Therefore, in the special game (big hit game, small hit game), when the game ball is shot, by hitting the right side area PA2, that is, by so-called right hitting, it is easy to enter the big winning opening 54. Is becoming

  The general winning openings 61 to 63 are arranged in a left side area PA1 which is a board area corresponding to left-handed play, and a game ball flowing down the left side area PA1 can enter. The general winning openings 61 to 63 are provided with a left general winning opening switch 611 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The left general winning opening switch 611 is configured as a common sensor (single sensor) of the three general winning openings 61 to 63 from the viewpoint of cost reduction and the like. Incoming balls can also be detected.

  The general winning opening 64 is arranged in a right side area PA2 which is a board surface area corresponding to right-handed play, and a game ball flowing down from the right side area PA2 can enter. The general winning opening 64 is provided with a right general winning opening switch 641 for detecting the entry of a game ball. In addition, the entry of the game ball into each of the general winning openings 61 to 64 does not trigger the lottery of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol, but the opportunity of winning the prize ball in the same manner as the other winning orifices (excluding the operation gate 53). Becomes

  The first special symbol display device 71 performs the variable display and the fixed display of the first special symbol when the game ball enters the first starting opening 51. The first special symbol display device 71 is composed of, for example, eight LED lamps, the variable display of the first special symbol is expressed according to the blinking pattern of the lamp, and the blinking of the lamp is stopped and switched to the lighting display. The first special symbol is confirmed and displayed.

  The second special symbol display device 72 performs the variable display and the confirmation display of the second special symbol when the game ball enters the second starting opening 52. The second special symbol display device 72 is composed of, for example, eight LED lamps, the variable display of the second special symbol is expressed according to the blinking pattern of the lamp, and the blinking of the lamp is stopped and switched to the lighting display. The second special symbol is confirmed and displayed.

  The 1st special figure reservation lamp 73 and the 2nd special figure reservation lamp 74 respectively comprise, for example, 2 LED lamps, respectively, the number of operation reservation balls of the 1st special design and the 2nd special design by lighting / flashing indication of the particular lamp Express (up to 4 each). The number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol is a number according to the random number value obtained based on the ball entering the first starting opening 51 during the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or the execution of the big hit game. Yes, it indicates the number for which the win / fail judgment is temporarily suspended until the acquired random number value is suspended, that is, the win / disapproval determination permission condition (variation start condition) is satisfied for the acquired random number value. Similarly, the number of operation reserved balls of the second special symbol is a random number value obtained based on the ball entering the second starting opening 52 during the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the execution of the big hit game. It is a number related to this, and indicates the number for which the acceptance judgment is once suspended until the acquired random number value is suspended, that is, until the acceptance determination permission condition (variation start condition) is satisfied for the acquired random value. There is.

The normal symbol display device 75 is composed of, for example, two LED lamps, and performs the variable display and the fixed display of the normal symbol. The universal figure holding lamp 76 is composed of, for example, four lamps, and the number of lights of the lamp corresponds to the number of holdings of the normal symbol fluctuation (the number of normal symbol fluctuations not yet executed). In addition, on the left side of the normal symbol display device 75, a round display 77 is provided for displaying the number of round games (unit games) in the big hit game (the number of rounds: the number of times the special electric auditors product 542 continuously operates). ing.

  The effect display device 70 mainly includes a change effect of the decorative symbol that is displayed in a variable display / stop display in conjunction with the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and a notice effect that indicates or informs the expectation of the big hit in advance. While displaying an image, a hold display corresponding to the operation holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. Specifically, on the screen of the effect display device 70, a decorative symbol display area 700 in which variable display of decorative symbols, notice effect display, etc. are executed, a first special symbol holding lamp 73, and a second special symbol holding lamp 74. A reserved image display area 710 in which the reserved images of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in synchronization with, and a changing image display area 720 in which a changing image corresponding to the changing display is displayed are provided. There is. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the effect display device 70. In the decorative symbol display portion 700, on a predetermined effective line (not shown), three columns of display regions (left symbol display region Z1, middle symbol display region Z2, right symbol display region Z3) that are variable display regions of the decorative symbol are displayed. ) Is provided, the left symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the left symbol display region Z1, the middle symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the middle symbol display region Z2, the right of the decorative symbol corresponding to the right symbol display region Z3 The symbols are stopped and displayed. The hold image display unit 710 displays a hold image (hold icon) corresponding to the operation holding ball of the first special symbol and a hold image (hold icon) corresponding to the operation holding ball of the second special symbol. Suspended images are displayed in order according to the order in which the operation-reserved balls of special symbols are generated (the order of entering balls), and the maximum number of reserved images of the first special symbol is four, and the maximum number of reserved images of the second special symbol is four. It can be displayed. Further, in the changing image display area 720, a changing image (changing icon) corresponding to the currently displayed changing display is displayed.

  The center decoration 21 is installed around the effect display device 70 and has functions such as a flow path for a game ball, protection of an effect screen, and decoration. The center ornament 21 is provided with a movable accessory 24 that performs a performance operation according to the development situation of the game. The movable accessory 24 is configured to include a motor M (for example, a stepping motor) as a drive source. In addition, the game board 20 is provided with a board lamp (LED lamp) 25 that emits light in accordance with the development status of the game. In the following description, for the sake of convenience, the frame lamp 10 and the panel lamp 25 are also collectively referred to as “effect lamp LP”.

  Subsequently, the basic structure of the back side of the pachinko game machine PM will be described with reference to FIG. On the back side of the front frame 2, there is a back set board 30 which has a window which communicates with the front and rear in the center and which is based on a base frame body formed in a rectangular frame shape which is somewhat smaller than the front frame 2. A hinge mechanism 3 is connected to the rear side of the front frame 2 so as to be capable of laterally opening / closing and detachable. A back set cover 30C in the form of a rectangular box with an open front is detachably attached to the back set board 30, and is normally disposed so as to cover the back side of the game board 20 attached to the front frame 2. (Thus, the main control board 100, the effect control board 200, and the image control board 300, which will be described later, are covered by the back set cover 30C).

  Each part of the back set board 30 has a storage tank 31 for storing a large number of game balls, a tank rail 32 extending from the storage tank 31 to the right with a gentle downward slope, and a lower end connected to the right end of the tank rail 32. A ball supply passage portion 33 extending to, a prize ball payout unit 34 for paying out the game ball guided by the ball supply passage portion 33, a prize for guiding the game ball paid out from the prize ball payout unit 34 to the upper ball plate 6. A ball passage portion 35 and the like are provided.

On the back side of the game board 10, a main control board 100 that comprehensively controls the operation of the pachinko game machine PM, a production control board 200 that controls overall production, image display according to game development, and control of sound effects. An image control board 300 for performing the above is attached. On the other hand, on the back side of the back set board 30, a payout control board 400 that controls the launch and payout of game balls, and power from various amusement facilities to supply power to various control boards and electric / electronic components. Power board 5
00, an external information terminal board 600 (see FIG. 3) for outputting an external information signal (outer end signal) is attached to the outside of the gaming machine PM. In order to prevent unauthorized modification, these control boards are respectively housed in a transparent resin board case having a caulking structure and a sealing structure at the predetermined positions on the rear surface of the game board 20 or the rear setting board 30 in an assembled state. It is arranged. The control board and the electric / electronic parts of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PM are mutually connected via a harness (connector cable), and the pachinko gaming machine PM is configured to be operable.

<Control configuration of Pachinko game machine>
Next, with reference to FIG. 3, each control board mounted on the pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing a control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PM.

  The main control board 100 is a main CPU 101 that performs various arithmetic processing related to games, a ROM 102 that stores control programs and various data, a RAM 103 that functions as a work area or a buffer memory that is a temporary storage area, peripheral boards and each A main control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 110 configured to include an I / O port circuit 104 for inputting / outputting a signal to / from a device is mounted, and a main CPU 101 plays a game according to a control program stored in a ROM 102. It is configured to execute the main control related to the progress. Besides, although not shown, the main control board 100 is reset by a clock circuit that divides a clock signal from a crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock, and when the main CPU 101 malfunctions or goes into a runaway state. The WDT circuit for returning to a normal state, the CTC circuit for enabling real-time interrupt generation and time measurement, and the program processing (software random number) by the main CPU 101 operate as a separate system to generate a predetermined random number (internal random number). A random number generation circuit and the like are mounted, and these are connected to each other via an internal bus.

  The main CPU 101 reads various control programs stored in the ROM 102 and performs arithmetic processing based on the detection information from each switch, thereby executing various processing relating to the main control of the game. The RAM 103 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage unit that is backed up by a backup power supply generated in the power supply board 500. The backup area of the RAM 103 is an area for storing data such as stack pointers and registers held when the power is cut off when the power is cut off. ) Indicates that the state of the gaming machine is restored to the state before the power is turned off based on the information in the backup area.

  Further, the main control board 100 is electrically connected to the first starting opening switch 511, the second starting opening switch 521, the operation gate switch 531, the special winning opening switch 541, the left general winning opening switch 611, the right general winning opening switch 641, and the like. , And inputs detection signals from various switches to the main CPU 101 via the I / O port circuit 104. Further, the main control board 100, the first special symbol display device 71, the second special symbol display device 72, the first special symbol holding lamp 73, the second special symbol holding lamp 74, the normal symbol display device 75 and the general symbol holding lamp. The control signal from the main CPU 101 is electrically connected to the normal electric accessory solenoid 523 and the special electric accessory solenoid 543 while being electrically connected to the control CPU 76 via the I / O port circuit 104. Send to display means and various solenoids. Further, the main control board 100 is electrically connected to the external information terminal board 600, and transmits the game information signal from the main CPU 101 to the external terminal board 600 via the I / O port 104. This external information terminal board 600 sends various external information signals to an external device (data display, hall computer, etc.) installed outside the gaming machine PM based on the game information signal transmitted from the main control board 100. Send. The game information signal transmitted from the main control board 100 may be input to the external information terminal board 600 via, for example, the payout control board 300.

  The main control board 100 and the production control board 200 are connected by eight parallel signal lines and one strobe line, and communication is performed only in a single direction from the main control board 100 to the production control board 200. Various control commands are transmitted from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200. Data cannot be transmitted from the production control board 200 to the main control board 100, and the main control board 100 cannot be requested to transmit data.

  The effect control board 200 is a sub-main CPU 201 that performs various arithmetic processing related to game effect based on the effect control command from the main control board 100, a ROM 202 that stores effect control programs and various data, a work area that serves as a temporary storage area, A performance control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 210 including a RAM 203 that functions as a buffer memory and an I / O port circuit 204 that inputs and outputs signals to and from a peripheral board and each device is mounted. The sub-main CPU 201 is configured to execute main control relating to game effects according to a control program stored in the ROM 202. In addition, although not shown, the effect control board 200 is reset by a clock circuit that divides the clock signal from the crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock, and when the sub-main CPU 201 malfunctions or runs out of control. WDT circuit for returning to a normal state by the TPU circuit, TPU circuit for outputting various signals based on the system clock, interrupt controller for activating various interrupts such as timer interrupts based on signals from the TPU circuit, for inputting / outputting serial data A serial communication circuit and the like are mounted, and these are connected to each other via an internal bus.

  The effect control board 200 performs an effect control process based on an effect control command from the main control board 100, and an image control command for instructing an image and a sound to the image control board 300 and a lamp control signal for controlling the lamp connection board 91. (Lamp data), a drive control signal (drive data) for controlling the motor driver 92, and the like are generated. The effect control board 200 is connected to the image control board 300 so as to be able to perform bidirectional communication, and an image control command relating to an image and a sound is transmitted from the effect control board 200 to the image control board 300, and in response thereto, A response command (ACK command) indicating that the image control command is normally received is transmitted from the image control board 300 to the effect control board 200.

  In addition, the production control board 200 is electrically connected to a lamp connection board 91 having a plurality of LED drivers mounted thereon, and outputs a lamp control signal (lamp data) for controlling the lamp connection board 91 via a serial communication circuit. Send. In this example, the production control board 200 and the lamp connection board 91 employ clock-synchronized serial communication, and are transmitted by a signal line (clock line) different from the data line for lamp data transmission. The ramp control signal is transmitted bit by bit through the data line in synchronization with the clock signal. The lamp connection board 91 has a built-in LED driver that functions by receiving a lamp control signal for LED driving transmitted from the effect control board 200, and switches a switch in the circuit on / off based on the lamp control signal. Thus, control is performed to supply or cut off the drive current to the effect lamp LP and turn on or off the effect lamp LP.

  Further, the effect control board 200 is electrically connected to the plurality of motor drivers 92, and sends a drive control signal (drive data) for controlling the motor driver 92 to the motor driver 92 via the I / O port circuit 204. Send. The motor driver 92 supplies a drive current to the stepping motor of each movable accessory 24 by turning on / off a switch in the circuit based on a drive control signal for driving the accessory that is transmitted from the effect control board 200. Alternatively, the control is performed by shutting off and operating each movable accessory 24. A parallel communication system is used for data transmission to the motor driver 92.

The image control board 300 includes a sub-sub CPU 301 that performs various arithmetic processes related to image effects based on an image control command from the effect control board 200, a ROM 302 that stores an image control program and various data, and a work area that is a temporary storage area. An image control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 310 including a RAM 303 that functions as a buffer memory and an I / O port circuit 304 that inputs and outputs signals to and from a peripheral board and each device is mounted. The sub-sub CPU 301 is configured to execute main control relating to image effects according to a control program stored in the ROM 302. In addition, although not shown in the figure, the VDP that generates image data according to the effect content based on the control signal acquired from the sub-sub CPU 301 and the effect content based on the control signal acquired from the sub-sub CPU 301 are provided on the image control board 300. A sound source IC for generating acoustic data is mounted. The VDP is a so-called image processor, which reads the image data stored in the image ROM according to an instruction from the sub-sub CPU 301, and transmits a video signal (image data) generated by performing image processing on the image data to the effect display device. A high-speed VRAM used for developing and processing the image data read from the image ROM is connected to the VDP. The sound source IC reads the acoustic data stored in the audio ROM in response to an instruction from the sub-sub CPU 301, and outputs the acoustic data generated by performing a synthesis process to the speaker 11 via an amplifier (digital amplifier).

  The payout control board 400 mainly includes a payout CPU 401, a ROM 402, and a RAM 403. The payout control board 400 is connected to the main control board 100 so as to be capable of two-way communication, and is a control for driving the prize ball payout unit 34 based on a payout control command from the main control board 100 to pay out prize balls. While executing, the ball feed mechanism 13 and the firing mechanism 14 are synchronously driven based on the operation amount of the firing handle 12 to control the firing of the game ball.

  Although not shown in detail, the power supply board 500 is a backup power supply and a normal power supply circuit for generating a normal power supply used in each control board based on the primary power supply supplied from the power supply facility of the game island. A power supply required for electronic and electrical parts such as control boards and amusement machines, which is configured by including a backup power supply circuit for generating To supply. A power switch for activating a power circuit is connected to the power board 500, and when the power switch is turned on, assuming that the primary power is supplied from the power supply device of the game island, the power board is turned on. Predetermined power is supplied to each control board or the like from the normal power supply circuit 500. The power supply board 500 is configured to be able to detect that the power supply from the power supply device of the game island has been cut off, and at the time of detecting the power supply cutoff, a power cutoff signal (NMI signal) for notifying the fact is sent. , To the effect control board 200 and the payout control board 400. The backup power supply circuit has a mechanism that is charged when power is supplied from the power supply device on the game island to the pachinko game machine PM. A RAM clear switch (not shown) for temporarily erasing the temporarily stored contents of the RAM 103 of the main control board 100 and setting an initial value when the power of the pachinko game machine PM is turned on is connected to the power supply board 500. ing. The RAM clear switch may be connected to, for example, the main control board 100 instead of the power supply board 500.

The external information terminal board 600 outputs an external information signal (outer end signal) to the outside of the gaming machine PM based on the game information signal from the main control board 100. The external information signal that the external information terminal board 600 outputs as external information to an external device outside the machine includes, for example, a big hit signal, a signal during a condominium, a symbol determination signal, a prize ball signal (also referred to as a prize ball information signal), a door. A frame open signal, a security signal (also referred to as a security information signal), a magnetic sensor abnormality signal, a disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality signal, an abnormality sensor detection (entrance time of passage, etc.) signal, etc. are included. The external device installed outside the gaming machine PM includes a data display, a hall computer, and the like. The data display is a device that is installed on the upper portion of the gaming machine PM and displays data (game information) regarding the operating state of the gaming machine PM based on an external information signal output from the gaming machine PM. The game information displayed on the data display is useful for the player to make a selection for the game machine. The hall computer collects the operating state of each gaming machine (this gaming machine PM is one of them) based on an external information signal output from each gaming machine installed in the hall in the game store, and then each gaming machine It is a device that manages the operating status of machines. This hall computer may be electrically connected to the gaming machine PM via a data display, or may be electrically connected to the gaming machine PM without a data display.

<Basic operation of Pachinko machine>
In the pachinko machine PM configured as described above, the outer frame 1 is fixedly installed on the game island of the game facility, and the front frame 2, the glass frame 5, etc. are closed and locked, and the game is performed. The game is started by storing the game balls in the plate 8 and rotating the firing handle 12. When the firing handle 12 is rotated, the game balls stored in the upper ball dish 8 are sent to the firing mechanism 14 one by one by the ball feeding mechanism 13 arranged on the back side of the glass frame 5. The shooting mechanism 14 launches the game area PA. At this time, when the firing handle 12 is operated less than a predetermined amount, the game ball does not reach the right side area PA2 but flows down the left side area PA1. In the left side area PA1, a left side flow path for flowing down the game ball toward the first starting opening 51 and the general winning openings 61 to 63 is formed. On the other hand, when the firing handle 12 is operated by a predetermined amount or more, the game ball reaches the right side area PA2 and flows down the right side area PA2. In the right side area PA2, a right side flow path for flowing down the game ball toward the operation gate 53, the general winning opening 64, the second starting opening 52, and the big winning opening 54 is formed. In this way, the game ball flowing down the left side area PA1 or the right side area PA2 has a first starting opening 51, a second starting opening 52, and an operating gate 53 according to the route distributed in the left side area PA1 or the right side area PA1. While the player can enter any of the special winning opening 54 and the general winning openings 61 to 64, if the player does not enter any of the winning openings, it is flown down to the outlet 29.

  When a game ball flowing down in the game area PA enters any of the first starting opening 51, the second starting opening 52, the special winning opening 54, and the general winning openings 61 to 63, an award corresponding to the type of the winning opening. The balls are paid out to the upper ball plate 8 or the lower ball plate 9 by the prize ball payout unit 34. In the present embodiment, as the number of prize balls to be paid out when one game ball enters each prize hole (referred to as "unit prize ball number"), the first starting port 51 is "4", the second The starting opening 52 is set to "1", the general winning openings 61 to 64 are set to "3", and the special winning opening 54 is set to "15". Note that the number of unit prize balls of each winning opening is not limited to that illustrated in the present embodiment, and other unit prize balls may be applied. For example, as the number of unit prize balls, the number of the first starting ports 51 may be "1" instead of "4". Further, the number of the second starting ports 52 may be "3" instead of "1". Further, the general winning openings 61 to 64 may be "5" instead of "3". Further, the special winning opening may be "10" instead of "15".

  When the game ball enters the first starting opening 51 or the second starting opening 52, the random number random number value of the special symbol is acquired, and the random number value is temporarily stored as the operation reserve ball of the special symbol up to a predetermined upper limit number. Then, if a predetermined start condition (variable start condition of a special symbol described later) is satisfied, the special symbol win / fail judgment, the symbol determination, and the variation pattern determination are performed with respect to the lottery random number value related to the first operation holding ball. In a mode according to the determination result, the special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72, and the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the effect display device 70. The variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed synchronously after the lapse of the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern.

When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is confirmed and displayed in the stop mode indicating the big hit, the special game (big hit game) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game is performed. In each round game (unit game) of this big hit game, an opening / closing operation for changing the special winning opening 54 to the open state only once or a plurality of times is performed. When a predetermined number of game balls enter the special winning opening 54, or when the opening time of the special winning opening 54 reaches the open limit time, the running round game ends. Here, the stop mode of the decorative symbol indicating a big hit is a mode in which the types of the three symbols are the same, for example. In the present embodiment, when the special symbol and the decorative symbol are fixedly displayed in the stop mode indicating the big hit, a plurality of round games (unit games) are executed as the big hit game.

  In the present embodiment, if a predetermined big hit is won, the probability change function of the special symbol may operate from the end of the big hit game until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of end times. When the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, the big hit probability of the special symbol lottery shifts from the normal low probability state to the high probability state, so that a new big hit (big hit game) occurs relatively early. Become. The special symbol probability variation function may be continued until the next big hit occurs. Further, "10000 times", which is substantially equivalent to the number of times of variable display until the next big hit occurs, may be set as the above-mentioned predetermined number of end times.

  Also, after the jackpot game is over, the variation time shortening function of the special symbol may be activated in association with or independently of the probability varying function of the special symbol. When the variation time shortening function of the special symbol operates, the average variation time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol tends to be shorter than usual, and the number of special symbol lottery per unit time improves (the jackpot per unit time It can increase the ease of acquisition).

  Furthermore, after the jackpot game is over, the electric choo support function (also simply referred to as “electric sapo”) may be activated in association with or independently of the variable time reduction function of the special symbol. The electric Chu support function, the probability variation function of the ordinary symbol, the variation time shortening function of the ordinary symbol, and the opening extension function of the ordinary electric accessory 522 actuate to enhance the easiness of entering the second starting opening 52. This is a state (also referred to as an "electric power support state" or an "easy entry state"). In addition, when the probability variation function of the ordinary symbol operates, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol becomes higher than the normal state. When the normal symbol variation time reduction function is activated, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is reduced. When the opening extension function of the ordinary electric accessory 522 operates, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 522 becomes longer than the normal state. In this easy-to-enter state, the number of fluctuations of the ordinary symbol per certain period of time increases more than usual, and the easiness of entering the second starting port 52 also increases, so to the second starting port 52. It also increases the possibility that the number of incoming balls will increase. Therefore, as a result of the operation of the electric Chu support function, the chance of getting a prize ball by entering the second starting opening 52 increases during the period, and as a result, it is possible to continue the game without reducing the number of balls held. Become. That is, the "base", which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls to be launched, becomes high. Hereinafter, a state in which the electric Chu support function is operating is also called a “high base state”, and a state in which the electric Chu support function is not operating is also called a “low base state”.

<Main functional configuration of Pachinko game machine>
Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine PM (mainly the main control board 100 / effect control board 200) according to the present embodiment will be described with additional reference to FIG. 4 is a functional block diagram of the gaming machine PM (mainly the main control board 100 / effect control board 200).

  As shown in FIG. 4, the main control board 100 is a ball entry determination means 110, a game lottery random number generation means 120, a hold control means 130, a preliminary determination means 135, a special symbol lottery processing means 140, an ordinary symbol lottery processing means 145, It includes special game control means 150, symbol display control means 155, electric accessory control means 160, game state control means 165, error monitoring control means 170, main information storage means 180, command transmission / reception means 190. Each of the above-mentioned means in the main control board 100 is configured by a main CPU 101, a ROM 102, a RAM 103, hardware such as an electronic circuit provided on the main control board 100, and software such as a control program stored in the ROM 102 and the like. It is a functional representation of something.

The winning determination means 110 is based on the detection signals from the first starting opening switch 511, the second starting opening switch 521, the operation gate switch 531, the big winning opening switch 541, the general winning opening switches 611, 641 and the like, and the respective winning openings. Judgment of a game ball into the game. When the entry ball determination means 110 detects entry of a game ball with the first starting opening switch 511, it produces an effect control command (referred to as a “first starting opening winning command”) indicating that, When the entry of the game ball is detected by the 2 starting opening switch 521, a production control command (to be referred to as a "second starting opening winning command") indicating that is generated, and the operation gate switch 531 is operated When the passage is detected, an effect control command (to be referred to as an "operation gate winning command") indicating that is generated, and when the winning of the game ball is detected by the special winning opening switch 541, the effect is indicated. When a production control command (referred to as a "big winning award winning command") is generated and a ball entering the game ball is detected by the left general winning opening switch 611, a production control command ("left general winning opening") indicating that When a game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 611, a production control command (to be referred to as a "right general winning opening winning command") indicating that is generated. Then, this is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180.

The game lottery random number generation means 120 takes in the built-in random number generated by the random number generation circuit of the main control microcomputer 110 by software, and adds a soft random number per special symbol described later to this, which is used for the winning / winning lottery of the special symbol. Generate a random number per special symbol. Further, the game lottery random number generation means 120 is provided with a random number counter for generating various software random numbers by the program processing of the main CPU 101. These random number counters play a role as random number generating means for generating random numbers by software. As this software random number, a special random number per special symbol added to the above-mentioned built-in random number for generating a random number per random, an initial value for a new update after one cycle of the special random number is finished. Special initial value random number per special symbol to determine, special symbol stop symbol random number, special symbol stop symbol random number used to determine the symbol (combination of symbols that will activate the condition device) as a special symbol stop symbol Of the special symbol stop symbol initial value random number for determining the initial value for making a new update after the update of one cycle is finished, the special symbol variation pattern random number used for selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol, Ordinary symbol per random number to be used in the winning or failure lottery of the normal symbol, normal value per symbol normal value for determining the initial value for making a new update after updating one cycle of the ordinary symbol per random number, Ordinary symbol variation pattern random numbers for use in selecting the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol are included. These software random numbers are updated once every time the timer interrupt process occurs (increment, decrement, addition of prime numbers, etc.), and the initial value random numbers are set while the timer interrupt process is not being executed ( (Loop processing) is also updated using the remaining time of the interrupt cycle.

  Hold control means 130 includes a special symbol hold control means 131, a normal symbol hold control means 132 ,.

  The special symbol holding control means 131 is a random number value per special symbol, which is a random number value related to the special symbol game, triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 51 or the second starting opening 52, per special symbol. A symbol random number value, a special symbol fluctuation pattern random number value are acquired, and the random number value is managed as the operation holding ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol holding control means 131 is a main information storage means in a form of combining the operation holding ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol up to a predetermined upper limit number (four), respectively, with the entry order of the holding balls. It is temporarily stored in the first special symbol hold storage area or the second special symbol hold storage area of 180.

In the first special symbol reserved storage area and the second special symbol reserved storage area, in the order of entering the starting ports 51, 52, the reserved 1 storage area (first reserved storage area), the reserved 2 storage area (2 The third reserved storage area), the reserved third storage area (third reserved storage area), and the reserved fourth storage area (fourth reserved storage area) are respectively provided. Each reservation storage area can store a random number per special symbol, a random symbol per special symbol, and a special symbol variation pattern random number as a set as the operation retaining ball information. The operation holding sphere information is stored in the order of the holding 1 storage area, the holding 2 storage area, the holding 3 storage area, and the holding 4 storage area, while the holding 1 storage area, the holding 2 storage area, the holding 3 storage area, and the holding 4 storage. Digested in order of area (first-in first-out principle). Further, when the reserved sphere information in the reserved 1 storage area is exhausted, the reserved sphere information stored in the reserved 2 storage area, the reserved 3 storage area, and the reserved 4 storage area are respectively shifted to the lower numbered storage areas, and Clear the contents of the hold 4 storage area to zero.

  Further, the special symbol holding control means 131, the first special symbol holding ball number counter for counting the operation holding ball number of the first special symbol, and the second for counting the operation holding ball number of the second special symbol. It has a special symbol holding ball number counter. The special symbol holding control means 131, as the update process of the number of operation holding balls of the special symbol, increments the corresponding counter every time one operation holding ball of the special symbol is acquired, and one operation holding ball is consumed. The corresponding counter is decremented by 1.

  Further, the special symbol holding control means 131, when the operation holding ball number of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is updated (addition or subtraction), the production control command including the update information of the holding ball number ("symbol storage" (Referred to as “several commands”) and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. This 1 command includes information on both the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol and the number of operation holding balls of the second special symbol. In principle, the operation-holding balls of each special symbol will be digested in the order in which they enter the ball, but in this embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the first special symbol. , To adopt the so-called priority digestion, while the operation reserved ball related to the second special symbol game exists, regardless of the existence of the operation reserved ball related to the first special symbol game, the operation reserved related to the second special symbol game It is designed to preferentially digest spheres. In addition, under this priority digestion, when the operation reserved ball of the second special symbol exists, even if the operation reserved ball of the first special symbol exists, the digestion of the operation reserved ball of the first special symbol will occur. It will be put on hold.

  The normal symbol holding control means 132 is a lottery random number value related to the normal symbol game when the game ball enters the actuation gate 53 as a trigger, a random number value per ordinary symbol, a random symbol value per ordinary symbol, and a regular symbol fluctuation pattern. A random number value is acquired, and the random number value is managed as operation-reserving sphere information of a normal symbol. The normal symbol hold control means 132 is a normal symbol hold storage area of the main information storage means 180 in a form in which the operation hold ball information of the normal symbol is combined with the incoming order of the hold balls up to a predetermined upper limit number (4 pieces). Store temporarily. Further, the normal symbol holding control means 132 has a normal symbol holding ball number counter for counting the number of operation holding balls of the normal symbol. Normal symbol hold control means 132, as an update process of the number of holding balls of the normal working symbol, the counter is incremented by 1 each time one working holding ball of the normal symbol is acquired, and one working holding ball is consumed. The corresponding counter is decremented by 1.

When the pre-judgment means 135 acquires the operation holding sphere of the special symbol at a predetermined pre-judgment timing, the pre-judgment means 135 executes the pre-judgment for the pre-reading notice for the operation holding sphere. As an example of the above-described pre-determination timing, (1) waiting for a hit, and when the operation holding ball of the first special symbol is acquired while the electric Chu support function is not operated, (2) waiting for a hit, and If you get the operation reserve ball of the second special symbol while the electric Chu support function is operating, (3) If you obtain the operation reserve ball of the second special symbol during the big hit or small hit, one of It is time to meet the conditions. The above-mentioned pre-determination timing is an example, and the pre-determination timing is changed according to the game machine specifications (for example, it has a starting opening related to the second special symbol that does not have an ordinary electric accessory, and holds eight in normal times. For models that can store the above (1) target not only the first special symbol but also the second special symbol, etc.), or adopt the specification to perform the preliminary judgment at any time without providing the preliminary judgment timing. Good. Further, in each gaming state, only the operation-holding ball of the special symbol which is the main subject of the gaming may be the target of the pre-determination, for example, in the normal gaming state, the first
Only the operation reserve ball of the special symbol is the target of the pre-determination, and it is preferable that only the operation reserve ball of the second special symbol is the target of the pre-determination in the time saving game state, the latent probability variation game state, and the probability variation game state. Specifically, the pre-determination means 135 reads a random number value corresponding to the operation holding ball acquired this time from the first special symbol reserved storage area or the second special symbol reserved storage area of the main information storage means 180, and it is determined whether or not it is successful. Pre-determination (whether or not prior determination), pre-determination of symbols (pre-determination of symbols), pre-determination of variation patterns (pre-determination of variation patterns) are sequentially executed. The pre-determination table used in each pre-determination is not shown in the drawing, but each of the adequacy pre-determination table, the pattern pre-determination table, and the variation pattern pre-determination table has a region corresponding to the total number of random numbers divided into a plurality of regions Then, a lottery ID (a number indicating the result of the preliminary determination (also referred to as a “preliminary determination number”)) is assigned to each of the areas (determination number). Therefore, the result of this pre-determination is based on the result of the main lottery by the special symbol lottery processing means 140 described later (results of the success / failure determination, the result of the symbol determination, the result of the variation pattern determination). In addition, the win / fail pre-determination table, the symbol pre-judgment table, etc. may be the same as the win / no win lottery table or the design lottery table used for the lottery when the fluctuation is actually started. Here, the variation pattern pre-determination table, the game situation at the start of variation (presence or absence of probability change, presence or absence of time reduction, whether or not during a limited frequency period referring to the special table, the number of holding balls, etc.) may change. Therefore, as described above, it is more desirable to determine which of the plurality of areas is included. In addition, as a modification, it is configured to preliminarily determine a random number value of a register or the like on the main CPU 101 that is temporarily stored before being stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area or the second special symbol reserved storage area. You may. Then, the pre-determination unit 135 sequentially generates an effect control command (referred to as a “pre-determination command”) including information on the result of the pre-determination (pre-determination number), and stores it in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. To store.

  The special symbol lottery processing means 140 includes a special symbol winning / discarding determination means 141, a special symbol stop symbol determining means 412, and a special symbol variation pattern determining means 143. The special symbol lottery processing means 140, when the variation start condition of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is satisfied, in the first storage area of the special symbol holding storage area in the main information storage means 180 (holding 1 storage area) The stored special symbol random number value, the special symbol per symbol random value, the special symbol variation pattern random number value is read out, and the special symbol appropriateness determination area, the special symbol determination area, the special symbol variation pattern of the main information storage unit 180 are read. Store in each judgment area. Here, "the fluctuation start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied" means that (A1) is not a big hit, (A2) the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for fluctuation, (A3) ) The existence of the operation holding ball of the first special symbol exists, when all the conditions of are satisfied. In addition, "the fluctuation start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied" means that (B1) is not a big hit, (B2) the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for fluctuation, (B3). The existence of the operation holding ball of the second special symbol, when it satisfies all the conditions. When the variation start condition of the first special symbol and the variation start condition of the second special symbol are satisfied at the same time, the variation start condition of the second special symbol is preferentially processed under the above-mentioned priority digestion. To do.

  The special symbol hit determination unit 141 reads the random number per special symbol from the special symbol hit determination region of the main information storage unit 180 and executes the hit determination, and the determination result corresponds to either a big hit, a small hit or a hit. Decide what to do. The result of the hit / miss determination is temporarily stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage unit 180 (for example, big hit data “55H”, small hit data “33H”, outlier data “00H”), and is used in the subsequent processing. After the change, the special symbol will be cleared when it stops changing. The special symbol win / loss determination means 141 holds a special symbol win / loss lottery table that is referred to in the win / loss determination.

Here, FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing a special symbol winning / winning lottery table. FIG. 5 (A) is referred to in a gaming state (low probability state) in which the probability varying function of the special symbol is not operating, and FIG. 5 (B) is a gaming state in which the probability varying function of the special symbol is operating (high probability). State). The special symbol win / loss lottery table is associated with the random number range of the random number per special symbol, and the result of the determination of win / loss of the special symbol (big hit, out). As shown in FIG. 5, in the determination of whether or not the special symbol is valid, the gaming state in which the probability varying function of the special symbol is not operating (low probability state), the random number per special symbol corresponds to the range of “0 to 204”. In the case of a big hit, in the gaming state (high probability state) in which the probability varying function of the special symbol is operating, it becomes a big hit when the random value per special symbol falls within the range of "0-1506". That is, when the probability varying function of the special symbol operates, the winning probability of the big hit varies from "1 / 319.69" having a low probability to "1 / 43.49" having a high probability. In this way, the winning probability of the big hit changes according to the game state, but the winning probability of the big hit is set to be the same in the winning / failing judgment of the first special symbol and the winning judgment of the second special symbol. In addition, in the present embodiment, "small hit" is not set as the result of the special symbol hit determination, but "small hit" may be set as the result of the special symbol hit determination. The winning probability of the small hit is set to the same winning probability regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state).

  The special symbol stop symbol determination means 142 determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, based on the result of the winning / losing lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 6, the special symbol stop symbol determination means 142 is the first special symbol big hit symbol table and the second special symbol which is referred to when determining the big hit symbols (big hit type) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It has a special symbol jackpot symbol table. In the present embodiment, "specific jackpot" means a jackpot (probability variation jackpot) that triggers the probability variation function of the special symbol after the jackpot game is over, and "normal jackpot" is a special symbol after the jackpot game is over. It means a big hit (uncertain variation big hit) that does not trigger the probability fluctuation function of.

  In this embodiment, a normal game state, a time saving game state, and a probability variation game state are set as a plurality of types of game states. As the type of the game state, (1) the probability variation function of the special symbol, the variation time shortening function of the special symbol and the game state in which the electric Chu support function operates are referred to as "probability variation state" or "probability variation game state", ( 2) The probability state of the special symbol does not work, the game state in which the special symbol variation time shortening function and the electric Chu support function operates is called "time saving state" or "time saving game state", and (3) all A state in which the function is not operating is called a "normal state" or a "normal game state". Here, it can be said that the “probability variation gaming state” and the “time saving gaming state” are advantageous gaming states for the player as compared with the “normal gaming state”. Therefore, in the following, the probability variation game state and the time saving game state are also referred to as "advantageous game state" as a game state having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the normal game state.

In addition, each gaming state is a combination of the operating state (high probability state / low probability state) of the probability variation function of the special symbol and the operating state (high base state / low base state) of the electric Chu support function, (1 ) The probability variation game state can be expressed as "high probability high base state", (2) time saving game state can be expressed as "low probability high base state", and (3) normal game state can be expressed as "low probability low base state". In addition, the operating state of the probability variation function is a high probability state, while the operating state of the electric Chu support function is a low base state game state (a game state that is advantageous to the player as compared to the "normal game state"). 1) may be provided, and such a gaming state may be referred to as a latent probability gaming state, and this latent probability gaming state may be expressed as a “high probability low base state”. This latent probability gaming state ("highly accurate low base state") is a gaming state suitable for playing a game mainly for small hits, and details will be described later. As for these states (combination state of low probability / high probability and low base / high base), unless otherwise noted, a game state in a state where the big hit or the small hit is not (it is possible to judge whether or not to win). State), but during the big hit is a low probability low base state, during the small hit will be the same gaming state as the small hit winning game state. At this time, the variation time shortening function of the special symbol is a state in which the variation time of the special symbol that is the main subject of the game is shortened in at least the game state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Means that. That is, in the present embodiment, when the variation time reduction function of the special symbol operates, in the gaming state in which the variation display of the first special symbol is the main subject of the game (normal gaming state), at least the variation time of the first special symbol ( Average variation time) is shortened, variation display of the second special symbol is the main game of the game state (probability variation gaming state, latent probability gaming state, time saving game state), at least the variation time of the second special symbol (average variation) Time) is shortened.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit, the game state after the end of the big hit game is (1) a big hit type (a type of symbol group), and (2) a big hit winning game. It is decided according to the condition. In addition, the number of times each gaming state continues (the number of times the special symbol changes and displays) is the number of times the probability changing function of the special symbol operates (called the "number of times of probability change"), and the variable time shortening function of the special symbol operates. It is set in accordance with the number of times (referred to as “the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time”) and the number of times the electric power support function operates (referred to as “the number of electric power support”). In the present embodiment, the special symbol variation time shortening function and the electric Chu support function start the operations at the same time and end the operations at the same time, so that the “variation time shortening frequency” and the “electric power support frequency” are the same number of times. (Therefore, in FIG. 6, “the number of times of shortening of the fluctuation time” and “the number of times of electric support operation” are described in the same column).

  FIG. 6 (A) is a diagram schematically showing the first special symbol jackpot symbol table. This first special symbol big hit symbol table, for the symbol random number per special symbol, symbol group, big hit type, probability fluctuation frequency, fluctuation time shortening frequency (electric power support frequency), regular round number of jackpot game, each round The opening time (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 is associated with each other (in this example, the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the first special symbol jackpot table, two kinds of jackpot types are set corresponding to each symbol group. Specifically, two types of big hits (symbol group) are distributed to a 4R specific big hit (symbol group A) and a 4R normal big hit (symbol group B).

(4R specific jackpot: symbol group A)
If you win the "4R special jackpot (symbol group A)" of the first special symbol, the probability fluctuation frequency "10000 times", fluctuation time reduction frequency "10000 times", power support frequency "10000 times" is set, and jackpot game The probability variation game state is set as the game state after the end of. In this probability variation game state, a huge number of "10000 times" is set as the number of continuations (probability variation number, variation time shortening number, power support number), and the jackpot is not won until the continuation number is reached. Can't be stochastically (winning about 1/44), so it continues until the next big hit occurs. In addition, when the first special symbol “4R specific big hit (symbol group A)” is won, the maximum number of opening times of the special winning opening 54 in one round game is “4 rounds” as the prescribed number of rounds of the big hit game. It is "29 seconds".

(4R normal big hit: symbol group B)
If you win the first special symbol "4R normal big hit (symbol group B)", probability change times "0 times", fluctuation time reduction times "100 times", electric support times "100 times" are set, big hit game The time saving game state is set as the game state after the end of. At this time, the short game state continues until the number of times the variable display of the special symbol reaches 100 times, or until the next big hit occurs within 100 times. When the time saving game state ends when the variable display number of special symbols reaches 100 times, the variable display of the next special symbol shifts to the normal game state. In addition, when the first special symbol “4R normal big hit (symbol group B)” is won, the maximum number of times the big winning opening 54 in one round game is the prescribed round number of the big hit game is “4 rounds”. It is "29 seconds".

FIG. 6B is a diagram schematically showing the second special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this second special symbol big hit symbol table, for the symbol random number per special symbol, symbol group, big hit type, probability fluctuation frequency, fluctuation time shortening frequency (electric support frequency), specified round number of jackpot game, each round The opening time (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 is associated with each other (in this example, the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the second special symbol jackpot table, three kinds of jackpot types are set corresponding to each symbol group. Specifically, as three types of big hits (symbol group), 16R specific big hit (symbol group C), 4R specific big hit (symbol group D), and 4R normal big jackpot (symbol group E) are distributed.

(16R special jackpot: symbol group C)
If you win the "16R special jackpot (symbol group C)" of the second special symbol, the probability fluctuation frequency "10000 times", fluctuation time reduction frequency "10000 times", power support frequency "10000 times" is set, and jackpot game The probability variation game state is set as the game state after the end of. As described above, the probability variation gaming state is set to a huge number of times "10000 times" as the number of continuations, and substantially continues until the next big hit occurs. In addition, when the second special symbol “16R specific big hit (symbol group C)” is won, the maximum number of opening times of the special winning opening 54 in one round game is that the prescribed number of rounds of the big hit game is “4 rounds”. It is "29 seconds". In addition, this 16R special jackpot may be a specification for winning the first special symbol, in which case it is more difficult to win than the second special symbol (as an example, 5% of all jackpot symbols, In one special design, 16R specific jackpot is 5%, 4R specific jackpot is 60%, and 4R regular jackpot is 35%).

(4R special jackpot: symbol group D)
If you win the "4R special jackpot (symbol group D)" of the second special symbol, the probability fluctuation frequency "10000 times", fluctuation time reduction frequency "10000 times", power support frequency "10000 times" is set, and jackpot game The probability variation game state is set as the game state after the end of. As described above, the probability variation gaming state is set to a huge number of times "10000 times" as the number of continuations, and substantially continues until the next big hit occurs. When the second special symbol “4R special jackpot (symbol group D)” is won, the maximum number of times the big winning hole 54 is opened in one round game is “4 rounds” as the prescribed number of rounds in the jackpot game. It is "29 seconds".

(4R regular big hit: symbol group E)
If you win the "4R normal jackpot (symbol group E)" of the second special symbol, the probability fluctuation frequency "0 times", fluctuation time reduction frequency "100 times", power support frequency "100 times" is set, and jackpot game The time saving game state is set as the game state after the end of. At this time, the short game state continues until the number of times the variable display of the special symbol reaches 100 times, or until the next big hit occurs within 100 times. When the time saving game state ends when the variable display number of special symbols reaches 100 times, the variable display of the next special symbol shifts to the normal game state. When the second special symbol "4R normal big hit (symbol group E)" is won, the maximum number of times that the big winning hole 54 can be opened in one round game is when the specified number of rounds of the big hit game is "4 rounds". It is "29 seconds".

Here, in the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, three types of 16R specific jackpot (symbol group C), 4R specified jackpot (symbol group A, D), and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group B, E) are provided. Has been. The expected value for winning a prize ball in a special game (referred to as "expected winning ball value") is 16R specific jackpot> 4R specific jackpot = 4R normal jackpot. Here, the actual round number of the special game when the big hit in the first special symbol is "4 rounds", whereas the actual round number of the special game when the big jackpot is won in the second special symbol is " Since 16 rounds ", when a big hit occurs in the second special symbol, it is more likely to move to a special game with a larger number of rounds than when a big hit occurs in the first special symbol. It is advantageous for the player in that they can get balls. The actual number of rounds of this special game corresponds to the number of executions of the "long open round game" set for that special game. In the present embodiment, the maximum opening time of each round of the big hit game is a fixed time of 29 seconds (all rounds are "long open round games"), but a predetermined round during the same big hit game. Or, in all rounds, a "short opening round game" that shortens the maximum opening time of the special winning opening 54 to 2 seconds is provided so that even if the number of rounds of the big hit game is substantially the A configuration having jackpots with different round numbers that can be obtained (actual jackpots with different round numbers) may be adopted. In the long open round game, the opening time (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 is set so that a predetermined number of game balls (full count = 10 balls) can be or easily entered into the special winning opening 54. It is a round game. The short opening round game is a round in which the opening time (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 is set to be impossible or difficult to enter the game balls of the specified count number (full count = 10 balls) in the special winning opening 54. It is a game.

  The special symbol fluctuation pattern determination unit 143 determines the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol based on the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. Here, the special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 holds a plurality of types of variation pattern tables that are referred to when selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol. The special symbol fluctuation pattern determination means 143 selects any fluctuation pattern table from plural kinds of fluctuation pattern tables based on the current fluctuation pattern selection state. The relationship between the variation pattern selection state and the variation pattern table will be described later. A plurality of types of variation patterns are defined in each variation pattern table. In each figure, for convenience of description, the "selectivity" is shown, but in practice, the judgment value (range of random number values) for determining the variation pattern is set according to the special symbol variation pattern random value. The fluctuation pattern is determined based on which judgment value the fluctuation pattern random value belongs to. The various variation patterns are associated with the variation time for each variation pattern as the ending condition of the variation display of the special symbol, and it is premised that the variation display of the decorative symbol is also executed at the variation time. .

  Here, the variation pattern selection state will be described. The variation pattern selection state is one of the selection conditions referred to when selecting a variation pattern (variation pattern table). In this example, a “normal selection state”, a “time saving selection state”, and a “probability variation selection state” are set as a plurality of types of variation pattern selection states. The normal selection state is a variation pattern selection state that is set in correspondence with a game state (normal game state) in which neither the probability variation function of the special symbol and the variation time shortening function, nor the electric choo support function is operating. Time saving selection state, the probability variation function of the special symbol is not operating, but the variation that is set corresponding to the gaming state (time saving gaming state) in which the special symbol variation time shortening function and the electric Chu support function are operating The pattern is selected. The probability variation selection state is a variation pattern selection state that is set in correspondence with the game state (probability variation game state) in which all of the special symbol probability variation function and variation time shortening function, and the electronic Chu support function are operating.

  As for the variation pattern table of the special symbol, as shown in FIGS. 7 to 9, the columns referred to by the first special symbol and the second special symbol are different, and the same special symbol variation pattern random value is acquired. Even if it does, different variation patterns can be selected. Here, the number of operation-holding balls described in each figure (“holding 0 pieces”, “holding 1-2 pieces”, “holding 3 pieces”) is a variation pattern lottery of the first special symbol, The number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol (the number of operation-holding balls after the holding digestion) means, if it is a variation pattern lottery of the second special symbol, the number of operation-holding balls of the second special symbol (after the holding digestion) The number of holding balls). The number of operation-holding balls is the number of operation-holding balls that exist at the time of the variation pattern lottery (at the start of the change display / after the hold exhaustion) (not including the operation-holding balls exhausted by the change display). .. In addition, as the modification, you may use the total value of the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The variation effect of the decorative symbol that is performed in conjunction with the variable display of the special symbol is determined based on the type (variation time) of the variation pattern of the special symbol. For reference, FIGS. 7 to 9 also show the content of the variation effect set corresponding to each variation pattern (variation time). In the figure, "ultra-shortening variation", "shortening variation", and "normal variation" are three rows of decorative patterns that fluctuate and do not go through the reach state even once, and become "out of focus" in so-called variability. Is. Hereinafter, the ultra-shortening fluctuation, the shortening fluctuation, and the normal fluctuation are collectively referred to as "non-reach outliers". The non-reach out-of-range types are different from each other in that the variation display is stopped in a shorter time than the normal variation and the ultra-short variation is shorter than the short variation.

  "N-reach (normal reach)" is a state (reach state) where the same decorative pattern is stopped in two rows (generally the left row and the right row) of the three rows of decorative patterns, and the remaining one row (general) In the middle row), if different decorative symbols are stopped in the middle row, it becomes “out”, and if the same decorative symbol is stopped in the remaining one row (generally in the middle row), it is “big hit”.

  "SP reach" is a reach production that has a relatively high expectation for a big hit compared to the N reach described above. It develops from N reach after the reach is established, and still images and movies such as animation and live action. Is displayed. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of SP reach A to C are prepared as the types of SP reach. SP reach A is a reach effect executed when the currently executed game state is the normal state. SP reach B is a reach effect executed when the currently executed game state is the time saving game state. SP reach C is a reach effect executed when the currently executed game state is the probability variation game state. In the variation pattern type of the present embodiment, the jackpot expectation is set to increase in the order of “non-reach” <“N reach” <“SP reach”. As a modification, the contents of the SP reach effect may be the same (SP reach A) in the normal state and the time saving game state, and may be a different SP reach (SP reach C) in the probability variation game state. Further, as another modification, a variation pattern including pseudo-relation may be prepared. Pseudo-relation means that the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (pseudo stop, temporarily stopped) and re-variably displayed during one variable display of the decorative pattern, so that the pseudo variable display is performed plural times. Is a production (pseudo continuous production, pseudo variation production, pseudo continuous variation production, re-variation production). That is, the pseudo-link is an effect in which the pseudo-variation in which all of the three rows of decorative symbols start changing or re-changing and then temporarily stopped or definitely stopped is executed a plurality of times. It is shown that the larger the number of pseudo runs (the number of pseudo fluctuations), the higher the possibility of developing SP reach with a high expectation of a big hit.

(Variation pattern table 1)
FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 1. The variation pattern table 1 is a variation pattern table set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the normal selection state. The variation pattern table 1 has different table contents depending on the result (big hit, out) of the special symbol.

Variation patterns PH1-1 (shortening variation), PH1-2 (normal variation), PH1-3 (N reach), PH1-4 (SP reach A) are set in the variation pattern table 1 for the outlier. Here, when the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is "out", variation pattern PH1-1 (shortening variation), PH1-2 (normal variation), PH1-3 (N reach), PH1-4 Any one of (SP reach A) is selected. In the present embodiment, when the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is “out”, the reference destination is determined according to the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol (0/1/2/3) The table contents are set to be different, and even if the acquired special symbol fluctuation pattern random value is the same, different fluctuation patterns can be selected. Specifically, the larger the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol, the easier it is to select the variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is set relatively short, and the number of operation retaining balls of the first special symbol is The smaller the number, the easier the variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is set to be relatively long. On the other hand, if the result of the judgment result of the second special symbol is “out”, the variation time is relative without depending on the number of operation-holding balls of the second special symbol (0/1/2/3) The variation pattern PH1-1 (shortening variation) or PH1-2 (normal variation) that is set to be relatively short is selected. As a modified example, when the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is “out”, only the main variation pattern PH1-2 of the shortened variation is selected without depending on the number of operation pending of the second special symbol. Alternatively, the variation pattern PH1-2 of the shortening variation may be most easily selected (the selection ratio is preferably the same regardless of the number of operation retaining balls of the second special symbol).

  Variation patterns PA1-1 (N reach) and PA1-2 (SP reach A) are set in the variation pattern table 1 for big hits. Here, when the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PA1-1 (N reach) or PA1-2 (SP reach A) is selected without depending on the big hit type. Similarly, when the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PA1-1 (N reach) or PA1-2 (SP reach A) is selected without depending on the big hit type.

(Variation pattern table 2)
FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 2. The fluctuation pattern table 2 is a fluctuation pattern table set when the fluctuation pattern selection state during the current stay is the time saving selection state. The fluctuation pattern table 2 has different table contents depending on the result (big hit, miss) of the special symbol.

  Variation patterns PH2-1 (ultra-shortening variation), PH2-2 (normal variation), PH2-3 (N reach), PH2-4 (SP reach B) are set in the variation pattern table 2 for out-of-range. .. Here, if the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is out of alignment, the variation pattern PH2-, without depending on the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol (0/1/2/3) Any one of 2 (normal fluctuation), PH2-3 (N reach) and PH2-4 (SP reach A) is selected. That is, when the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is out of alignment, the variation pattern PH2-1 (super shortening variation) is selected regardless of how many operation-holding balls of the first special symbol exist. There is no such thing. On the other hand, in the case where the result of the determination result of the second special symbol is “out”, variation patterns PH2-1 (super shortening variation), PH2-2 (normal variation), PH2-3 (N reach), PH2-4 Any one of (SP reach B) is selected. In the present embodiment, when the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is “out”, the reference destination is determined according to the number of operation-holding balls of the second special symbol (0/1 to 2/3). The table contents are set to be different, and even if the acquired special symbol fluctuation pattern random value is the same, different fluctuation patterns can be selected. Specifically, when the operation holding ball of the second special symbol does not exist, the fluctuation pattern PH2-1 (super shortening fluctuation) is not selected, and the operation holding ball of the second special symbol exists. If it is, the more the number of operation holding balls of the second special symbol, the more likely the variation pattern PH2-1 (ultra-shortening variation) is selected.

  Variation patterns PA2-1 (N reach) and PA2-2 (SP reach B) are set in the variation pattern table 2 for big hits. Here, when the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PA2-1 (N reach) or PA2-2 (SP reach B) is selected without depending on the big hit type. Similarly, when the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PA2-1 (N reach) or PA2-2 (SP reach B) is selected without depending on the big hit type.

(Variation pattern table 3)
FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing the fluctuation pattern table 3. The variation pattern table 3 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the probability variation selection state. The fluctuation pattern table 3 has different table contents depending on the result (big hit, miss) of the special symbol.

In the fluctuation pattern table 3 for the deviation, fluctuation patterns PH3-1 (super shortening fluctuation), P
H3-2 (normal fluctuation) and PH3-3 (SP reach C) are set. Here, when the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is "out", it does not depend on the number of operation-holding balls (0/1/2/3) of the first special symbol, and the variation pattern PH3- 2 (normal fluctuation) or PH3-3 (SP reach C) is selected. That is, when the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is out of alignment, the variation pattern PH3-1 (super shortening variation) is selected regardless of how many operation-holding balls of the first special symbol exist. There is no such thing. On the other hand, if the result of the determination result of the second special symbol is out of alignment, any one of the fluctuation patterns PH3-1 (super shortening fluctuation), PH3-2 (normal fluctuation), PH3-3 (SP reach C) is selected. To be done. At this time, if the result of the judgment result of the second special symbol is out of alignment, depending on the number of operation holding balls of the second special symbol (specifically, depending on the presence or absence of the operation holding ball of the second special symbol) The table contents are set to be different, and even if the acquired special symbol fluctuation pattern random value is the same, different fluctuation patterns can be selected. Specifically, if the operation holding ball of the second special symbol does not exist, the variation pattern PH3-1 (super shortening change) is not selected, and the operation holding ball of the second special symbol exists. Since the variation pattern PH3-1 (super shortening variation) can be selected only when there is an operation holding ball of the second special symbol than when the operation holding ball of the second special symbol does not exist, This tends to make it easier to select a fluctuation pattern having a relatively short fluctuation time.

  A variation pattern PA3-1 (SP reach C) is set in the variation pattern table 3 for big hits. Here, when the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PA3-1 (SP reach C) is selected without depending on the big hit type (4R specific big hit, 4R normal big hit). Similarly, when the result of the determination result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PA3-1 (SP reach C) does not depend on the big hit type (16R specific big hit, 4R specific big hit, 4R normal big hit). Selected.

  As described above, in the fluctuation pattern tables 1 to 3, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is defined for each fluctuation pattern, but no matter which fluctuation pattern is selected, the fixed stop time of the special symbol (fixed The display time) is set to "0.5 seconds". The fixed stop time of the special symbol (confirmed display time) is the time when the special symbol is definitely stopped and displayed (the time when the completely stopped state is held). In addition, in this embodiment, the variation time and the fixed stop time of the decorative symbol are also set in correspondence with the variation time and the fixed stop time of the special symbol. In addition, in the variation pattern tables 1 to 3, the effect content and the variation time may be the same as those at the time of a big hit, but it is preferable to make the final effect contents different at the time of a big hit and at the time of departure. In other words, even with the same N reach, when the jackpot is large, the decorative design becomes flattering (example: "7/7/7"), while when it is out, the decorative pattern is out of reach (example: "7.8").・ 7 ”) or the same SP reach A to C, when the big hit, the final effect content is the effect content indicating success, and the decorative pattern is a flat pattern (eg, a ally character wins over an enemy character). , And then "7/7/7" is displayed), while the final production content is a production content that indicates failure when it is off, the decorative pattern is out of reach (example: ally character is enemy character) It is preferable to be defeated and then "7/8/7" is displayed). Further, it is preferable that the variation time (rendering time) is longer during the big hit than when the jackpot is off, even if the contents are the same (when the SP reach is developed). It is preferable that the SP reach A to C at the time of a big hit have a variation time (effect time) longer by 10 seconds than the SP reach A to C at the time of a big hit.

After the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination means 143 selects the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, in order to instruct the effect control board 200 to start changing the decorative symbol, is communication with the effect control board 200 normally performed? Production control command (communication inspection command) for confirming whether or not, production control command (variation additional information designation command) including a variation addition pattern (information for adding and subtracting variation time) of special symbols, variation pattern of special symbols Production control command (variation pattern designation command) including information, production control command (symbol designation command) including information of character production number (symbol group and game state), etc. are generated (hereinafter, these commands are collectively referred to as " This is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180.

  The normal symbol lottery processing means 145 has a normal symbol winning / discarding determination means 146, a normal symbol stop symbol determining means 147, and a normal symbol variation pattern determining means 148. Normal symbol lottery processing means 145, when the fluctuation start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, the random number per normal symbol stored in the first storage area in the normal symbol holding storage area, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number value is read, The main symbol storage unit 180 stores the normal symbol validity determination area and the normal symbol variation pattern determination area, respectively. Here, the "variation start condition of the normal symbol" means that (1) the normal symbol variation standby is in progress, and (2) the operation reserve ball of the normal symbol exists. When all of these conditions are satisfied, it is determined that the normal symbol is in a state in which fluctuation start is possible (condition in which the fluctuation start condition is satisfied).

  The normal symbol hit determination unit 146 reads the random number per normal symbol from the normal symbol hit determination region of the main information storage unit 180 and executes the hit determination of the normal symbol, and the determination result is either "hit" or "off". To determine if The result of the determination of whether or not this normal symbol is temporarily stored in the normal symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180, is used in the subsequent processing, and then cleared when the variation of the normal symbol is stopped. The normal symbol hit / miss determination means 146 holds an unillustrated normal symbol hit / miss lottery table that is referred to when hitting or hitting this normal symbol. The normal symbol hit probability is set to "1/3001" when the electric Chu support function (ordinary symbol probability variation function) is not activated, and the electric Chu support function (ordinary symbol probability variation function) is activated. If it is, it is set to “2999/3001”.

  Normal symbol stop symbol determination means 147 refers to a normal symbol stop symbol table (not shown), if the result of the normal symbol hit determination is a hit, a predetermined hit symbol (ordinary electric accessory 522 trigger On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination of the normal symbol is out, a predetermined out symbol (a stop symbol that does not trigger the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 522) is selected. In the present embodiment, the symbols A and B are assigned as the hit symbols of the ordinary symbol, while the symbol C is assigned as the outlier symbol of the ordinary symbol.

  Normal symbol variation pattern determination means 148, while reading the normal symbol variation pattern random value from the normal symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180, referring to a normal symbol variation pattern table (not shown), variation pattern of the ordinary symbol (Variation time) is determined. The variation time of the normal symbol is set to "0.6 seconds" when the electric Chu support function (variation time shortening function of the ordinary symbol) is not operating, and the electric Chu support function (variation time shortening function of the ordinary symbol) If is operating, it is set to "0.2 seconds". Regardless of which variation pattern of the normal symbol is selected, the fixed stop time (confirmed display time) of the normal symbol is set to "0.1 seconds". The fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the normal symbol is the time when the normal symbol is definitely stopped and displayed (the time when the completely stopped state is held). Incidentally, in the control of the normal symbol, in order to reduce the processing load of the main control board 100, when the electric Chu support function is not operating, the hit probability of the hit determination of the normal symbol is set to "0", and the normal symbol It is also conceivable to adopt a specification in which the fluctuation time of is single.

In addition, the normal symbol lottery processing means 145 determines the opening pattern (opening time) of the normal electric auditors product 522 according to the result of the determination of the normal symbol. The normal symbol lottery processing means 145 holds the normal electric auditors product opening pattern table that is referred to when determining the opening pattern (opening time) of the normal electric auditors product 522. The opening pattern (opening time) of the ordinary electric accessory 522 is set to "0.2 seconds" when the electric Chu support function (open extension function) is not operating, and the electric Chu support function (open extension function) is set. If it is operating, "5.8 seconds" is set. In addition, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 522 may be different depending on the type of the hit symbol of the normal symbol. For example, as the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 522, when the electric Chu support function (open extension function) is operating, if the hit symbol of the ordinary symbol is the symbol A, “3 seconds open × 1 time → 2. 8 seconds open x 1 time (total open time 5.8 seconds) ", if the normal symbol hit symbol is B, then" 2.8 seconds open x 1 time → 3 seconds open x 1 time (total open time 5 . 8 seconds) ".

The special game control means 150, when the result of the hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, according to the determined big hit type (symbol group), a big hit start demonstration and a big hit end demonstration execution time (demo time), The execution time of the round game (round time) is determined. Then, the special game control means 150 instructs the effect control board 200 side to execute a big hit start demonstration effect (referred to as "big hit start demo command") and a big hit end demonstration effect. An effect control command (referred to as "big hit end demo command") to be generated is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. The big hit start demo command is also an opportunity for determining the contents of a series of big hit mid-range effects (a big hit start demonstration effect, a round effect, and a big hit end demonstration effect) that are developed during the big hit game on the effect control board 200 side. Become. In addition, the special game control means 150 generates an effect control command (referred to as "round effect designation command") for instructing the start of the round effect corresponding to each round game in each round game during the big hit game. , And stores it in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. The round effect designation command includes information on the current number of rounds, information on opening and closing of the special winning opening 54, and the like. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 11, in the present embodiment, the execution time of the big hit start demo is set to 5 seconds and the execution time of the big hit end demo is set to 20 seconds. Regarding the execution time (demonstration time) of the end demo, not only the big hit type (symbol group), but depending on the gaming state at the time of big hit winning, even if it is the same big hit type (symbol group), big hit start demonstration or big hit The execution time (demo time) of the end demo may be different. For example, assuming that the 16R specific jackpot is won even with the first special symbol, for the 4R regular jackpot, when the jackpot is a big hit in a low probability low base state, the execution time of the jackpot start demo is 5 seconds (as a jackpot start demonstration production. , The effect A-1 displayed as "normal big hit start" is executed, and the execution time of the big hit end demo is 15 seconds (as a big hit end demo effect, effect B-1 and prepaid are displayed. The card (* there is a storage medium that stores information about the amount of money required to rent a game ball for playing games), while performing the production C that calls attention to forgetting to take it), while high probability high base state or low probability In the case of a big hit in the high base state, the big hit start demonstration has an execution time of 5 seconds (the big hit start demonstration effect, A1 is executed), and the big hit end demo has an execution time of 10 seconds (the big hit end demonstration effect, The production B-1 is executed and the production C is not executed), and for the 16R specific jackpot and the 4R specific jackpot, when the jackpot is a big hit in the low probability low base state, the execution time of the jackpot start demo is 5 seconds (the jackpot start demo). As the effect, the effect A-2 displayed as "probable variation big hit start" is executed), and the execution time of the big hit end demo is 20 seconds (as the big hit end demonstration presentation, effect B-2 displayed as "probability variation mode rush") And when the big hit in the high-probability high base state or the low probability high-base state, the execution time of the jackpot start demo is 5 seconds (run the effect A-2 as the jackpot start demonstration production) The execution time of the big hit end demo may be 10 seconds (as the big hit end demonstration effect, effect B-3 displayed as “continuation of probability variation mode” is executed, and effect C is not executed). In addition, assuming that the 16R special jackpot is won even in the first special symbol, if it is a big hit with the first special symbol, regardless of the gaming state at the time of big hit, the execution time of the big hit start demo is 5 seconds (16R special jackpot) In each of the 4R specific jackpot and the 4R normal jackpot, 5 seconds is set, the jackpot start demonstration performance is performed as the effect A-1 or the effect A-2, and the execution time of the jackpot end demo is 30 seconds (16R specified jackpot and It takes 30 seconds for the 4R specific jackpot and executes the effect B-2 and effect C as the big hit end demonstration effect. However, for the 4R normal big hit, it takes 15 seconds and the effect B-1 and effect C as the big hit end demonstration effect. On the other hand, if it is a big hit with the second special symbol, regardless of the game state at the time of big hit, the execution time of the big hit start demonstration is 5 seconds (16R specific big hit, 4R specific big hit, 4R normal big hit in any It is 5 seconds, the big hit start demonstration performance is effect A-1 or performance A-2), and the big hit end demo is 20 seconds (16R specific big hit and 4R particular big hit 20 seconds, big hit end demo) As an effect, effect B-3 is executed and effect C is not executed. However, 10 seconds for a 4R normal big hit, and effect B-1 is executed and effect C is not executed as a big hit end demonstration effect). .. This time value relationship is an example, and the time value is not limited to this value as long as the size relationship between the demo times in each situation is the same as above. Also, in any of the above specifications, when the big hit in the high probability high base state or the low probability high base state, the effect C does not occur, but during the variation or big hit game (during special game) related to the big hit When the power failure occurs and the power is restored during the fluctuation or the big hit game, the effect C may be exceptionally generated.

  The symbol display control means 155 includes a special symbol display control means 156 and a normal symbol display control means 157. The special symbol display control means 156 variably displays the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 71 according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol, and after the variation display, the first special symbol is fixedly displayed. Let In addition, the special symbol display control means 156 variably displays the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 72 according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol, and after the variation display, the second special symbol. Confirm display. Special symbol display control means 156 has a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variation time, fixed display time) relating to the display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The operating states of the first special symbol display device 71 and the second special symbol display device 72 are monitored based on the special symbol game status of the main information storage means 180. Special symbol display control means 156, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped (that is, at the timing when the value of the special symbol game timer becomes “0”), the effect control board 200 is requested to confirm the decorative symbol. A production control command (referred to as a “fluctuation stop command”) is generated. The normal symbol display control means 157 changes the normal symbol to the normal symbol display device 75 according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the ordinary symbol, and after the variable display, the normal symbol is fixedly displayed. Normal symbol display control means 157 has a normal symbol game timer for managing the time (variation time, fixed display time) relating to the display of the normal symbol. The operating state of the normal symbol display device 75 is monitored based on the normal symbol game status of the main information storage means 180.

  Further, the special symbol display control means 156, when the game interrupted state continues for a predetermined time or more, a production control command (referred to as a "standby demo command") that triggers execution of a standby demo production (customer waiting demo production). It is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. "The game interrupted state continues for a predetermined time or more" means that there is no special symbol operation holding ball, and the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not continued continues for a predetermined time or more. If the game ball has not been fired for a predetermined time or more, or if the game ball has not entered all the winning openings for a predetermined time or more, the game is suspended for a predetermined time or more. The specification may be continued.

When the result of the hit / no hit judgment of the special symbol is a big hit, the electric accessory control device 160 outputs a control signal to the special electric accessory solenoid 543 as a big hit game process after the confirmation display of the special symbol, and the special electric prize. The open / close control of the object 542 is performed according to a predetermined operation pattern. In the big hit game, one opening / closing operation of the special electric auditors product 542 is regarded as one round game (unit game), and the round game is continuously executed for a specified number of rounds. The electric accessory control unit 160 holds a special winning opening opening counter for storing the number of times the special electric accessory 542 is operated (that is, the number of rounds being executed). Here, the operation end condition of the special electric auditors product 542 in the big hit game (end condition of the unit game) is a specified count number (“10” in the present embodiment) of game balls entering the special winning opening 54. Or, the opening time of the special winning opening 54 has reached the maximum opening time (“29 seconds” in this embodiment).

  In addition, when the result of the hit determination of the normal symbol corresponds to the hit, the electric accessory control unit 160 outputs a control signal to the normal electric accessory solenoid 523, and the normal electric accessory 522 (first time) for a predetermined opening time. (2) The opening / closing of the starting port 52) is controlled. Here, as described above, the electric accessory control unit 160 opens the normal electric accessory 522 only for 0.2 seconds in the low base state in which the electric tuner support function (open extension function) is not operating. Then, in the high base state in which the electric power support function (open extension function) is operating, the normal electric accessory 522 is opened for 5.8 seconds. Here, the operation end condition of the ordinary electric accessory 522 is that a predetermined number (“10” in this embodiment) of game balls have entered the second starting opening 52, or the second starting opening 52 The release time has reached the maximum release time (“0.2 seconds” or “5.8 seconds” in this embodiment).

  The game state control means 165, when the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit, based on the big hit type (the kind of symbol group) and the big hit big hit game. The game state after the end of is determined and the game state after the big hit game is switched. In the present embodiment, as described above, as a plurality of types of game states, a normal game state (low probability low base state), a time saving game state (low probability low base state), a probability variation game state (high probability high base state) It is set, and any one of a plurality of types of gaming states is set alternatively. Since each game state has already been described in detail, duplicate description will be omitted here.

  Further, when the big hit game is executed, the game state control means 165 determines the variation pattern selection state after the end of the big hit game based on the big hit type (type of symbol group), and after the end of the big hit game. Change the variation pattern selection state of. In the present embodiment, as a plurality of types of variation pattern selection states, a normal selection state, a time saving selection state, and a probability variation selection state are set, depending on the determined game state, jackpot type, variation display number of special symbols, etc. Thus, any one of the plurality of types of fluctuation pattern selection states is set alternatively. Since each variation pattern selection state has already been described in detail, redundant description will be omitted here.

  Further, the game state control means 165 generates an effect control command (referred to as a “game state designation command”) including the current game state information and the variation pattern selection state information, and stores this in the command storage of the main information storage means 180. Store in area.

  The error monitoring control means 170 monitors the input information of the I / O port circuit 104 and inspects a magnetic detection signal by a magnetic sensor, a disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, a radio detection signal by a radio sensor, a door / frame opening signal, and the like. , It is determined whether the gaming machine is in an error state. In the case of an error state, a performance control command (“error performance designation command”) including the error information is requested in order to instruct the performance control board 200 of the error status performance. Although not shown in FIG. 4 and the like, the door opening switch is a detection means for detecting whether the glass frame 5 is open, and the frame opening switch detects whether the front frame 2 is open. The back set opening switch is a means for detecting whether or not the back setting board 30 is opened. Further, the magnetic sensor and the radio wave sensor are detection means for detecting a so-called illegal game action.

Main information storage means 180, random value information obtained in special symbol game and normal symbol game, special design and normal symbol operation holding ball information, gaming state related to special symbol game and normal symbol game (probability variation function, variation time) Information of shortening function, electric Chu support function), information on the variation pattern selection state, result information of the hit / miss judgment of special symbols and ordinary symbols (big hit, out), stop symbols (including symbol groups) relating to special symbols and ordinary symbols Information, information on fluctuation patterns (including fluctuation addition patterns) of special symbols and normal symbols, information on jackpot games (
Number of rounds, opening time, opening mode (opening number per round game), status information indicating the operating state of the special symbol display devices 71, 72, status information indicating the operating state of the special electric auditors product 542, production control It is configured to temporarily store information of command data and the like, and has a predetermined storage area for storing each information.

  The command transmitting / receiving unit 190 is configured to transmit various effect control command data stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 to the effect control board 200 by a parallel transmission method when a command transmission request is made. Has been done. Each effect control command has a 2-byte structure including 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte EVENT data. To distinguish MODE and EVENT, Bit 7 of MODE data is “1”, Bit7 of the EVENT data is set to "0". When these pieces of information are transmitted as valid information, a strobe signal is output at each transmission timing of MODE and EVENT. As a general rule, the effect control command generated in each process is transmitted one command for each interrupt cycle according to the order set in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180.

  The production control board 200, as shown in FIG. 4, the production lottery random number generation means 210, the production generalization means 220, the lamp control means 230, the accessory control means 240, the error production control means 250, the sub-main information storage means 260, the command. The transmitting / receiving means 270 is included. Each of the above-mentioned means in the effect control board 200 is configured by a sub-main CPU 201, a ROM 202, a RAM 203, hardware such as an electronic circuit arranged on the effect control board 200, and software such as a control program stored in the ROM 202. It is a functional representation of something.

  The effect lottery random number generation means 210 includes a random number counter for generating various software random numbers (effect lottery random numbers) by the program processing of the sub-main CPU 201. These random number counters play a role as random number generating means for generating random numbers by software. As this software random number, the prefetch lottery random number used in the lottery of the prefetch effect, the decorative pattern random number used in the lottery of the stop symbol of the decorative pattern, the variable effect pattern random number used in the lottery of the variable effect pattern of the decorative pattern, the notice effect It includes a preliminary lottery random number used for lottery, a big hit production pattern random number used for lottery of big hit production pattern, a stage lottery random number used for lottery of transition of production stage, and the like. As the update timing of these random numbers, update is performed by using the remaining time when command analysis is not performed in the production control side main processing described later (when the production control command is not received from the main control board 100). To do.

  The production generalizing means 220 includes the production mode control means 221, the hold information display control means 222, the prefetching notice control means 223, the variation production control means 224, the decorative symbol control means 225, the notice production control means 226, and the special game production control means 227. Including.

The production mode control means 221 is based on a game state designating command from the main control board 100 and the like, and is consistent with the game state and the variation pattern selection state managed on the main control board 100 side in the production mode (“ (Also referred to as "game production mode"). In the present embodiment, a "normal effect mode", a "time saving effect mode", and a "probable variation effect mode" are set as a plurality of kinds of effect modes, and a game state (or a variation pattern) managed on the main control board 100 side. Depending on the selection state) and the number of times of special symbol fluctuation display, one of a plurality of effect modes is selectively set, and a variable effect according to the set effect mode is executed. In the present embodiment, when the game state is the normal game state, the "normal effect mode" is set, when the game state is the time saving game state, the "time saving effect mode" is set, and the game state is the probability changing game state. In some cases, the "probability variation effect mode" is set. When one of the effect modes is set, as an effect (variable effect) that suggests that the user is staying in the effect mode, a background image dedicated to the effect mode on the screen (a background image that is a rear display of the decorative pattern) ) Is displayed, and BGM dedicated to the effect mode is output from the speaker 11. In this way, the background image and BGM are set to be different for each effect mode, so that the player can recognize from the type of background image or BGM which effect mode the player is currently staying in. ing.

  Hold information display control means 222, the first holding ball number counter for counting the operation holding ball number of the first special symbol, the second holding ball number counter for counting the operation holding ball number of the second special symbol Have When the hold information display control unit 222 receives the symbol storage number command from the main control board 100, it updates (adds) the value of the corresponding counter based on the information of the number of operation holding balls included in this command. On the other hand, when the hold information display control means 222 receives the fluctuation start command from the main control board 100, that is, when the operation hold ball is exhausted, it updates (subtracts) the value of the corresponding counter. Further, the hold information display control means 222, on the hold image display unit 710 of the effect display device 70, based on the values of the first hold ball number counter and the second hold ball number counter, the operation hold ball number of the first special symbol. The number of holding images corresponding to and the number of holding images corresponding to the number of operation holding balls of the second special symbol are controlled to be displayed. Further, the hold information display control means 222, in the changing image display area 720 of the effect display device 70, the operation holding ball (first operation holding ball) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is digested. , The control is performed to display the changing image displayed by switching to the holding image corresponding to the operation holding ball. In the present embodiment, unless explicitly stated, the reserved image of the first special symbol and the reserved image of the second special symbol are simply referred to as "reserved image", and the changing image of the first special symbol There is a case where it is simply referred to as a "changing image" without distinguishing it from the changing image of the second special symbol.

  The pre-reading notice control means 223 executes a pre-reading determination (referred to as “pre-reading lottery”) for the operation-reserving ball which is the target of the pre-reading notice production. The pre-reading notice production is a so-called continuous notice production that pre-announces the possibility of jackpot winning or high-expectation production (for example, reach production) over one or more variable displays before the pre-reading target operation-holding ball is exhausted. It is generated as one aspect. At this time, the prefetch lottery is performed based on the information on the preliminary determination result included in the preliminary determination command from the main control board 100. Here, when the pre-reading notice control means 223 receives the pre-judgment command from the main control board 100, the pre-judgment result information of the first special symbol and the pre-judgment result information of the second special symbol are distinguished, respectively. A predetermined upper limit number (four) is temporarily stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 in a form combined with the ball entry sequence of the operation-reserving balls. The read-ahead information storage area has the same configuration as the reserved storage area of the main control board 100, and the reserved 1 storage area (the first reserved storage area) is arranged in the order of entering the starting ports 51 and 52. A reserve 2 storage area (second reserve storage area), a reserve 3 storage area (third reserve storage area), and a reserve 4 storage area (fourth reserve storage area) are respectively provided. Each of the holding storage areas can store information on a result of prior judgment on success or failure, information on a result of preliminary pattern determination, and information on a result of variation pattern preliminary determination, respectively, as one set. The information of the preliminary determination result is stored in the order of the hold 1 storage area, the hold 2 storage area, the hold 3 storage area, and the hold 4 storage area, while the hold 1 storage area, the hold 2 storage area, the hold 3 storage area, and the hold 4 storage area. Digested in order of storage area (first-in first-out principle). Further, when the information of the preliminary determination result of the holding 1 storage area is consumed, the information of the preliminary determination result stored in the holding 2 storage area, the holding 3 storage area, and the holding 4 storage area is respectively stored in the storage areas of lower numbers. While shifting, the contents of the reserved 4 storage area are cleared to zero.

The variation effect control unit 224, based on the information (variation pattern information, variation addition information, etc.) included in the variation start command from the main control board 100, the variation process from the variation start to the stop in the variation display of the decorative pattern (production process). ) Is defined by lottery. The variation effect control means 224 holds a plurality of types of variation effect pattern tables that are referred to when selecting a variation effect pattern of a decorative symbol, and a variation pattern of a special symbol from these multiple types of variation effect pattern tables. A variation effect pattern table corresponding to (variation time) is selected. Here, on the main control board 100 side, a main variation pattern of a special symbol (for example, "SP reach A" or "SP reach B") is determined, while on the production control board 200 side, based on the main variation pattern. A sub-variation pattern (for example, “SP reach A1, A2 ...”, “SP reach A2, A3 ...”, etc.) of a decorative pattern that defines the scenario of the effect display process in detail is determined. In the variable effect pattern of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, that is, the scenario of a series of effect display process from the change start to the end of the change of the decorative pattern is defined, and a notice is given at each stage in the display process. The timing for producing the performance is also defined as a time schedule. Further, regarding the variation effect pattern of the decorative symbol, even if the variation pattern of the special symbol is the same (even when the variation start command of the same information is received), if the effect mode during the stay is different, the effect is changed to each other. Variation effect patterns having different contents can be selected. That is, the variation effect pattern table is prepared for each effect mode during the stay.

  Further, the variation effect control means 224 is triggered by the receipt of the standby demo command from the main control board 100 until the special symbol variation display is started (the next variation start During a customer waiting period (until receiving a command), for example, a standby demonstration effect (customer waiting demonstration effect) that reproduces a moving image for demonstration is executed.

The decorative symbol control means 225 is a decoration based on the information (stop symbol information, game state information) included in the variation start command from the main control board 100 and the variation effect pattern determined by the variation effect control means 224. Final combination of symbols (left symbol / middle symbol / right symbol) is determined by lottery. In this example, three symbol rows including a plurality of types of decorative symbols are configured, and the decorative symbols are formed by identification elements such as numbers. Further, the decorative symbol control means 225 holds a plurality of types of stop symbol pattern tables that are referred to when a combination of stop symbols of decorative symbols (also referred to as “stop symbol pattern”) is determined by lottery. Examples of the plurality of types of tables include a stop symbol pattern table for big hits, a stop symbol pattern table for out-of-reach, a stop symbol pattern table for out-of-reach, and the like. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol is formed as a combination of three symbols, and includes a "stop symbol indicating a big hit (big hit symbol)" and a "stop symbol indicating a deviant mark (departed symbol)". The big hit symbol indicating a specific big hit (probably strange big hit) is a combination of stop patterns in which three symbols of the same odd number are arranged (for example, "7,7,7"). A big hit symbol indicating a normal big hit (non-probable variation big hit) is a combination of stop modes in which three symbols of the same even number are arranged (for example, "2.2.2"). The disengagement symbol is a combination of stop modes (for example, "1. 3/8") in which at least one of the three symbols is a symbol having a number different from other numbers. Here, the out-of-reach symbol among the out-of-symbol symbols is a combination of stop modes in which only the middle symbol is shifted back and forth by several frames in the state where the left symbol and the right symbol are coincident (for example, "3.1.3") Become. In the case of a small-hit symbol or a big-hit symbol or a 2R big-hit symbol, for example, a combination of predetermined stop modes such as "3/5/7" may be used. If the result of the lottery is non-reach, a specific outcome called a so-called "opportunity eye" (for example, "1, 2, 3" or "5, 6, 7" as a regular eye, "2.2.3" or "5.5.6" may be selected as the misalignment. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned pseudo continuous effect, when performing the effect of displaying the temporary stop display and the re-variation display before the final display of the final stop symbol is confirmed, a special symbol ( Pseudo continuous pattern) is selected. When displaying a temporary stop design that suggests the occurrence of pseudo-relation, at least one stop design (typically the middle design) of the stop designs of the three rows of decorative designs is displayed with characters such as "NEXT". There is a case where the special symbol (pseudo continuous symbol) is replaced and displayed (for example, "2. NEXT. 3"). Note that the stop order for stopping the decorative symbols is predetermined for each of the variable effect patterns described below, and in the present embodiment, as a general rule, the symbols are stopped in the order of left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol. However, in the case of a variation effect pattern of shortened variation in which the variation time is set to be extremely short, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped almost at the same time, and in the case of a special variation effect pattern, the right symbol → It is also possible to stop in the order of the middle symbol → the left symbol, in which case the jackpot expectation tends to be relatively high. In addition, whichever order of stop is desired, it is desirable that the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol start varying at the same time when the variation starts. However, as a special variation effect pattern, the variation may be started in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol.

  Here, FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing the symbol attribute of the decorative symbol in the present embodiment. The decorative pattern is formed by a combination of an identification element composed of a number and a color (display color) attached to the identification element. In the present embodiment, all nine types of numbers “1” to “9” are set as the identification elements (that is, there are all nine types of decorative patterns). The decorative symbols are arranged in the order of "1" to "9" according to the arrangement of the symbol arrays, and on the effect display device 70, the order of "1" to "9" (or the order of "9" to "1"). In the display areas Z1, Z2, and Z3, a cyclic display or a scroll display is performed, and after "9", the display returns to "1" (or "1" returns to "9" again). . This specification is the same in other embodiments. For each decorative design, the design attribute is defined by the type of color attached to the identification element. That is, even if a plurality of decorative symbols are composed of different identification elements, they are grouped into the same symbol attribute by being given the same color. In this example, three colors of "blue", "red", and "gold" are set as the colors of the decorative pattern. In the drawing, the display modes of the three types of decorative patterns of “blue”, “red”, and “gold” are represented by “white”, “slanted line”, and “filled”. Specifically, the decorative symbols “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” are classified into blue symbol attributes (blue attributes), and the decorative symbols “1”, “3”, “5”, and “9”. "Is classified into a red pattern attribute (red attribute), and the decorative pattern" 7 "is classified into a golden pattern attribute (gold attribute). In the present embodiment, as the design attribute of the decorative design, the expected degree of winning coins and the expected degree of probability transition are increased step by step in the order of “blue” <“red” <“gold”. Hereinafter, for the sake of convenience, the blue attribute decorative design is also referred to as a “blue design”, the red attribute decorative design is also referred to as a “red design”, and the gold attribute decorative design is also referred to as a “gold design”.

  The notice production control unit 226 draws a notice production pattern that defines the contents of the notice production executed in each stage of the variation process of the decorative pattern according to the scenario of the variation production pattern determined by the variation production control unit 224. Determined by The notice production pattern includes a production pattern for temporarily or stepwise displaying an image of a specific character, animation, etc., a production pattern for outputting a specific voice, a production pattern for operating a movable accessory, and the like. The notice production is executed in parallel with the variable display of the decorative symbol, and predictively suggests that the symbol variation is high in the jackpot mode and has a high jackpot reliability. The notice effect includes a notice effect executed before the reach state occurs (including the reach occurrence time) and a notice effect executed after the reach state occurs in the variable display process of the decorative pattern. The notice performances have different jackpot reliability, and basically, the notice effect displayed after the reach occurs has a relatively higher jackpot expectation than the notice effect displayed before the reach occurs. It's getting higher. The notice production control means 226 holds a notice lottery table that is referred to when selecting a notice production pattern for each type of notice production, and a notice corresponding to the type of notice production that occurs according to the scenario of the variable production pattern. It is designed to select a lottery table. It should be noted that, as concrete types of notice production, for example, comment notice production, background notice production, SU (step-up) notice production, logo notice production, mini character notice production, group notice production, character notice production, etc. are prepared. ing. This notice effect is basically performed by synthesizing one or a plurality of notice effect displays on the variable display of the decorative pattern on the effect display device 70. Therefore, even in the case of the variable display of the decorative pattern by the same variable effect pattern, it is possible to generate various effect modes by combining with one or a plurality of notice effects.

The special game effect control means 227 determines the content of the big hit medium effect (big hit effect pattern) for notifying that the big hit game is in progress. The big hit medium production includes a big hit start demonstration production for notifying the start of the big hit game, a round production for notifying that the round game is being performed, and a big hit end demonstration production for notifying the end of the big hit game. When the special game effect control means 227 receives the big hit start demonstration command from the main control board 100, based on the big hit type information stored in the sub-main information storage means 260, the big hit medium effect pattern (big hit start demonstration effect pattern) , Round effect pattern, jackpot end demonstration effect pattern). In this big hit production pattern, a big hit start demonstration production time, a round production time (production time according to the opening pattern of the special winning opening 54), and a big hit end demonstration production time are set and along the time axis. A series of performance contents are set. Further, the special game effect control means 227 executes the big hit start demonstration effect in response to the big hit start demonstration command being received from the main control board 100 in accordance with the big hit effect pattern, and receives the round effect designation command as an opportunity. Each round effect is executed, and when the jackpot end demo command is received, the jackpot end demo effect is executed. In the big hit start demonstration production, for example, the characters "big hit start" are displayed on the screen, and the start of the big hit game is announced. In the round effect, for example, the number of rounds currently being executed and the number of won prize balls are displayed on the screen, and various images (animation images, etc.) that excite the big hit game are displayed. Then, in the big hit end demonstration effect, for example, a character "end of big hit" is displayed on the screen to notify the end of the big hit game, and then an effect indicating a game state (mode) to be transferred is displayed.

  As described above, the effect unifying means 220 generates an image control command related to an image and sound based on the decided effect contents (prefetch effect pattern, variation effect pattern, notice effect pattern, stop pattern pattern, big hit effect pattern, etc.), This is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260.

  The lamp control unit 230 controls the lighting of the effect lamp, the emission color, and the like according to the effect contents set by the effect control unit 220. The lamp control means 230 holds a plurality of types of lamp data (lamp pattern data) for controlling lighting of the effect lamp LP (frame lamp 10, board lamp 80), and the lamp data according to the determined effect pattern. Is read out and this lamp control signal (lamp data) is transmitted to the lamp connection board 91.

  The accessory control means 240 controls the drive of each movable accessory 24 according to the effect contents set by the effect control means 220. The accessory control means 240 holds a plurality of types of drive data for controlling the drive of the movable accessory 24, and transmits a drive control signal (drive data) corresponding to the determined effect pattern to the motor driver 92. .

  The error effect control means 250 is configured to determine an error effect pattern when an error effect designation command is received from the main control board 100, and notify that an error state has occurred in the gaming machine according to the error effect pattern. There is.

  The sub-main information storage unit 260 is configured to temporarily store the information of the decorative pattern, the information of the fluctuating effect pattern, the information of the notice effect pattern, the information of the control command, etc., and a predetermined value for storing each information. It has a storage area. For example, in the command storage area, an effect control command buffer for storing effect control commands from the main control board 100, an image control command buffer for storing image control commands to the image control board 300, and an image control board 300. ACK command buffer for storing the ACK command from. Each command buffer is composed of a ring buffer, and can store a predetermined number of effect control commands, image control commands, and ACK commands.

The command transmitting / receiving unit 270 is configured to receive the effect control command transmitted from the main control board 100 and store the effect control command in the effect control command buffer of the sub-main information storage unit 260. The command transmitting / receiving means 270 executes an interrupt based on the input of the above-mentioned strobe signal from the main control board 100 to execute reception interrupt processing (details will be described later) of the effect control command. I'm supposed to get it. When the strobe signal is received, the command transmitting / receiving unit 270 preferentially performs the reception interrupt processing of this effect control command over other interrupt processing (interrupt processing below priority level 7 described later). ing.

  Further, the command transmission / reception means 270 stores in the sub-main information storage means 260 in order to instruct execution of the effect contents (variable effect pattern information, notice effect pattern information, decorative pattern information, etc.) set by the effect control means 220. The generated image control command is transmitted to the image control board 300 by a serial communication method. As a general rule, the image control command is transmitted every predetermined period (500 μs in this example) according to the order set in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260. Thereby, the image control board 300 analyzes various image control commands transmitted from the effect control board 200, and causes the effect display device 70 to variably display the effect image including the decorative pattern in accordance with the scenario of the variable effect pattern. At each stage of the variable display process, the notice effect is displayed by being superimposed on the effect of the symbol change. Further, the command transmission / reception unit 270 receives the ACK command transmitted from the image control board 300, and stores this ACK command in the ACK command buffer of the sub-main information storage unit 260.

[Various productions]
As described above, the pachinko gaming machine PA having such a configuration is configured such that various game effects are controlled and executed by the effect control board 200 and the image control board 300 according to the progress status of the game and the like. In the following, of the various game effects, the content of the effect during the big hit will be described. It should be noted that in the following, “limiting execution” or “restricting execution” means, for example, not executing all, not executing some, relatively lowering the priority of display or output, etc. Used as a concept that includes. Further, in the following, “to be executed in duplicate (to be executed in duplicate)” means that one execution period (or execution timing) and the other execution period (or execution timing) overlap each other. It is used as a concept including a case where all the periods (or execution timings) overlap, and a case where both the execution periods (or execution timings) partially overlap each other.

[Direction during big hit]
As described above, the big hit mid effect includes the big hit start demonstration effect, the round effect, and the big hit end demonstration effect. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a correspondence relationship between a big hit type (type of symbol group), a big hit symbol combination (combination of decorative symbols when a big hit occurs), and a big hit medium effect pattern. In the figure, (A) is referred to when the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning is the normal gaming state, and in the figure (B) is referred to when the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning is the time saving gaming state or the probability variation gaming state. . As shown in FIG. 11, the type of the big hit symbol combination and the type of the big hit medium effect pattern are determined according to the big hit type (symbol group) selected in the lottery process for the special symbol. In the present embodiment, even if the big hit type is the same, the kind of the big hit symbol combination and the kind of the big hit medium effect pattern may be different depending on the gaming state at the time of big hit winning.

The jackpot pattern combination is composed of a combination of stop patterns "*, *, *" in which three decorative patterns of the same number (identification element) are arranged (*: decorative pattern of an arbitrary number). Big hit symbol combinations are "1.1.1", "3/3/3", "5/5/5", "7/7/7", "9/9""specific big hits" Odd symbol combinations shown (red symbol combinations, gold symbol combinations) and "specific jackpots" such as "2.2.2", "44.4", "66.6", "88.8" Or a combination of even symbols indicating a “normal jackpot” (blue symbol combination). In other words, odd-numbered symbol combinations (gold symbol combination, red symbol combination) are jackpot symbol combinations that are confirmed to be won in the "specific jackpot", while even symbol combinations (blue symbol combinations) are "specific jackpot" and " It is a big hit symbol combination in which it is uncertain which one of the "normal big hits" has been won.

  The gold symbol combination is a jackpot symbol combination that informs that the actual number of rounds is "16 rounds", and that the "specific jackpot" that triggers the transition to the probability variation gaming state has been won. That is, the gold symbol combination is a jackpot symbol combination that definitely informs that the player has won the most advantageous jackpot (16R specific jackpot) that has the highest degree of advantage for the player among a plurality of jackpot types. The red symbol combination is uncertain whether the actual number of rounds is either "16 rounds" or "4 rounds", but winning the "specific jackpot" that triggers the transition to the probability variation gaming state. It is a big hit symbol combination that notifies. The blue symbol combination has been confirmed to be "4 rounds" as the actual number of rounds, but whether the "specific jackpot" that triggers the transition to the probability variation gaming state has been won or the "time saving game state" It is a jackpot symbol combination that informs that it is uncertain whether or not the player has won the "normal jackpot" that is the trigger for the transition. Here, even in the case of a blue symbol combination, the actual number of rounds may be "16 rounds" (that is, even if the actual number of rounds is "16 rounds"), the blue symbol Although it may be configured to be selected in combination), it is preferable that the red symbol combination has a higher possibility that the actual number of rounds is “16 rounds”. In this case, as one of the "happiness big hit productions" which will be described later, there may be provided "happiness big hit C performances" that are probabilistic promotion and round promotion.

  In the present embodiment, as a plurality of types of big hit midstream production patterns, "super-jutsu big hit production", "longevity big hit A production", "long life big hit B production", "Ki big hit A production", and "Ki big hit B production" are set. Has been done. The super-jutsu big hit production is a big hit medium production pattern type which is set in correspondence with the big hit symbol combination being "gold pattern combination". The big hit jackpot A effect and the big hit jackpot B effect are big hit medium effect pattern types that are set in correspondence with the big hit symbol combination being "red symbol combination". The big hit big production A and the big hit B production are big hit medium production pattern types that are set in correspondence with the big hit symbol combination being "blue pattern combination". That is, the effect pattern type during the big hit is set according to the design attributes (gold design, red design, blue design) of the big hit design combination.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 11 (A), a jackpot symbol combination and a jackpot mid-hit effect pattern which are selected when the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning is the normal gaming state will be described. First, when the "4R specific jackpot" of the first special symbol is won, "red symbol combination" or "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination. For example, as a big hit symbol combination, a red symbol combination is selected with a probability of 80%, and a blue symbol combination is selected with a probability of 20%. At this time, when "red pattern combination" is selected as the big hit symbol combination, "jutsu big hit A production" is selected as the corresponding big hit medium effect pattern, and "blue symbol combination" is selected as the big hit symbol combination. In this case, "Happiness big hit B performance" is selected as the corresponding big hit mid effect pattern. When the first special symbol "4R normal big hit" is won, "blue symbol combination" is selected as the big hit symbol and "Ki big hit A effect" is selected as the corresponding big hit medium effect pattern. Further, when the second special symbol "16R specific big hit" is won, "gold pattern combination" is selected as the big hit symbol, and "super-jutsu big hit effect" is selected as the corresponding big hit medium effect pattern. When the second special symbol “4R specific jackpot” is won, “red symbol combination” is selected as the jackpot symbol combination, and “jutsu jackpot A director” is selected as the corresponding jackpot effect pattern. When the second special symbol “4R normal big hit” is won, “blue symbol combination” is selected as the big hit symbol and “Ki big hit A effect” is selected as the corresponding big hit medium effect pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11 (B), a big hit symbol combination and a big hit medium performance pattern that are selected when the game state at the time of big hit winning is a time saving game state or a probability variation game state will be described. When the first special symbol "4R special jackpot" is won, "red symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination, and "jutsu jackpot A director" is selected as the corresponding jackpot effect pattern. When the first special symbol “4R normal big hit” is won, “blue symbol combination” is selected as the big hit symbol combination, and “Ki big hit A effect” is selected as the corresponding big hit medium effect pattern. When the "16R specific jackpot" of the second special symbol is won, "gold symbol combination" or "red symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination. For example, as a jackpot symbol combination, a gold symbol combination is selected with a probability of 80%, and a red symbol combination is selected with a probability of 20%. At this time, when "gold pattern combination" is selected as the big hit pattern combination, "super-jutsu big hit production" is selected as the corresponding big hit medium performance pattern, and "red pattern combination" is selected as the big hit pattern combination. In this case, "Kotobuki big hit B effect" is selected as the corresponding big hit mid effect pattern. When the "4R specific jackpot" of the second special symbol is won, "red symbol combination" or "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination. For example, as a big hit symbol combination, a red symbol combination is selected with a probability of 80%, and a blue symbol combination is selected with a probability of 20%. At this time, when "red pattern combination" is selected as the big hit symbol combination, "jutsu big hit A production" is selected as the corresponding big hit medium effect pattern, and "blue symbol combination" is selected as the big hit symbol combination. In this case, "Ki big hit B effect" is selected as the corresponding big hit mid effect pattern. When the second special symbol “4R normal big hit” is won, “blue symbol combination” is selected as the big hit symbol and “Ki big hit A effect” is selected as the corresponding big hit medium effect pattern.

  The super-jutsu big hit effect is a big hit effect pattern that definitely informs that the player has won the most advantageous big hit (16R specific big hit), which is the most advantageous to the player, out of a plurality of kinds of big hit types.

  It has been confirmed that Kotobuki A Hit Production and Kotobuki Hit Production B are awarded to the "specific jackpot" type that triggers the transition to the probability variation game state, but until the predetermined number of rounds (4 rounds) is reached. Is a big hit mid effect pattern in which the effect progresses while it is uncertain whether the actual number of rounds is either “16 rounds” or “4 rounds”. Here, the longevity jackpot A production, even if it reaches the predetermined number of rounds (fourth round), promotion production (round promotion production) is not performed, and the specified number of rounds of this big jackpot game is "4 rounds". It is confirmed that there is. On the other hand, in the big hit B production, when the predetermined number of rounds (fourth round) is reached, promotion production (round promotion production) occurs, and the specified number of rounds of this big hit game is "16 rounds". (The prescribed number of rounds has been promoted to "16 rounds") is confirmed.

  It has been confirmed that the number of actual rounds in the "Kikiobon A" and "Kikiobon B" productions is "4 rounds", but until the final big hit demonstration is reached, the "specific big hit" will be a trigger to shift to the probability variation game state. It is a big hit medium production pattern in which the production progresses without confirmation as to whether or not the player has won or has won the "normal big jackpot" that triggers the transition to the time saving game state. Even if the big hit end demonstration is reached, the promotion effect (probability variation promotion effect) is not performed and the type of big hit this time is "normal big hit" (time saving after the end of this big hit game) (Transition to the game state) is confirmed. On the other hand, when the big hit end demonstration reaches the big hit end demonstration, promotion effect (probability change promotion effect) occurs, and this big hit type is "specific big hit" (probably change game state after completion of this big hit game Will be confirmed). Further, in FIG. 11, the correspondence relationship between the big hit type and the big hit medium effect pattern is different according to the game state at the time of big hit winning, but as shown in FIG. 11 (B) regardless of the game state at the time of big hit winning. It may be a correspondence. In addition, the 16R specific big hit may be provided also in the first special symbol, and in that case, even during the big hit of the first special symbol, super-jutsu big hit production or Kotobuki big hit B production may be executed. The detailed contents of the promotion effect (round promotion effect, probability variation promotion effect) will be described later.

  Next, the contents of the effect patterns during each big hit will be described. 12 to 16 are schematic diagrams showing the contents of the effect pattern during the big hit. In the figure, the correspondence relation between the type of individual effect generated during the big hit game and the generation timing is defined for each big hit medium effect pattern. In addition, in the drawing, in order to facilitate understanding of the description, an opening mode of the special winning opening 54 is additionally shown. However, in the present embodiment, as the opening mode of the special winning opening 54, the opening time of the special winning opening 54 (maximum opening time) is a prescribed count number (full count) to enter the game ball or it is easy to enter the opening time. Only the set "long open" is prepared, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the game ball whose opening time (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 is the specified count (full count) is entered. You may prepare the "short opening" set to the opening time when it is impossible or difficult to enter.

  First, during the big hit start demonstration, a screen that suggests the type of the big hit medium performance (super-jutsu big hit production, longevity big hit production, happy big hit production) is displayed, and which big hit middle production is started for the player. Is suggested. In the present embodiment, the execution time of the jackpot start demo is set to "5 seconds" in common to all jackpots.

  While each round game is being executed, a round effect screen corresponding to the type of the big hit medium effect (super big hit big hit, big hit big hit, and big hit big hit) is displayed. That is, when the big hit medium performance pattern is a super big hit big hit production, a super big hit big screen, a big hit A production A or a big big hit B production, a big hit big round screen, a big hit A production, or a big hit B production. In the case of production, a big hit round screen is displayed. However, when a round promotion effect described below occurs in a predetermined round game, the type of this big hit medium promotion is promoted, and the round effect screen of the lower rank type is switched to the round effect screen of the higher rank type. It has become.

  In addition, after the end of each round game, an interval which is a pause time (close time of the special winning opening 54) from when the end of each round game is set to when the setting of the next round game or the jackpot end demo is started. The period is set. Therefore, the special game is "big hit start demo" → "round game" → "interval period" → "round game" → "interval period" → ... → "round game" → "interval period" → "big hit end demo" It is developed in the flow. In the present embodiment, the interval time (interval period) is set to "2 seconds" in common to all jackpots. The details of this interval time will be described later.

During the execution of the big hit end demo, the content of the effect mode (game state) that is transferred after the end of the big hit game that is currently being executed is suggested, and which effect mode the player is plunging into or continued is suggested. To be done. Further, during the jackpot end demonstration period, a probability variation promotion effect or a pending rendition suggestion effect described below may be performed. In addition, in the pending consecutive suggestion effect that is performed during the jackpot end demonstration period, the pending consecutive suggestion effect (over prize winning effect or bonus winning effect that is performed when an over-winning or bonus winning occurs in a modified example described later. Combined production) is not included. In other words, the pending consecutive suggestion effect according to the modified example described later is not an effect performed in the big hit end demonstration period but an effect performed in the interval period. The details of the probability variation promotion effect and the pending consecutive suggestion effect of this embodiment will be described later. In the present embodiment, the execution time of the big hit end demo is set to "20 seconds" in common to all big hits. As for the big hit start demo and the big hit end demo, as described above, it is the big hit game at the time of the first hit (that is, low probability big hit from the low base state) or the big hit game in the condominium (that is, high probability). Each demo time may be configured to be different depending on whether the high base state or the low probability high base state is a big hit). To be more specific, in the case of a big hit game during a series of wins, rather than in the case of a big hit game during a first win, in order to speed up the processing of the game before and after the big hit (quickly play a game during a series of wins). In order to proceed), each demo time may be set to a relatively short time. In addition, as described above, when performing an effect that calls attention to forgetting to remove the prepaid card in the big hit game at the time of first hit, it is preferable to do it within the big hit end demo period set for a relatively long time. Yes, in the case of a big jackpot game in a condominium game, in order to give a warning about forgetting to remove the prepaid card, it can be done during the round game execution period instead of the jackpot end demo period set relatively shortly. It is suitable. Also, with regard to the pending continuous suggestion effect, in the big hit game at the time of first hit (that is, the big hit from the low probability low base state), it is preferable not to execute even if there is a big hit hold in the hold or to lower the execution probability. Yes, in the jackpot game in the condominium (that is, the jackpot from the high-probability high base state or the low-probability high base state), it is preferable not to execute or to increase the execution probability even if there is a big hit hold in the hold .. Furthermore, it is preferable that the pending rendition suggestion effect is performed during the execution of the special game corresponding to the 16R specific jackpot, and when the jackpot pending in the hold is the jackpot pending corresponding to the 16R specified jackpot. It is preferable that (i.e., the jackpot in which the pending rendition suggestion effect is displayed and the jackpot in the hold that triggers execution of the pending rendition suggestion is targeted only for the 16R specific jackpot, and not for the 4R specific / normal jackpot. It is preferable not to be).

  Here, FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram showing a basic screen (round effect screen) during a round game. Although illustration is omitted, in the center area of the screen, various images (animation images, etc.) corresponding to the type of the big hit mid-range effect pattern are displayed in order to boost the big hit game.

  In the round display area 730 of the screen, the number of rounds (third round in the illustrated example) indicating the number of rounds of the currently executed round game is displayed. For example, when the currently executed round game is the first round game (first round), “ROUND1” is displayed in the round display area, and the currently executed round game is the second round game (second round). In the case of (round), "ROUND2" is displayed in the round display area, and thereafter, each time a round game is played, "ROUND3", "ROUND4" ... Are displayed in the round display area.

In the right-handed display area 731 of the screen, a right-handed image (also referred to as a launch instruction effect) that prompts the player to shoot the game ball toward the right area PA2 (right-handed) is displayed. Incidentally, in spite of the situation where the player should hit the right side (during a big hit), on the contrary, when the game ball flows down the left side area PA1 and enters the general winning openings 61 to 63, or the first start. When the ball enters the mouth 51, that is, when the game ball is shot toward the left side area PA1, an effect (attention notification effect) that calls the player's attention so as not to hit left is executed. You can In the caution notification production, a message instructing to hit the right is displayed on the screen, or the production lamp LP is lit in a special light emitting mode (for example, high brightness, high speed or momentary blinking), so that the game ball is played. The player is notified that the player should fire the ball toward the right side area PA2 (right hitting). Note that, as the caution notification effect, for example, a sound “please right-hand” (right-hand instruction sound) may be output from the speaker 11. It is desirable that the attention notification effect be in a conspicuous position (for example, a central display area) or a size (for example, occupy most of the display area of the effect display device 70) so that the player can clearly recognize it. Even in a situation where the right-handed image, the display content in the award ball acquisition display area 732, the display content in the cumulative award ball display area 733, the highlighting effect, and the display content in the round display area 730 are displayed. It is suitable to be configured so that it can be displayed. However, since the right-handed image is also information that should be clearly communicated to the player (information about an appropriate launch position), the right-handed image and the caution notification effect may be displayed in different display areas so as not to be superimposed. Appropriate. On the other hand, in order not to impair the visibility of the attention notification effect, from the display content in the prize ball acquisition display area 732, the display content in the cumulative prize ball number display area 733, the emphasis effect, and the display content of the round display area 730, which will be described later. Also, it is desirable that the display priority is high (that is, superimposition display is possible, but in that case, the attention notification effect is displayed on the front side). About this launch instruction effect, if you enter the general winning openings 61-63 during the big hit, or
The case of entering the first starting opening 51 is displayed as a display condition, but the display time is set to 10 seconds. However, when the display condition is satisfied again before the display time of 10 seconds elapses, 10 seconds is set again as the display time (that is, the display time is extended). In addition, it is preferable to display the right-handed image and the attention notification effect not only during the big hit, but also in the high base state such as the high-probability high-base state or the low-probability high-base state. If it is continuously displayed over the high base state, and the warning notification effect is displayed when the big hit ends within 10 seconds (for example, 5 seconds before the end of the big hit end demo), the big hit medium to high base state. It is desirable to configure the display so that it is continuously displayed.

  In a prize sphere acquisition display area 732 of the screen, when a predetermined prize (over prize or bonus prize described later) occurs, the number of prize balls awarded based on the prize to notify that the prize has occurred. (Unit number of prize balls) is displayed. The prize ball acquisition display area 732 displays the number of prize balls (the number of unit prize balls to be acquired when one game ball is won in the special winning opening 54) when the over prize occurs. The first prize ball acquisition display area 732A and the number of prize balls to be obtained by the bonus prize when the bonus prize is generated (the number of unit prize balls to be obtained when one game ball is won in the general prize slot 64) The second prize ball acquisition display area 732B to be displayed is included. For example, when an over-winning occurs, “+ 15pt” corresponding to the number of unit prize balls (15) of the big winning opening 54 is displayed, and when a bonus winning occurs, a unit winning of the general winning opening 64 "+ 3pt" corresponding to the number of balls (3) is displayed. As a modified example, the first prize sphere acquisition display area 732A and the second prize sphere acquisition display area 732B may be separated from each other.

  In the cumulative prize ball number display area 733 of the screen, the cumulative value of the number of prize balls obtained up to the present time based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special winning opening 54 or the general winning opening 64 in the big hit game in the condominium ( The “cumulative number of prize balls” is displayed). "Lenso" is a state in which the specific game state continues without returning to the non-specific game state after the occurrence of the first hit that triggers the transition from the non-specific game state to the specific game state ( It is a state in which the big hit in the specific game state occurs continuously after the starting point). Further, the "specific game state" is a gaming state in which the transition probability to the special game is higher than the normal gaming state (low probability low base state), the probability variation function of the special symbol, the variation time of the special symbol It is a state (at least one of a high-probability high-base state, a low-probability high-base state, a high-probability low-base state) in which at least one function of the shortening function and the power-choo support function is activated. In the present embodiment, the gaming state (high base state) in which at least the electric Chu support function is operating corresponds to the “specific gaming state”. The cumulative number of prize balls includes the number of prize balls obtained by entering game balls into the special winning opening 54 or the general winning opening 64 in the special game when the first hit occurs. It should be noted that the cumulative number of prize balls may include the number of prize balls awarded by the over-winning described later, or may not include the number of prize balls awarded by the over-winning. Further, the cumulative number of prize balls may include the number of prize balls awarded by the bonus prize described below, or may not include the number of prize balls awarded by the bonus prize. .. The over-prize effect described below is executed because the big winning is in progress (it can be executed because the big winning opening 54 is open and can enter the ball), but the general winning opening 64 is in the big hit. You can enter with or without a ball. However, the bonus prize effect described later is also configured to be executed only during the big hit. For bonus prizes, bonus prize production is executed if it is a big hit, but if it is a low probability low base state, special production different from bonus prize (for example, the line "Do not enter here now!" A special effect in which the display and sound are generated, however, it is possible to generate not only one ball but also three balls within a predetermined time (for example, within 5 seconds), and the probability is high. If it is the base state or the low probability high base state, neither the bonus winning effect nor the special effect is executed (in that case, nothing needs to be executed, but as another effect, a red flame around the frame of the effect display device 70). May be executed for a moment to occur).

In addition to the cumulative number of prize balls, or instead of the cumulative number of prize balls, based on the fact that the game ball enters the special winning opening 54 or the general winning opening 64 in one big hit game currently being executed. The cumulative value of the number of award balls acquired up to the present time (referred to as “the number of medium-sized award balls”) may be displayed. The number of medium-sized jackpot balls is the number of award balls that a player can actually get during the execution of one big-hit game, so basically, the number of award-winning award balls that can be set according to the jackpot type ( It may be less than the theoretical expected number of prize balls, but it will not exceed the number of obtainable prize balls. However, when an over-winning prize described later occurs, the number of medium-sized jackpot balls may exceed the number of awardable balls (theoretical expected number of prize balls) set according to the jackpot type.

  Although not shown in the figure, during the condominium, the number of consecutive big jackpots in the specific game state, or the number of condominiums that is the number of times including the first hit (the number of times one is added) is displayed. Good. As an example, when a big hit occurs three times in the specific game state after the first hit, a display such as "third consecutive villa" or "four consecutive villa" may be displayed during the big hit. Further, in each round of the special game, a pseudo decorative design (hereinafter, referred to as “pseudo decorative design”) may be displayed in a variable manner and a stop display (temporary stop display, confirmed stop display). It is preferable that this pseudo decorative pattern is a pattern mode (a special pattern during the big hit) different from the normal decorative pattern that is variably displayed during the non-special game. Specifically, if the decorative pattern that is variably displayed during the non-special game is composed of a picture (character) and a number, it will be a decorative pattern only for the number during the special game, and its size is also reduced. Or, if the decorative pattern that is variably displayed during the non-special game is composed of only numbers, it is the decorative pattern of the same number only during the special game, but its size is reduced. Furthermore, when the big hits such as “7,7,7” are aligned, it is only necessary to recognize which decorative design has made the big hit, so “7,7,7” is displayed during the special game. It does not mean that only “7” (only one decorative pattern, not the decorative pattern combination which is three decorative patterns) may be displayed. Also, during the execution of the big hit game (round game), the "winning-related effect", which is a characteristic effect of the present embodiment, is executed.

[Winning-related production]
Next, the winning-related effect of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 18 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the configuration of the winning-related effect of this embodiment. The prize-related effect is an effect that is executed based on that the game ball enters a specific winning opening (big winning opening 54 or general winning opening 64) during the execution of the big hit game. The winning-related productions include (A) a large winning opening winning presentation and (B) a general winning opening winning presentation.

<A. Big prize mouth prize production ＞
The special winning opening winning effect is an effect that is executed when the game ball wins the special winning opening 54 during the execution of the special game. The special winning opening winning effect includes a large winning opening normal winning effect, a large winning opening over winning effect, and a large winning hole count-up effect. In the following, except for special cases, (A) the game ball wins the special winning opening 54, (A) the game ball enters the special winning opening 54, and (C) the game ball The detection by the special winning opening switch 541 and (d) receiving the special winning opening winning command from the main control board 100 are used synonymously.

<< A-1. Grand prize mouth Normal prize production ≫
The special winning opening normal winning effect is an effect for notifying that the gaming ball has won the special winning opening 54, targeting the winning of the game balls within the specified count number to the special winning opening 54. In other words, the special winning opening normal winning presentation is performed each time the gaming ball wins the special winning opening 54 until the number of winning game balls to the special winning opening 54 in one round game reaches the specified count. It will be a production. In the present embodiment, a specific example of the special winning opening normal winning effect is not particularly specified, but at least one of a plurality of effect means such as the effect display device 70, the speaker 11, the effect lamp LP, and the movable accessory 24 is used. The regular prize production is performed. As an example, (1) an object corresponding to a specified count number in one unit game is displayed (for example, a treasure box display is displayed for the specified count number in one unit game), and a game is made to the special winning opening 54. Each time a ball enters, the effect is deleted on the effect display device 70. (2) Each time a game ball enters the special winning opening 54, a speaker that outputs "chareen" is output. 11 effects, (3) effects with the effect lamp LP in which the lamp blinks twice each time a game ball enters the special winning opening 54. As a modified example of the present embodiment, without providing a special winning opening normal winning effect, only a special winning hole count-up effect described below is provided for winning a game ball into the special winning opening 54 up to a specified count number. It may be configured to be performed.

<< A-2. Big prize mouth over winning production ≫
Big winning mouth over winning effect (also referred to as "over winning effect"), the game ball to the big winning opening 54, targeting the winning of the game ball that exceeds the specified count to the big winning opening 54 (over winning) It is an effect that suggests or informs that a prize has been won. The “over prize” means that a game ball (the 11th game ball or more in the present embodiment) that exceeds the specified count number during the execution of one round game is detected by the special winning opening switch 541. Say. In this embodiment, as will be described in detail later, the effective detection period of the special winning opening switch 541 is a detection grace period after the end of each round game (in this embodiment, the period is the same as the interval period, but is detected as the interval period). The grace period may be set to a different period, and as an example, it is a waiting time set between each round game or between the final round game and the big hit end demonstration, and it is closed from the closing operation of the special winning opening 54. When the round game waiting time (unit game waiting time) that is maintained or the interval period that is the end demo waiting time is set to 2 seconds, the detection grace period is between each round game or the last round. It is a period set between the game and the big hit end demo, and it is possible to detect the entry of the game ball (the entry of the game ball exceeding the specified count number) after the special winning opening 54 starts the closing operation. The detection grace period, which is the period to be set, may be set to 1 second after the special winning opening 54 starts the closing operation, or set to 3 seconds, while the detection grace period is at least partially overlapped with the interval period. May be set), and over-winning may occur within this interval period (within the detection grace period). As an example of the over-winning, when the 10th counting game ball enters the large winning opening 54 and is detected by the large winning opening switch 541 to start the closing operation of the large winning opening 54, this big winning is started. If the following game ball (game ball after the 11th count) is in the big prize hole 54 before the winning hole 54 is closed, this subsequent game ball (game after the 11th count) A ball is detected by the special winning opening switch 541 within the interval period (within the detection grace period), and an over-winning occurs.

  There are over-winning image display effects and over-winning sound output effects as types of over-winning effects. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the over-winning effect of this embodiment. In addition, it is preferable that the effect mode of the over-winning prize effect is different from the effect mode of the above-described special winning opening normal prize effect. Further, as a modified example, as an effect related to over-winning, only an over-winning image may be installed (without over-winning sound), or only over-winning sound may be installed (without over-winning image).

  The over-winning image display effect is an effect of displaying an image (referred to as “over-winning image”) indicating that an over-winning has occurred. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, an over-winning image of the character “+ 15pt” is displayed as an over-winning image in the award ball acquisition display area 732 of the screen, and “15” is displayed based on the occurrence of over-winning. It is suggested that you have won a prize ball. Thereby, the player can intuitively understand that the over-winning has occurred.

The over-winning sound output effect is an effect in which a voice (“over-winning sound”) indicating that an over-winning has occurred is output from the speaker 11. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, the speaker 11 outputs the sound effect “character of character” (voice of character), which suggests that an over-winning has occurred.

  As a modified example of the present embodiment, a plurality of effect patterns for over-winning effects may be provided. That is, a plurality of types of over-winning images or multiple types of over-winning sounds may be prepared, and one of over-winning images and over-winning sounds may be selected by an effect drawing when an over-winning occurs. Good. In this case, depending on the type of the over-winning image or over-winning sound, the pending consecutive suggestion, the probability change suggestion, the number of rounds suggestion, etc. may be performed. As an example, there is only one type of “+ 15pt” as the over-winning image, while there are “Iizou”, “its tone”, and “Congratulations” for the over-winning sound in addition to “I did it”. Above all, when an over-winning sound of "Congratulations" occurs, (1) the performance also serves as a pending continuous suggestion, and (2) also serves as a suggestion that the jackpot currently being executed is a definite strange jackpot. (3) It may also have a role of suggesting that the currently executed jackpot is the 16R jackpot instead of the 4R jackpot.

More specifically, as a modified example of the present embodiment, a plurality of types of over-winning sounds are set, and in addition to the occurrence of over-winning, an in-hold holiday game occurs depending on the type of over-winning sound. It is also possible to adopt a configuration that suggests the possibility that there is a possibility (that is, both the over-winning effect and the pending rendition suggesting effect are combined). Here, when the result of the hit determination of the special symbol made by digesting a certain preceding operation-holding ball is a big hit, the "holding-in-long-range resort" relates to the preceding operation holding ball. The jackpot is planned to be a jackpot in one or more subsequent operation holding balls that exist at a predetermined timing between the end of the special game executed when the jackpot judgment of the special symbol is permitted and the jackpot. It means that the operation holding ball (also called "big hit holding") is included. In this modification, an over-prize tone A (voice "I did it") and an over-prize tone B (voice "Congratulations") are prepared as a plurality of types of over-prize tone. When there is no big hit hold at the time of occurrence of the over-winning prize (when the on-hold-long holiday resort is not established), the selection ratio of the over-winning sound A is “100%”, and the selection ratio of the over-winning sound B is “0%. Will be On the other hand, when there is a big hit hold at the time of occurrence of the over-winning (when the hold-in-resort is established), the selection rate of the over-winning sound A is “0%”, and the selection rate of the over-winning sound B is “100%. Will be That is, the over-winning sound A is a sound in a normal mode that suggests that an over-winning has occurred and that the in-hold holiday club has not been established. The over-winning sound B is a sound of a special mode that suggests that an over-winning has occurred and that the reserved in-house has been established. The selection rates of the over-winning sounds A and B may be appropriately set. For example, when a big hit is held when the over-winning occurs (when an on-holding consecutive game is established), the over-winning sound A The selection rate of the above winning sound B may be “20%”. Further, in the above-described modified example, the case where the pending consecutive suggestion effect is applied to the over-winning sound output effect has been described as an example, but the pending consecutive suggestion effect may be applied to the over-winning image display effect (for example, over-winning prize). When "+ 15pt" is displayed as a black character as the image display effect, it is unlikely that the pending holiday rental is not established, but when it is displayed in gold characters, the pending holiday rental is displayed. It may be a specification that is likely to be established or has been established). Further, in the above modification, the over-winning sound B as a holding continuous suggestion has been described, but the over-winning sound B may have a function of suggesting a probability change or suggesting the number of rounds. Depending on whether the jackpot being played is a normal jackpot or a specific jackpot (probability variation jackpot), the selection ratio of the over-prize sounds A and B is set to "100% in the case of the normal jackpot." , The selection rate of the over-winning sound B is “0%”, while the selection rate of the over-winning sound A is “0%” and the selection rate of the over-winning sound B is “100%” in the case of a specific big hit (probability variation big hit). % ”, Or the over-prize tone A selection rate may be“ 80% ”and the over-prize tone B selection rate may be“ 20% ”. Whether the jackpot currently being executed is a 4R jackpot or a 16R jackpot. Accordingly, when the selection ratio of the over-prize sounds A and B is the 4R big hit, the selection ratio of the over-prize sound A is "100%" and the selection ratio of the over-prize sound B is "0%", while the 16R big hit In the case of, the over-winning sound A selection rate is “0%”, the over-winning sound B selection rate is “100%”, or the over-winning sound A selection rate is “80%”, the over-winning sound B selection The rate may be “20%”.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the "special map 2 priority digestion method" that preferentially digests the operation retaining balls of the second special symbol rather than the operation retaining balls of the first special symbol is adopted. As the target operation holding ball, only the operation holding ball of the second special symbol may be the target. Further, when the game state at the time of a big hit that triggers execution of the special game is the specific game state (high base state), and the game state after the end of the special game is also the specific game state (high base state) Alternatively, the pending rendition suggestion effect may be executed in response to an over-winning that occurs during execution of the special game. Also, assuming that the preceding operation holding ball is a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot), a specific hold that is a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot) is included in the subsequent operation holding ball as the earliest specified hold. Alternatively, the pending rendition suggestion effect may be executed triggered by an over-winning that occurs during the execution of the special game. In other words, even if there is a big hit hold in the subsequent operation hold, if the big hit type related to big hit hold (first big hit hold when there are multiple big hit hold) is low profit big hit, hold It may be configured not to execute the villa suggestion effect. In other words, if a pending rendition suggestion effect is generated during execution of a special game, it is definite that a high profit big hit (16R big hit) will be held in the hold.

  Further, as a modified example of the present embodiment, in addition to the occurrence of an over-winning due to the over-winning effect, it is possible to suggest the possibility of winning the probability variation jackpot. That is, the over-winning effect and the probability change suggesting effect may be combined. Probability variation suggestion production is that the type of big hit that triggered the execution of the special game that is currently being executed is a specific big hit (probability variation big hit), that is, a production that suggests that the special game is transitioned to the probability variation game state after the end of the special game. Is. In this modification, for example, when a plurality of types of over-prize sounds A to C are set and the type of big-win hit this time is a normal big-hit, the selection rate of the over-prize sound A is "70%", and the over-win prize sound is The selection rate of B is "30%", and the selection rate of the over-winning sound C is "0%". Further, when the type of jackpot that is won this time is a specific jackpot, the selection rate of the over-winning sound A is "10%", the selection rate of the over-winning sound B is "30%", and the selection rate of the over-winning sound C is It becomes "60%". In other words, the probability of expected change (expectation of transition to the game state of probability) increases step by step in the order of “over prize sound A” <“over prize sound B” <“over prize sound C”. Note that, as a further modification, the over-winning sound may be configured to indicate not the probability change probability but the number of electric support provided after the end of the special game.

<< A-3. Winning prize count up production ≫
The special winning hole count-up effect is the value of the cumulative prize ball number displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area 733 when the game balls enter the special prize hole 54 during the execution of the special game in the condominium. , Is the effect of additionally displaying the value of the number of prize balls (the number of unit prize balls) paid out based on the entry of the game balls into the special winning opening. In the present embodiment, "15" prize balls are paid out by inserting one game ball into the special winning opening 54 (the number of unit prize balls of the special winning opening 54 is 15,) When a ball has entered the special winning opening 54, the value of the cumulative prize ball number displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area 733 is updated in units of “15”. Further, the special game effect control means 227 is provided with a cumulative prize ball number counter for counting the accumulated prize balls, and each time a game ball enters the special winning opening 54 (from the main control board 100). Every time the special winning opening winning command is received), “15”, which is the unit winning ball number of the special winning opening 54, is added to the count value of the cumulative winning ball counter, and accordingly, the cumulative winning ball number display area 733 is displayed. A special winning hole count-up effect is displayed in which "15" is added to the displayed value of the accumulated prize balls. This special winning hole count-up effect is executed regardless of whether the game balls entering the special winning opening 54 are within the specified count number or over the specified count number. Is.

FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram showing an example of consecutive winning prize count-up effects. As shown in FIG. 20, when the game balls enter the special winning opening 54, the special winning opening count-up effect is set to the cumulative prize winning number displayed in the cumulative prize winning number display area 733. This is an effect in which the number of prize balls given based on the entry of game balls into the special winning opening 54 is sequentially added and displayed in a count-up format by "1". In the illustrated example, the cumulative number of prize balls is counted up one by one such as “7000” → “7001” → ... → “7014” → “7015”. Note that FIG. 20 shows the flow of the special winning opening count-up effect when an over-winning occurs. After the over-winning effect is performed in (A) in the figure, (B) to (() in the figure are shown. In E), a special winning hole count-up effect is being performed. In FIG. 20, the big prize hole count-up effect when the over-prize effect is performed is shown. However, not only at the time of over-winning, but also when a game ball within a specified count is entered, the prize-winning hole count-up effect is similarly performed. Is done. In addition, in the midst of performing a special winning hole count-up effect corresponding to entering a game ball within a specified count number (particularly, a special winning opening count-up effect corresponding to the specified count number 10th count) Yes When the over-winning occurs when the count-up for the 15 balls has not been completed yet, the count-up for the big winning mouth count-up effect is not completed yet for the count-up for 15 balls. It is desirable that after that (after 15 balls are counted), the special winning opening count-up effect corresponding to the over-winning is started. Here, when the over-winning is detected just before the end of the interval period (detection grace period), the special winning opening count-up effect itself corresponding to the over-winning is started in the next round (after the lapse of the interval period). Although it will be overlapped with the execution period of the next round), a large winning a prize count-up effect corresponding to the over-winning which is performed during the execution of the next round (the next round started after the lapse of the interval period) Even if there is a ball in the special winning opening 54 during execution, the timing of the entry is in the midst of a special winning opening count-up effect corresponding to the over-winning, and the count-up for 15 balls is still completed. If not, the count-up for 15 balls has not been completed yet. It is desirable that the special winning opening count-up effect corresponding to the winning of the winning opening 54 is started.

  As a modified example of the present embodiment, when an over-winning occurs during execution of a special game, the over-winning effect is executed while the number of award balls awarded based on the over-winning is set as the cumulative award ball number. The addition display may not be performed. In other words, the cumulative number of prize balls is calculated by adding the number of prize balls to be added based on the number of game balls within the specified count to the special winning opening 54, and the specified count to the special winning opening 54 is set. The number of prize balls awarded based on the excess number of game balls entered may not be added and displayed.

In addition, as a modified example of the present embodiment, the first hit occurs (the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol in the normal game state is a big hit) during the execution of the special game, the specified count is exceeded Even if an over-winning occurs, the over-winning effect may not be executed. Further, as a type of special game, there is a high-profit special game (for example, 16R special game) and a low-profit special game (for example, 4R special game), and when the high-profit special game is being executed, the specified count is exceeded. The over-winning effect may be executed when the winning occurs, and the over-winning effect may not be executed even if the over-winning exceeding the specified count occurs during the low profit special game. Further, as a type of round game, a long open round game in which the maximum opening time of the special winning opening 54 is set to an opening time (for example, 29 seconds) in which a game ball of a specified count number (full count) can enter or is easy to enter And a short opening round game in which the maximum opening time of the special winning opening 54 is set to an opening time (for example, 2 seconds) in which a game ball of a specified count number (full count) can enter or is easy to enter, long During the open round game, the over-winning that exceeds the specified count occurs and the over-winning performance is executed. Even if the over-winning that exceeds the specified count occurs during the execution of the short-opening round game, It may be configured not to execute the over-winning effect. In addition, during the special game that is performed when the specific jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is won, the over-winning performance is performed when the over-winning exceeding the specified count occurs, and the regular jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) is performed. During the execution of the special game performed when the player wins, the over-winning effect may not be executed even if an over-winning exceeding the specified count occurs.

<B. General winning award winning presentation ＞
The general winning opening winning effect is an effect that is executed when the game ball wins the general winning opening 64. The general winning a prize winning effect includes a general winning award normal winning effect and a general winning a prize count up effect.

<< B-1. General prize opening Normal prize production≫
The general winning award normal winning effect (also referred to as “bonus winning effect”) is an effect that suggests or informs that the game ball has won the general winning opening 64. It should be noted that in the following, the fact that the game ball wins the general winning opening 64 during the execution of the special game is also referred to as “an bonus prize”. The prize may be given to the mouth 64 or may be referred to as a "bonus prize".

  The types of bonus winning effects include bonus winning image display effects and bonus winning sound output effects. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the bonus winning effect of this embodiment. Further, as a modified example, as the effect related to the bonus winning, only the bonus winning image may be mounted (no bonus winning sound is mounted), or only the bonus winning sound may be mounted (no bonus winning image is mounted). It should be noted that this bonus winning effect is configured to be executed even during the execution of the round game or during the closing of the special winning opening 54 during the big hit (during the interval period). If the special winning opening 54 is closed (during the interval period), it can be executed simultaneously with the over-winning effect.

  The bonus winning image display effect is an effect of displaying an image (referred to as an “offer winning image”) indicating that a bonus winning has occurred. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, the bonus winning image of the character “+ 3pt” is displayed as the bonus winning image in the prize ball acquisition display area 732 of the screen, and “3” is displayed based on the occurrence of the bonus winning. It is suggested that you have won a prize ball. Thereby, the player can intuitively understand that the bonus prize has been generated.

  The bonus winning sound output effect is an effect of outputting a voice (“an bonus winning sound”) indicating that a bonus winning has occurred from the speaker 11. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, the speaker 11 outputs the sound effect “Picon”, which suggests that the bonus prize has been generated.

  As a modified example of the present embodiment, a plurality of effect patterns for bonus prize effects may be provided. That is, a plurality of types of bonus winning images or a plurality of types of bonus winning sounds are prepared, and it is possible to select one of the bonus winning images and bonus winning sounds by the effect drawing when the bonus winning occurs. Good. In that case, depending on the type of the bonus winning image or bonus winning sound, the pending consecutive suggestion, the probability variation suggestion, the number of rounds suggestion, etc. may be performed. As an example, there is only one type of "+ 3pt" as the bonus winning image, while as for the bonus winning sound, there are "Gachan", "Chine", and "Dokan" other than "Picon". Among them, "Dokan" When the bonus winning sound such as "is generated, (1) the effect also serves as a pending continuous suggestion, (2) it also serves as a suggestion that the jackpot currently being executed is a probability variation jackpot, (3 ) It may also have a role of suggesting that the currently executed jackpot is the 16R jackpot instead of the 4R jackpot.

More specifically, as a modified example of the present embodiment, a plurality of types of bonus winning sounds are set, and in addition to the bonus winning occurrence, an on-hold resort is generated according to the type of bonus winning sound. It is also possible to adopt a configuration that suggests the possibility that there is a possibility (that is, both the bonus winning effect and the pending rendition suggesting effect are combined). In the present modification, a bonus winning sound A (sound effect called "Picon") and a bonus winning sound B (sound effect called "Dokan") are prepared as a plurality of types of bonus winning sounds. When there is no big hit hold at the time of the bonus winning occurrence (when there is no on-hold holidays), the bonus winning sound A selection rate is “100%” and the bonus winning sound B selection rate is “0%. Will be On the other hand, when there is a big hit hold at the time of the bonus winning occurrence (when the on-hold resort is established), the bonus winning sound A selection rate is “0%”, and the bonus winning sound B selection rate is “100%. Will be In other words, the bonus winning sound A is a sound in a normal mode that suggests that a bonus winning has occurred and that the in-hold-and-remedy has not been established. The bonus winning sound B is a sound of a special mode that suggests that a bonus winning has occurred and that the pending holiday resort has been established. In addition, when there is a big hit hold at the time of the bonus winning occurrence (when the on-hold holiday rental is established), the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is “80%”, and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is “20%. " In addition, in the modified example, the case where the pending continuous suggestion effect is applied to the bonus winning sound output effect has been described as an example, but the pending continuous suggestion effect may be applied to the bonus winning image display effect (for example, the bonus winning image. When "+ 3pt" is displayed in black characters as the display effect, it is unlikely that the pending holiday cottage is not established, but when it is displayed in gold characters, the pending holiday cottage is set. It may be a specification that has been established or is likely to be established). In addition, in the above-described modification example, the bonus winning sound B as a pending consecutive suggestion has been described, but the bonus winning sound B may be a specification that has a role of suggesting a probability change or suggesting the number of rounds. Depending on whether the jackpot being played is a normal jackpot or a specific jackpot (probability variation jackpot), the selection rate of bonus winning sounds A and B is set to 100% in the case of a normal jackpot. , The selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is “0%”, while the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is “0%” and the selectivity rate of the bonus winning sound B is “100%” in the case of the specific jackpot (probability variation jackpot). %, Or the bonus winning sound A selection rate may be “80%” and the bonus winning sound B selection rate may be “20%”. Whether the jackpot currently being executed is a 4R jackpot or a 16R jackpot. Accordingly, when the selection rate of bonus winning sounds A and B is 4R big hit, the selection rate of bonus winning sound A is "100%", and the selection rate of bonus winning sound B is "0%", while 16R jackpot In the case of, the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is “0%”, the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is “100%”, or the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is “80%”, and the bonus winning sound B is selected. The rate may be “20%”.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the "special map 2 priority digestion method" that preferentially digests the operation retaining balls of the second special symbol rather than the operation retaining balls of the first special symbol is adopted. As the target operation holding ball, only the operation holding ball of the second special symbol may be the target. Further, when the game state at the time of a big hit that triggers execution of the special game is the specific game state (high base state), and the game state after the end of the special game is also the specific game state (high base state) Alternatively, the pending rendition suggestion effect may be executed triggered by the bonus winning that occurs during the execution of the special game. Also, assuming that the preceding operation holding ball is a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot), a specific hold that is a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot) is included in the subsequent operation holding ball as the earliest specified hold. Alternatively, the pending rendition suggestion effect may be executed triggered by the bonus winning that occurs during the execution of the special game. In other words, even if there is a big hit hold in the subsequent operation hold, if the big hit type related to big hit hold (first big hit hold when there are multiple big hit hold) is low profit big hit, hold It may be configured not to execute the villa suggestion effect. In other words, if a pending rendition suggestion effect is generated during execution of a special game, it is definite that a high profit big hit (16R big hit) will be held in the hold.

In addition, as a modified example of the present embodiment, in addition to the bonus prize being generated by the bonus prize effect, it may be possible to suggest the possibility of winning the probability variation jackpot. That is, the bonus winning effect and the probability change suggesting effect may be combined. Probability variation suggestion production is that the type of big hit that triggered the execution of the special game that is currently being executed is a specific big hit (probability variation big hit), that is, a production that suggests that the special game is transitioned to the probability variation game state after the end of the special game. Is. In the present modification, for example, when a plurality of types of bonus winning sounds A to C are set and the type of jackpot that is won this time is a normal jackpot, the selection rate of the bonus winning sounds A is "70%", and the bonus winning sounds are The selection rate of B is "30%", and the selection rate of bonus winning sound C is "0%". In addition, when the jackpot type which is won this time is the specific jackpot, the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is “10%”, the selectivity rate of the bonus winning sound B is “30%”, and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound C is It becomes "60%". In other words, the probability variation expectation (the probability of transition to the probability variation gaming state) increases by one step in the order of "bonus winning sound A"<"bonus winning sound B"<"bonus winning sound C". As a further modification, the bonus winning sound may be used to indicate not the probability change probability but the number of electric support provided after the end of the special game.

≪General prize winning count up production≫
The general winning a prize count-up effect is, when a game ball enters the general winning award 64 during the execution of the special game in the condominium, the cumulative award number displayed in the cumulative award number display area 733 is This is an effect of additionally displaying the number of prize balls (the number of unit prize balls) paid out based on the entry of game balls into the general winning opening 64. In the present embodiment, since one game ball enters the general winning opening 64, "3" prize balls are paid out (the unit winning ball number of the general winning opening 64 is three) When the ball has entered the general winning opening 64, the cumulative prize ball number displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area 733 is updated in units of “3”. In addition, the special game effect control means 227 is provided with a cumulative prize ball number counter for counting the cumulative prize ball number as described above, and each time a game ball enters the general winning opening 64 (main Every time a general prize winning command is received from the control board 100), "3" corresponding to the unit prize sphere number of the general winning prize 64 is added to the count value of the cumulative prize sphere counter, and the cumulative prize sphere is correspondingly added. A general winning hole count-up effect is performed in which "3" is added and displayed to the value of the accumulated prize balls displayed in the number display area 733.

  Here, FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram showing an example of continuous production of a general winning hole count-up effect. As shown in FIG. 22, the general prize-winning count-up effect is the current value of the cumulative prize-ball number displayed in the cumulative prize-ball number display area 733 when the game balls enter the general prize-winning hole 54. In addition, the value of the number of unit prize balls given based on the entry of the game balls into the general winning opening 64 is sequentially added and displayed in a count-up format by "1". In the illustrated example, the value of the cumulative number of prize balls is counted up and displayed one by one such as “8000” → “8001” → “8002” → “8003”.

  In addition, the general winning opening winning effect (bonus winning winning effect, general winning opening counting up effect) is a general winning opening 64 provided in the right side area PA2 of the plurality of general winning openings 61 to 64 during execution of the special game. It is performed for the entry of game balls into. Therefore, during the execution of the special game, even if the game ball enters the general winning openings 61-63 provided in the left side area PA1 among the plurality of general winning openings 61-64, the general winning entrance winning performance is performed. I don't know. However, if the game ball enters any of the general winning openings 61 to 64 during execution of the special game, regardless of the type of the general winning openings 61 to 64 (regardless of whether or not to execute the general winning opening winning effect) No.), prize balls (3 pieces) based on the winning of the game balls to the general winning openings 61 to 64 are paid out.

  In this embodiment, the number of prize balls (the number of unit prize balls) awarded by the bonus prize is added to the cumulative prize ball count and displayed every time one bonus prize is generated. The number of prize balls based on all bonus prizes generated during the execution of one round game (the number of unit prize balls × the number of bonus prizes during one round game) is not limited, and It may be configured to collectively display the cumulative award balls at the end, or the number of award balls based on all bonus prizes generated during the execution of one special game (the number of unit award balls x 1 time). The bonus winning number during the special game) may be collectively displayed in addition to the cumulative award ball number at the end of the final round game or at the end of the special game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a board surface configuration in which the general winning opening 64 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting opening 51 is adopted, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the general winning opening 64 is set to the second opening. You may employ | adopt the board surface structure arrange | positioned rather than the starting opening 51 downstream. In that case, the general winning opening 64 may be arranged upstream of the special winning opening 54, or the general winning opening 64 may be arranged downstream of the special winning opening 54.

  In addition, as a modified example of the present embodiment, the general winning opening 64 may also be used as an operation opening (operation gate 53) that triggers execution of the normal symbol lottery. That is, by entering the game ball into the general winning opening 64, a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not to open the second starting opening 52 is performed, and a predetermined number (for example, one or two) The prize balls may be paid out.

  As described above, in the general winning a prize winning effect (additional winning effect, general winning a prize count-up effect), when the currently executed game state is the special gaming state, the game ball enters the general winning award 64. Since it is an effect that is performed as a trigger, even if a game ball enters the general winning opening 64 when the game state currently being executed is a non-special gaming state, a general winning opening winning effect (bonus winning effect, general Winning prize count-up production) will not be performed. That is, even if the game state currently being executed is the game state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is the main subject of the game (non-electric support state), the game state currently being executed is the variable display of the second special symbol. Even if the game is the main state of the game (electric support state), the general winning a prize winning effect (make prize winning effect, general winning a prize counting up effect) is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 64. I don't know. In addition, if the game state currently being executed is the game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is the main subject of the game (electric support state), the screen is based on the assumption that the condominium state is still continuing. In the cumulative prize ball number display area 733, the cumulative prize ball number acquired in the special game in the condominium (the cumulative prize ball number at the end of the latest special game) is displayed. However, in this electric power support state, only the cumulative number of prize balls obtained in the special game during the condominium is displayed, and even if the game balls enter the general winning opening 64, the number of prize balls is accumulated. It is not displayed in addition to the number of balls (general winning hole count-up effect is not performed), and the value of the accumulated prize balls does not change (the accumulated prize balls at the end of the latest special game is maintained).

  In addition, even if the game ball enters the general winning opening 64 during the execution of the special game performed by the first hit (the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is a big hit in the normal game state) The bonus winning effect may not be executed. In addition, as a type of special game, there is a high profit special game (for example, 16R special game) and a low profit special game (for example, 4R special game), and a game ball at the general winning opening 64 during execution of the high profit special game. The bonus winning effect may be executed by entering the ball, and the bonus winning effect may not be executed even when the game ball enters the general winning opening 64 during execution of the low profit special game. Further, as a type of round game, a long open round game in which the maximum opening time of the special winning opening 54 is set to an opening time (for example, 29 seconds) at which a game ball of a specified count (full count) can enter or is easy to enter And a short opening round game in which the maximum opening time of the special winning opening 54 is set to an opening time (for example, 2 seconds) in which a game ball of a specified count (full count) can enter or is easy to enter, Even if the game ball enters the general winning opening 64 during execution of the short opening round game, the bonus winning effect is executed by the game ball entering the general winning opening 64 during execution of the opening round game. The bonus prize presentation may be configured not to be executed. In addition, during the execution of the special game that is performed when the specific jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is won, a bonus ball performance is executed by the game ball entering the general winning opening 64, and a regular jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot). During the execution of the special game performed when the player wins, the bonus winning effect may not be executed even if the game ball enters the general winning opening 64.

<Other features of prize-related production>
Next, other features of the special winning opening winning effect and the general winning opening winning effect of the present embodiment will be described. Since the special winning hole count-up effect and the general winning hole count-up effect are effects for the same display object (cumulative prize ball number displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area 733), in the following, The up effect and the general winning a prize count up effect may be collectively referred to simply as "count up effect".

≪Count up production time≫
In this embodiment, the time for counting up one prize ball (the time required for counting up from "N" to "N + 1") is set to "0.03 seconds". That is, the value of the cumulative number of prize balls displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area 733 is counted up in increments of "0.03 seconds". Therefore, the execution time of the special winning hole count-up effect is the number of prize balls (one unit) that is awarded when one game ball enters the special winning opening 54 at the time value required to count up one prize ball. It is derived by multiplying the value of the number of prize balls, and the execution time of the special winning opening count-up effect is “15 (number of unit prize balls) × 0.03 seconds (count-up interval) = 0.45 seconds”. Becomes Similarly, the general prize-winning count-up effect is the number of prize balls (unit prize-ball) that is awarded by inserting one game ball into the general prize-winning opening 64 at the time value required to count up one prize ball. It is derived by multiplying the value of (number), and the execution time of the general winning a prize mouth count-up effect is "3 (number of unit prize balls) x 0.03 seconds (count-up interval) = 0.09 seconds". .. In the following, for convenience, the execution time of the special winning opening count-up effect (the time value from the start to the end of one large winning opening count-up effect) is referred to as "count-up effect time A" The execution time of the effect (the time value from the start to the end of one general winning hole count-up effect) is abbreviated as "count-up effect time B". Here, the special winning opening normal winning effect, over-winning effect, and bonus winning effect are configured not to be executed during execution of the big hit start demo and during the big hit end demo even during execution of the special game. Therefore, the special winning opening count-up effect and the general winning opening count-up effect are configured not to be executed during the big hit start demo and the big hit end demo even if the special game is being executed. ing.

(Relationship 1 of count-up performance time A)
The count-up effect time A is set shorter than the interval time (also referred to as "interval period") set after the end of each round game. The interval time is a waiting time set between each round game or between the final round game and the big hit end demonstration, which is a period during which the closing of the special winning opening 54 is maintained from the closing operation. It is the game waiting time (unit game waiting time) or the end demo waiting time. In this embodiment, the interval time is set to "2 seconds" in common to all round games. In the present embodiment, the count-up effect time A (0.45 seconds) is configured to be shorter than the interval time (2 seconds), so that the game ball enters the special winning opening 54 just before the end of a certain round game. Even when the special winning hole count-up effect is performed based on entering the ball, the special winning hole count-up effect is completed within the interval time after the end of the round game. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the big winning mouth count-up effect will be performed over the interval period until the next round game or the big hit end demo (If you win over, the interval period may be exceeded. , The break between each round game or the break between the final round game and the jackpot end demo can be clarified.

(Relationship 2 of count-up performance time A)
The count-up effect time A is set shorter than the execution time of the big hit end demo. As described above, the count-up effect time A is set to "0.45 seconds", and the execution time of the big hit end demo is set to "20 seconds" in common to all kinds of big hits (large hit mid effect). ing. The execution time of the big hit end demo is a waiting time from when the interval time after the end of the final round game in the special game has elapsed until the special game ends. That is, the execution time of the big hit end demo does not include the interval time set after the end of the final round game. That is, in the interval time after the end of the final round game, the entry of the game ball into the special winning opening 54 is effectively detected within that time (that is, it is detected as an object for paying out the winning ball, and determined to be an illegal entry). Although it is set as the remaining time (grace time) of the round game that may be detected), the execution time of the big hit end demonstration is that the game ball enters the special winning opening 54 within that time. It is set as a preparation time for a game (production mode) after the end of the special game separated from the round game that is not likely to be effectively detected. In the present embodiment, the count-up effect time A (0.45 seconds) is configured to be shorter than the execution time (20 seconds) of the big hit end demo, so that the game ball near the end of the final round game. Even if the special winning hole count-up effect is performed based on entering the special winning opening 54, more specifically, even if an over-winning occurs in the final round game, the final round Even after the big winning opening 54 is closed after the game (even during the big hit ending demo period), if the specification is to perform the big winning mouth count up production, the big winning end count is made within the big hit ending demo period. The up production will be completed. Therefore, the special winning hole count-up effect does not extend beyond the jackpot end demonstration period until the variation display after the special game ends, and at the end of the special game and the start of the variation display of the first rotation. Breaks can be made clear. As a modified example, for at least a part of the execution time of the big hit end demo, the entrance of the game ball into the special winning opening 54 may be effectively detected within that time.

(Relationship 3 of count-up performance time A)
In the present embodiment, when a specified number of game balls enter the special winning opening 54 in one round game, the total time (1) of the count-up effect time A for the specified count number in this one round game. The special winning opening count-up effect for the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one round game) is configured to be shorter than the execution time of the big hit end demo. Specifically, the total time of the count-up effect time A for the specified count number is “0.45 seconds (count-up effect time A) × 10 balls (specified count number) = 4.5 seconds”. On the other hand, the execution time of the big hit end demo is set to "20 seconds" in common to all kinds of big hits (production during big hit), as described above. In the present embodiment, the total time (4.5 seconds) of the count-up effect time A for the specified number of counts is configured to be shorter than the execution time (20 seconds) of the big hit end demo, so that Even when a plurality of winning prize hole count-up effects are continuously performed based on a plurality of gaming balls entering the winning prize hole 54 immediately before the end of the round game, Even after closing the big winning opening 54 after the round game (even during the big hit ending demo period), if the specification is to perform the big winning opening count-up production, the big winning opening within the big hit ending demo period The count-up production will be completed. Therefore, the special winning hole count-up effect does not extend beyond the jackpot end demonstration period until the variation display after the special game ends, and at the end of the special game and the start of the variation display of the first rotation. Breaks can be made clear.

Even when the game ball exceeds the specified count number in the large winning opening 54 in one round game (when an over-winning occurs), the accumulated count number in this one round game ( It is preferable that the total time of the count-up effect time A of (the specified count number + the number of over-winning prizes) is set to be shorter than the execution time of the big hit end demo. That is, the time obtained by adding the total time of the count-up effect time A for the specified count number in one round game and the total time of the count-up effect time A for the number of over-winning prizes is calculated after the end of the round game. By setting it shorter than the execution time of the big hit end demo, even after closing the big prize hole 54 after the final round game (even during the big hit end demo period) Even if an over-winning occurs, the special winning opening count-up effect is finished within the execution time of the big hit end demo, and the end of the special game and the start of the variable display Is preferred. The number of over-winning prizes is uncertain because it depends on the progress of the game (the situation of shooting the game ball and the situation of the game ball flowing down), but even if it is assumed that the number of balls is the same as the specified count number, 10 balls, It is desirable to satisfy the above relationship (in that case, the total time of the count-up effect time A for the specified count number in one round game and the total time of the count-up effect time A for the number of over-winning prizes are added together. The total time is 4.5 seconds + 4.5 seconds, which is 9 seconds, which is shorter than the 20 seconds which is the execution time of the jackpot end demo).

(Relationship 4 of count-up performance time A)
As a modified example of the present embodiment, in the case where a predetermined number of game balls enter the special winning opening 54 in one round game, the total of the count-up effect time A for the specified number of counts in this one round game. The time may be configured to be shorter than the interval time after the end of the round game. In this modification, the total time of the count-up effect time A for the specified count number is “0.45 seconds (count-up effect time A) × 10 balls (specified count number) = 4.5 seconds”. On the other hand, the interval time after the end of each round game is longer than the interval time (2 seconds) of the above embodiment, and is set to "6 seconds" in common to all round games. In this modified example, the total time (4.5 seconds) of the count-up effect time A for the specified count number is configured to be shorter than the interval time (6 seconds), so that a certain round game ends. Even if a plurality of special winning opening count-up effects are continuously performed by a plurality of game balls successively entering the special winning prize 54 immediately before the end, within the interval time after the end of the round game. The winning prize count-up production will be completed. Therefore, the special winning hole count-up effect will not be performed over the interval period until the next round game or jackpot end demonstration, and it will be a break between each round game or the final round game and jackpot end demonstration. The separation between can be clarified.

  In addition, also in the case where the game ball exceeds the specified count number and enters only one ball in the one-round game (when one over-win occurs), this one-round game It is preferable that the total time of the count-up effect time A for the total number of counts (regular count number + 1 number of over-winning prizes) is set shorter than the interval time after the end of the round game. That is, the time (4.5 seconds + 0.45 seconds = 4) obtained by adding up the total time of the count-up effect time A for the specified count number in one round game and the count-up effect time A for one over-winning prize. .95 seconds) is set shorter than the interval time (6 seconds) after the end of the round game, so even if an over-winning occurs, the special winning opening count-up effect is finished within the interval period. , It is preferable to clarify the division between round games.

(Relationship 5 of count-up performance time A)
As a modified example of this embodiment, when a predetermined count number (full count) of game balls enters the special winning opening 54 in all round games of one special game, the full count number that occurs during execution of this special game The total time of the count-up effect time A of minutes (specified number of rounds × specified number of counts) may be shorter than the execution time of the big hit end demo. In this modified example, when the specified number of rounds of one special game is the maximum number of rounds (16 rounds), the game balls have entered the special winning opening by the specified number of counts (10 balls) in all round games. In this case, a total of 160 times the special winning opening count-up effect is executed. Therefore, the total time of the count-up effect time A for all the counts is "0.45 seconds (count-up effect time A) x 10 balls (specified count number) x 16 rounds (specified round number) = 72 seconds". is there. On the other hand, in the present modified example, the execution time of the big hit end demo is set to "120 seconds" in common for all big hit types (large hit mid effect). In this modified example, the total time (72 seconds) of the count-up effect time A for all the count numbers in one special game is configured to be shorter than the execution time (120 seconds) of the jackpot end demonstration. , Even after the closing of the special winning opening 54 after the final round game (even during the big hit end demo period), if it is designed to perform the big winning opening count-up effect, go to the big winning opening 54. Even if the execution of the special winning hole count-up effect is congested during the round game or the interval period due to the continuous winning of the game balls, all the big prize opening count-up effects must be completed at least by the end of the big hit demonstration. Since it is guaranteed, it is possible to smoothly proceed with the performance during the big hit.

≪The priority of the future big prize hole count-up production≫
FIG. 23 is a time chart for explaining the priority of the special winning opening count-up effect. As shown in FIG. 23, when a plurality of game balls (two game balls in the illustrated example) continuously enter the special winning opening 54 during execution of a certain round game, 2 based on the continuous winning. The prize-winning prize count-up effect for the second time will be executed. Specifically, when the execution condition of the special winning hole count-up effect is satisfied by the first game ball entering the special winning opening 54, the previous special winning hole count-up effect is executed. Similarly, when the execution condition of the special winning opening count-up effect is satisfied by the second game ball winning the special winning opening 54, the subsequent special winning opening count-up effect is executed. The execution condition of the special winning hole count-up effect is a condition for starting the execution of the special winning hole count-up effect, and the game ball enters the special winning opening 54 during the execution of the special game (the big winning prize. It is established when the entrance of the game ball is detected by the mouth switch 541). At this time, if the condition for executing the subsequent special winning hole count-up effect is satisfied while the previous special winning hole count-up effect is being executed, the execution of the previous special winning hole count-up effect is in progress. The execution of the subsequent special winning hole count-up effect is started after the execution of the previous special winning hole count-up effect is finished without terminating with. That is, in the present embodiment, the priority of the previous special winning hole count-up effect is set to be higher than the priority of the later special winning hole count-up effect among the two big winning hole count-up effects. The execution of the subsequent special winning hole count-up effect is not started before the execution of the previous special winning hole count-up effect is completed. After that, the execution of the subsequent special winning opening count-up effect is started. In addition, when the execution of the subsequent special winning hole count-up effect is started after the execution of the previous special winning hole count-up effect is completed, the previous special winning hole count-up effect and the subsequent large prize hole count-up It is preferable that the effect is continuously (seamlessly) connected and the special winning opening count-up for two times is continuously performed. However, as a modified example, after the execution of the previous special winning opening count-up effect is finished, a predetermined time (minute time) has elapsed, and then the execution of the subsequent special winning opening count-up effect is started. A clear break may be provided between the special winning hole count-up effect and the subsequent special winning hole count-up effect. Although the explanation has been given here regarding the special winning hole count-up effect, the general winning hole count-up effect may have the same specifications, and the execution condition of the subsequent general winning hole count-up effect during the execution of the general winning prize count-up effect. If the situation is established, after the execution of the general prize-winning count-up effect, the general prize-winning mouth count-up after the execution of the general prize-winning mouth count-up effect is stopped. It is preferable to be configured to start execution of the effect. In addition, when the condition for executing the subsequent general winning a prize count up effect is satisfied during the execution of the previous award winning prize count up effect, the execution of the previous special winning a prize count up effect is performed midway. It is preferable to be configured to start execution of the subsequent general winning hole count-up effect after the execution of the previous special winning hole count-up effect is completed without being discontinued. In addition, during the execution of the general winning a prize mouth count-up effect, if the condition for executing the later large award winning hole count-up effect is satisfied, the execution of the general prize-winning mouth count-up effect is performed midway. It is preferable that the execution of the subsequent special winning opening count-up effect is started after the execution of the general winning-award winning mouth count-up effect is completed without being discontinued.

As a modified example of the present embodiment, during execution of the previous special winning hole count-up effect, if the execution condition of the subsequent special winning hole count-up effect is satisfied, the execution of the previous special winning hole count-up effect is executed. It may be configured to interrupt and start execution of the next special winning opening count-up effect. That is, the priority of the subsequent special winning opening count-up effect is set higher than that of the previous special winning opening count-up effect. In that case, when the execution of the previous special winning hole count-up effect is interrupted, the count value is forced to be the final value of the previous special winning hole count-up effect or the initial value of the subsequent special winning hole count-up effect. It is preferable to switch to, and start the subsequent special winning opening count-up effect from that point. In this modification, the large winning a prize count-up effect is explained, but the general winning a prize count-up effect may have the same specifications, and during the execution of the general winning a prize count-up effect, the general winning a prize count-up effect afterward is performed. If the execution condition is satisfied, the execution of the general winning a prize mouth count-up effect may be interrupted and the next general winning a prize mouth count-up effect may be started. In addition, if the execution condition of the subsequent general winning a prize count up effect is satisfied during the execution of the previous award winning prize count up effect, the execution of the previous special winning a prize count up effect is interrupted and the next general winning a prize It may be configured to start execution of the mouth count-up effect. In addition, if the execution condition of the subsequent special winning hole count-up effect is satisfied during the execution of the above general winning-winner count-up effect, the execution of the previous general winning-hole count-up effect is interrupted and the next big winning prize is awarded. It may be configured to start execution of the mouth count-up effect.

(Emphasis of cumulative award balls)
FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram for explaining the highlighting effect of the present embodiment. (A) in the figure shows the case where the over-winning effect is executed during the execution of the emphasis effect, and (B) in the figure shows the case where the bonus winning effect is executed during the execution of the emphasis effect. In the present embodiment, the value of the cumulative number of prize balls in the condominium is set to a predetermined specific value, triggered by the game balls entering the special winning opening 54 or the general winning opening 64 during the execution of the special game. When it reaches, a highlight effect that notifies that the cumulative number of prize balls has reached a specific value is executed. The specific value is a multiple of the predetermined number of prize balls (10000). That is, each time the current value of the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a multiple value (10000, 20000, 30,000 ...) Of the predetermined number of prize balls, the highlighting effect is performed. Therefore, the highlighting effect may be referred to as a specific value reaching effect, and the highlighting may be referred to as a specific value corresponding display. In the present embodiment, even when the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value triggered by over-winning or bonus winning, the highlighting effect is executed, and in that case, the highlighting effect and the over-winning prize. The effect or the bonus winning effect is overlapped.

  As shown in FIG. 24, as the types of the highlighting effects, a highlighting effect for enlarging and displaying a specific value (“20,000 pt” in the illustrated example) at which the cumulative number of prize balls has reached the highlighting area 735 at the center of the screen, and a speaker. 11 is a emphasized sound output effect of outputting a special sound (a sound of “high-pitched” in the illustrated example).

  The highlighting of the specific value is continuously performed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and during that time, the cumulative award ball number display is updated and displayed (addition display) by the entry of the game balls into the special winning opening 54 or the general winning opening 64. ), The highlighted display is not updated (added). At this time, the display priority of each layer becomes higher in the order of “display of cumulative award ball count” <“highlighted display” <“round display”. “Layer” means each layer of a hierarchical structure that defines the display priority of each image forming the entire image. Each layer has a higher display priority and is arranged in a higher layer (front side from the player), and a lower display priority is arranged in a lower layer (rear side as viewed from the player). To be done. In FIG. 24, the highlighted display and the accumulated prize sphere number display are not displayed in a superimposed manner, but the display area may be enlarged and superimposed in order to further emphasize the highlighted display. According to the above, the highlighted display may be displayed in front of the cumulative award ball number display (the highlighted display may be displayed so as to cover a part or the whole of the accumulated award ball number display).

Further, as shown in FIG. 24, the award ball acquisition display area 732 and the highlight display area 735 are provided as separate and independent display areas, and when an over-winning prize or a bonus winning occurs during execution of the highlighting, , The emphasized image and the over-winning image or bonus winning image are displayed simultaneously in parallel. When displaying the emphasized image and the over-winning image or the bonus winning image at the same time, even if the priority of displaying the emphasized image is higher than the over-winning image or the bonus winning image, the over-winning image is over the emphasized image. Alternatively, the display priority of the bonus winning image may be increased. In FIG. 24, the emphasis display and the over-prize image / bonus prize image are not superimposed and displayed. However, in order to further emphasize the emphasis display, the display area may be enlarged and may be superimposed and displayed. According to the priority, the highlighted display may be displayed in front of the over-winning image / bonus winning image (the over-winning image / bonus winning image may be partially or entirely covered and highlighted).

  Further, when an over-winning sound is generated during the output of the special sound, the over-winning sound or the bonus winning sound is output in duplicate during the outputting of the special sound. When the special sound and the over-prize sound or bonus prize sound overlap, the volume of the over-prize sound or bonus prize sound may be set to a lower volume than the volume of the special sound with high priority, and vice versa. Then, the sound of the special sound may be set to a volume lower than that of the over-prize sound or the bonus prize sound having a high priority. In that case, the volume with the lower priority (the volume with the lower priority) may be set to substantially “0”.

≪Over-winning prize production / bonus winning production when an error occurs≫
In the present embodiment, when various errors occur in the gaming machine, it is configured to control whether or not the over-winning prize effect and the bonus winning prize effect can be executed according to the error type. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram for explaining the error type of the gaming machine. In the present embodiment, as the error type that occurs in the gaming machine, "door / frame opening error", "magnetic sensor error", "radio sensor error", "disconnection short-circuit power supply error", "excess prize winning error", "payout error" , Etc. are set. Note that the above error types are examples, and various error types may be provided according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

  The door / frame opening error is a door opening switch that detects the opening of the glass frame 5 when the glass frame 5, the front frame 2 or the back set board 30 is open with respect to the outer frame 1, and the opening of the front frame 2 is detected. This is an error that occurs when the frame opening switch and the back set opening switch that detects the opening of the back set board 30 are broken or broken. This door / frame opening error is canceled when it is confirmed that the gaming machine has no abnormality and the glass frame 5, the front frame 2 and the back set board 30 are closed.

  The magnetic sensor error and the electric wave sensor error are errors that occur when the magnetic sensor detects magnetism, when the electric wave sensor detects an electric wave, and when the magnetic sensor or the electric wave sensor is disconnected, short-circuited, or malfunctions. The magnetic sensor error and the radio wave sensor error are canceled when it is confirmed that the gaming machine is normal and the power is turned on again.

  The disconnection short-circuit power supply error is an error that occurs when a disconnection, a short circuit, or a failure of the radio wave sensor and various switches provided on the game board surface occurs. The disconnection short-circuit power supply error is canceled when the game machine is checked for abnormality and the power is turned on again.

The excess winning error is an error that occurs when gaming balls excessively enter various winning openings. The excess winning error is canceled when the game machine is checked for abnormality and the power is turned on again. Here, the over-winning error includes an over-winning error of the special winning opening 54 (also referred to as "big-winning opening over-winning error") and an over-winning error of the general winning openings 61-64 ("general winning-winning over-winning error"). It is also referred to as “)” and the like. For example, the special winning opening excess winning error is an error that occurs when a predetermined number (for example, 30 balls) of game balls enter the special winning opening 54 during the execution of one round game. The general winning opening excess winning error occurs when a predetermined number (eg, 30 balls) of game balls enter the general winning openings 61 to 63 per unit time (eg, 30 seconds) or per unit time (eg, 30 seconds). This is an error that occurs when a certain number (for example, 60 balls) of game balls enter the general winning opening 64. Since the general winning opening 64 is arranged so that the game balls are easier to enter than the general winning openings 61 to 63, the general winning opening 64 has an error determination value based on the number of winnings per unit time (error and As a value of the number of game balls to be determined), a numerical value with a margin is provided. In the present embodiment, when a special winning opening excessive winning error occurs, or when a ball enters the special winning opening 54 in a state where the special winning opening 54 is not open (during a non-special game), that is, When an abnormal prize for the special winning opening 54 is detected (when it is determined to be an abnormal prize), the external information terminal board 600 outputs an external information signal (security signal) indicating that an error has occurred. On the other hand, when a general winning opening excess winning error occurs, that is, when an abnormal winning relating to the general winning openings 61 to 64 is detected (when it is determined as an abnormal winning), an error is output from the external information terminal board 600. It does not output the external information signal (security signal) indicating that it has occurred. The external information signal (outer end signal) output by the external information terminal board 600 will be described later.

  The payout error is an error that occurs when the payout of prize balls is hindered. This payout error includes a full tank error in which the lower ball plate 9 is full of game balls (the full tank switch is ON), a ball catching / ball clogging error in the prize ball payout unit 34, and a game ball supplied from the game island. Includes missing ball errors that cannot be done. When a full tank error occurs, the notification level is divided into two levels. The notification level 1 is a level in a state where the ON state continues for 30 seconds after the full tank switch is turned on. At the notification level 1, only the voice notification “Please pull out the ball” is executed. In the notification level 1, even if there is a ball in the special winning opening 54 or the general winning openings 61 to 64, the payout of the prize ball is not restricted (the payout of the prize ball does not stop). When the ON state exceeds 30 seconds, it shifts to the notification level 2 and not only the voice notification "please pull out the ball" is displayed, but also "the image prompting the punching out of the lower ball plate" is displayed on the effect display device 70. The image notification is also made, and furthermore, even if there is a ball to the special winning opening 54 or the general winning openings 61 to 64, the payout of the prize ball is restricted (the prize ball payout is stopped). As a modification, the specification may be such that only the image notification is performed at the notification level 1, and both the image notification and the audio notification are performed at the notification level 2. Regarding the ball biting / ball clogging error of the prize ball payout unit 34 and the ball-less error that cannot be replenished with game balls from the game island, even if there is a ball to the big winning opening 54 or general winning openings 61 to 64, Prize ball payout is restricted (prize ball payout is stopped).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the various errors are classified into “first error”, “second error”, and “third error” according to the priority (importance) of the error. The first error is an error type in which the priority (importance) at which the continuation of the game is prohibited or difficult is set to the medium level. The first error includes “door / frame opening error”. The second error is an error type in which the priority (importance) at which the continuation of the game is prohibited or difficult is set to a high level. The second error includes "magnetic sensor error", "radio wave sensor error", "disconnection short-circuit power supply error", and "excess prize winning error". The third error is an error type in which the priority (importance) at which the continuation of the game is prohibited or difficult is set to a low level. The third error includes a “payout error”.

  Here, when the above-mentioned error occurs in the gaming machine, an image effect, a sound effect, etc. are performed as various error notifications, and specifically, the content of the error is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 70. Then, the error notification sound is output from the speaker 11 at the error volume. As a modified example of the error notification, the effect lamp LP may be displayed so as to blink with the error brightness.

In the present embodiment, when the gaming machine has the first error (door / frame opening error), even if an over-winning prize or a bonus winning occurs, a part of the over-winning performance or a part of the bonus winning performance is performed. It is constructed so as not to be forgotten. That is, when the first error occurs in the gaming machine, the execution of the over-winning image display effect and the bonus-winning image display effect is permitted, but the over-winning sound output effect and the over-winning sound output effect The execution of bonus winning sound output production is restricted. Even if over-winning or bonus winning occurs during the first error, do not miss the fact that the gaming machine is in the first error state because part of the over-winning effect and bonus winning effect is not performed. It has become. In this case, the execution of the count-up effect (the special winning opening count-up effect and the general winning opening count-up effect) is allowed. Specifically, when the first error occurs, an error image indicating the first error is displayed to notify that the first error has occurred, but it is not displayed on the entire screen. , Display using only part of the display area. The display priority of the error image is higher than that of the over-winning image and the bonus winning image, but all of them can be displayed at the same time, and the count-up effect can also be displayed at the same time. However, while the error notification sound notifying that it is the first error is being output, the over-winning sound and bonus winning sound are not output (or the volume is low). It should be noted that when an over-winning or bonus winning occurs when the gaming machine is in the first error state, prize balls are paid out based on this over-winning or bonus winning.

  If the game machine has a second error (magnetic sensor error, radio wave sensor error, disconnection short-circuit power supply error, excess prize error), even if an over-win or bonus win occurs, over-win prize effect or bonus prize effect Is configured so that all of the above are not done. That is, when the second error occurs in the gaming machine, execution of both the over-winning image display effect and the over-winning sound output effect is limited as the over-winning effect, and the bonus winning image display effect and Both executions of bonus winning sound output production are restricted. Even if an over-winning or the like is generated during the second error, all the over-winning winning effects and the like are not performed, so that it is not overlooked that the gaming machine is in the second error state. In this case, the execution of the count-up effect (the large winning opening count-up effect and the general winning opening count-up effect) is also limited. Specifically, when the second error occurs, an error image indicating the second error is displayed on the full screen to notify that the second error has occurred, and thus the over-winning image or bonus game is displayed. The winning image and the count-up effect are not displayed. Further, while the error notification sound for notifying that it is the second error is being output, the over winning sound and bonus winning sound are not output. When the gaming machine is in the second error state and an over-winning or bonus winning occurs, the payout of prize balls based on the over-winning or bonus winning is performed.

  In addition, even if the game machine becomes the third error (payout error) and the prize balls cannot be paid out, if an over-winning prize or bonus winning occurs, an over-winning performance or bonus The winning effect is executed. In other words, if a payout error occurs in the gaming machine, there is no risk of any trouble even if the player continues playing the game, and there is no risk of the player being disadvantaged. This is because if the production is restricted, the interest in the game may be rather reduced. In this case, a count-up effect (a big winning hole count-up effect and a general winning hole count-up effect) is also executed. However, when the gaming machine is in the third error state and an over-winning or bonus winning occurs, the prize balls are not paid out based on the over-winning or bonus winning.

In the present embodiment, if an over-winning prize or bonus winning occurs when the gaming machine is in the "specific error" in this way, a part or all of the over-winning performance is generated depending on the error type that occurs. In addition to being restricted, part or all of the bonus winning effect is restricted. That is, in the specific error, when the first error occurs, the execution of one or a part of the over-winning effect effects (over-winning sound output effect) is restricted, and the second error occurs. When it occurs, execution of a plurality or all of the element effects (over-winning sound output effect, over-winning image display effect, etc.) of the over-winning effect is restricted. This is because, in the present embodiment, among the specific errors, the second error has a relatively higher priority (importance) than the first error. The specific error may be an error type in which the progress of the game is prohibited. Further, the specific error may be an error type that occurs when an abnormality suspected of a fraudulent act (goto act) is detected. Further, the specific error may be an error type that is resolved by turning the power off / on again.

  As a modified example of the present embodiment, by setting the priority of the error notification effect higher than that of the over-winning effect, for example, the error notification sound is preferentially output over the over-winning sound (for example, the over-winning sound. The error notification sound may be set to a higher audio level than that of the error notification sound), and the error notification image may be displayed preferentially over the over-winning image (for example, the error notification image is prioritized over the layer over the over-winning image). You can set the degree high).

≪Over-winning performance at the end of a big hit≫
FIG. 26 is a time chart for explaining whether or not the over-winning effect is executed at the end of the big hit. For each round game, a detection effective period (a special winning opening valid period) for validating the detection of the game ball by the special winning opening switch 541 is set. This effective detection period is set in consideration of the time required for the game ball entered just before the special winning opening 54 is closed to reach the special winning opening switch 541. In the present embodiment, the round period from the start to the end of each round game (from opening to closing of the special winning opening 54) and from the end of the round game (closing of the special winning opening 54) The detection valid period of the special winning opening switch 541 is set over the entire period including the interval period until the predetermined time elapses. By setting this detection valid period from the round period to the interval period, even if the game ball is detected by the special winning opening switch 541 within the interval period after the round period ends, the special winning opening 54 The winning of the game ball to is treated as valid (is subject to payout of the prize ball). That is, the "round game execution period (large winning opening opening period)" and the "detection grace period (interval period)" described above are set as continuous detection valid periods. Further, as described above, the interval period and the detection grace period may be different periods.

  In the present embodiment, the interval winning period is set as an over-winning effect allowable period during which the execution of the over-winning effect is allowed when the execution timing of the over-winning effect is reached. On the other hand, outside the interval period, the over-prize production prohibited period is set in which the execution of the over-prize production is prohibited even when the execution timing of the over-prize production is reached.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 26 (A), within the interval period after the end of the final round game, a game ball (11 balls in the illustrated example, which exceeds the specified count number with the special winning opening switch 541). When the game ball of the eye) is detected, when the execution timing of the over-winning effect comes within this interval period, the execution of the over-winning effect within this interval period is allowed. However, if the performance time of the over-prize effect (for example, 0.5 seconds) is longer than the time from the execution start timing of the over-prize effect to the end timing of the interval period, all the over-prize effect is executed by the end of the interval period. Therefore, it is desirable to forcibly interrupt the over-winning effect at the end timing of the interval period based on the end of the interval period. However, when the over-winning image and the over-winning sound are provided as the over-winning effect, the over-winning image is interrupted (hidden or erased from the middle), and the over-winning sound is output without interruption. Good. Also, as with the over-prize production, the big-winning prize count-up production may be executed when the over-winning within the interval period is triggered, and in that case, the interval period is ended from the execution start timing of the special winning-portion count-up production. If the time is longer than the timing, it is not possible to execute all of the special winning opening count-up effects by the end of the interval period, so based on the end of the interval period, the special winning opening count-up effect is set to the end timing of the interval period. It is desirable to forcibly suspend the operation.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 26 (B), within the interval period after the end of the final round game, a game ball that exceeds the specified count number with the special winning opening switch 541 (the 11th game in the illustrated example). Even if a ball is detected, if the execution timing of the over-winning performance comes within the big-hit ending demo period after this interval period has passed, the over-winning performance is executed within the big-hit ending demo period. Is prohibited. However, during the jackpot end demonstration period, execution of over-winning prizes is simply prohibited, and prize balls are paid out based on this over-winning prize. Further, in the above case, the execution of the special winning opening count-up effect may be prohibited as well as the over-winning effect.

  As a modified example of the present embodiment, the jackpot end demo period is set as an over-prize production allowable period in which execution of over-win prize production is allowed, and the over-win prize production is executed during execution of the jackpot finish demo. May be. In that case, it is desirable to set only the first predetermined time period of the big hit end demo period as the over-winning performance allowable period. As an example, of the 20 seconds of the big hit end demo period, only the first 5 seconds is the over-winning performance allowable period, and the subsequent 15 seconds is the over-winning performance prohibited period. Further, as a further modified example, the over-prize production allowable period and the over-prize production prohibited period may be set within the interval period after the final round. For example, the first 1.5 seconds of the interval period of 2 seconds are set. Seconds may be set as the over-prize production allowable period, and 0.5 seconds thereafter may be set as the over-prize production prohibited period, and the subsequent jackpot end demonstration period may be set as the over-prize production prohibited period. Further, as a further modified example, considering that the timing at which a game ball exceeding the specified count number is detected by the special winning opening switch 541 is synchronized with the timing at which the over-winning effect is executed, During the interval period after the end of the round game, if a game ball exceeding the specified count is detected by the special winning opening switch 541, the over-winning performance is always executed (at the end timing of the interval period. In the execution of the interval period, if it is longer than the production time of the over-winning performance from the execution start timing of the over-winning performance to the end timing of the interval period, as described above. On the basis of the end, the over-winning effect is forcibly interrupted at the end timing of the interval period (however, when the over-winning image and the over-winning sound are provided as the over-winning effect, the over-winning image is interrupted. (Hidden or erased from the middle), over winning sounds may be output without interruption), when a game ball is detected in the winning hole 54 during the big hit end demonstration period ( When a game ball that exceeds the specified count is detected by the special winning opening switch 541), the over-winning winning effect may be configured not to be executed. When a game ball that exceeds the specified count is detected by the special winning opening switch 541 within the interval period after the end of the round game, it is executed (excluding the ball entering at the end timing of the interval period). At the time of execution, as described above, if it is longer than the performance time of the special winning hole count-up effect from the execution start timing of the special winning opening count-up effect to the end timing of the interval period, Based on this, when the winning prize count-up effect is forcibly interrupted at the end timing of the interval period, and a game ball is detected at the winning prize 54 during the jackpot end demonstration period (the winning prize It may be configured not to execute when the game balls exceeding the specified count number are detected by the switch 541).

≪Bonus prize production at the end of the big hit≫
FIG. 27 is a time chart for explaining whether or not the bonus winning effect is executed at the end of the big hit. In the present embodiment, during the period of the round period and the period of the interval period, when the execution timing of the bonus winning effect is reached, it is set as the bonus winning effect allowable period during which the execution of the bonus winning effect is permitted. On the other hand, within the period of the big hit end demo period, even if the execution timing of the bonus winning effect is reached, it is set as the bonus winning effect prohibiting period in which the execution of the bonus winning effect is prohibited.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27 (A), when a game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641 within the interval period after the end of the final round game, within this interval period When the execution timing of the bonus winning effect comes, the execution of the bonus winning effect within this interval period is allowed. However, if the effect time of the bonus prize effect (for example, 0.5 seconds) is longer than the time from the execution start timing of the bonus prize effect to the end timing of the interval period, all of the bonus prize effects are executed by the end of the interval period. Therefore, it is desirable to forcibly interrupt the bonus winning effect at the end timing of the interval period based on the end of the interval period. However, when the bonus prize image and bonus prize sound are provided as bonus prize effects, even if the bonus prize image is interrupted (hidden or erased from the middle), the bonus prize sound is output without interruption. Good. Further, as with the bonus winning effect, the bonus winning number count-up effect may be executed with the bonus winning within the interval period as a trigger. In that case, the interval period ends from the execution start timing of the bonus winning number count-up effect. If the time is longer than the timing, it is not possible to execute all of the special winning opening count-up effects by the end of the interval period, so based on the end of the interval period, the special winning opening count-up effect is set to the end timing of the interval period. It is desirable to forcibly suspend it.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27B, even when the game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641 within the interval period after the end of the final round game, When the timing of executing the bonus winning effect is reached within the jackpot ending demo period after the passage, execution of the bonus winning effect is prohibited within the jackpot ending demonstration period. However, during the jackpot end demonstration period, execution of bonus prize production is simply prohibited, and prize balls are paid out based on the bonus prize. Further, in the above case, the execution of the special winning opening count-up effect may be prohibited as in the bonus winning effect.

As a modified example of the present embodiment, the jackpot end demonstration period is set as a bonus prize production permissible period in which execution of bonus prize effects is allowed, and the bonus prize effect is executed during execution of the jackpot completion demo. May be. In that case, it is desirable to set only the first predetermined time of the big hit end demo period as the bonus winning performance allowable period. As an example, of the 20 seconds of the big hit end demo period, only the first 5 seconds is the bonus winning performance allowable period, and the subsequent 15 seconds is the bonus winning performance prohibiting period. Further, as a further modified example, the bonus winning performance allowable period and the bonus winning performance prohibiting period may be set within the interval period after the final round, for example, the first 1.5 seconds of the interval period of 2 seconds. Seconds may be the bonus winning performance allowable period, and 0.5 seconds thereafter may be the bonus winning performance prohibiting period, and the subsequent jackpot end demonstration period may also be the bonus winning performance prohibiting period. Further, as a further modified example, considering that the timing at which the game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641 and the execution timing of the bonus winning effect are synchronized, after the end of the final round game. When a game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641 within the interval period of, the bonus winning effect is configured to be executed (excluding the entering ball at the end timing of the interval period). As described above, when the time from the execution start timing of the bonus prize effect to the end timing of the interval period is longer than the effect time of the bonus prize effect, the bonus prize effect is given to the interval period based on the end of the interval period. While it is configured to forcibly interrupt at the end timing of (, when the bonus winning image and bonus winning sound are provided as bonus winning effects, the bonus winning image is interrupted (hidden or erased from the middle), The winning sound may be output without interruption.) When a game ball is detected in the right general winning opening 64 during the big hit end demonstration period (the game is played with the right general winning opening switch 641). If a ball is detected), the bonus winning effect may be configured not to be executed. In that case, the general winning opening count-up effect is also right general winning within the interval period after the end of the final round game. When the game ball is detected by the mouth switch 641, it is always executed (except for the ball entering at the end timing of the interval period), and at the time of execution, as described above, from the presentation time of the general winning mouth count-up effect Also, if it is longer than the time from the execution start timing of the general winning a prize mouth count up effect to the end timing of the interval period, the general winning a prize mouth count up effect is forced at the end timing of the interval period based on the end of the interval period. It is configured to be interrupted, and is configured not to be executed when a game ball is detected in the right general winning opening 64 (when the game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641) during the jackpot end demonstration period. You may.

  On the other hand, during the jackpot start demonstration period, theoretically, the game balls do not enter the jackpot 54 (no over-winning occurs), so during the jackpot start demonstration period, the jackpot starts. The oral winning effect (over winning effect) is never executed. It is possible to enter the general winning opening 64 even during the jackpot start demonstration period, but even if the general winning opening 64 is entered, the general winning opening prize presentation ( The bonus winning production) is not executed, and if the ball enters during the big hit start demonstration period, it may be entered at any timing (especially even if it is entered at the end of the big hit start demonstration period). General winning a prize winning production corresponding to the ball (bonus winning production) will not be performed in the first round game after the big hit start demonstration is finished, further, the prize balls (the number of prize balls) corresponding to the winning ball, It is not a cumulative target in the cumulative award ball count display.

(Firing handle detection)
The game by the gaming machine PM is executed on the assumption that the player turns the firing handle 12 to fire the game ball toward the game area PA. The firing handle 12 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown) that detects that the player is touching the firing handle 12. The touch sensor is composed of a proximity switch or the like that detects a change in capacitance due to a player touching the firing handle 12. When the touch sensor detects that the player is touching the firing handle 12, the touch sensor outputs a detection signal permitting energization of the firing solenoid to the payout control board 300. In addition, the main control board 100 monitors the touch state of the firing handle based on the detection signal from the touch sensor, and periodically transmits the effect control command (handle state effect command) to the effect control board 200. Thereby, the effect control board 200 specifies whether or not the player is touching the firing handle 12 (whether or not the firing handle 12 is operated).

FIG. 28 is a time chart showing the relationship between the detection state of the touch sensor and the over-winning effect and the general winning effect. Even if the player has not detected that the player has touched the firing handle 12 by the touch sensor (when the firing of the game ball has been stopped), the production control means 220 gives a big prize to the game ball previously fired. When a game ball (the 11th game ball in the illustrated example) exceeding the specified count is detected by entering the mouth 54 (when an over-winning occurs), an over-winning effect is executed. It is like this. Similarly, the production generalizing means 220, even when it is not detected that the player is touching the firing handle 12 (when the firing of the gaming ball is stopped), the gaming ball fired before that is the general winning. When the game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641 by entering the mouth 64 (when the bonus winning occurs), the bonus winning effect is executed. That is, the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect are executed regardless of the detection result of the touch sensor at the timing of the over-winning and the timing of the bonus winning. Therefore, even if the player's firing of the game ball is stopped by closing the special winning opening 54 (the round game is finished), an over-winning prize or a bonus winning occurs within the interval period. At this time, over-winning prize effect or bonus winning prize effect will be generated, and no feeling of dissatisfaction will be given, even though the game ball actually enters the large winning hole 54 or the general winning hole 64, It is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful.

(Game start preparation production)
In the present embodiment, when the game state currently being executed is the normal game state (non-special game state), the standby demonstration effect (customer wait demonstration effect) is triggered by the fact that the interrupted state of the game continues for a predetermined time or longer. Is executed. "The suspended state of the game continues for a predetermined time or more" means that, for example, the period during which the special design operation holding ball does not exist continues for a predetermined time or more, and the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not performed is the predetermined time It means that the above continues, a period in which the game ball does not enter or pass through a specific winning opening continues for a predetermined time or more, a period in which the game ball is not shot continues for a predetermined time or more, and the like. The end condition of this standby demonstration production is when the suspended state of the game is released (when the game is started or restarted), and for example, the player touches the firing handle 12 (operates the firing handle 12). Is detected by the touch sensor, or when there is a ball in the first start opening 51 or the second start opening 52, which is a specific winning opening, which corresponds to the passage of the game ball to the operation gate 53. Or, the entry into the general winning openings 61 to 64 is not applicable (even if the game ball passes through the operation gate 53 or into the general winning openings 61 to 64, the standby demonstration effect does not end). Also, during the standby demonstration effect, the volume becomes zero, that is, the sound is muted, or the volume is lower than that in the non-standby demonstration effect (during game), A volume adjustment screen, which will be described later, can be displayed, and the standby demonstration effect is not finished even if the volume is adjusted. In other words, in a situation where the game is interrupted, it is not necessary to produce more than necessary, so muffling or volume reduction is performed, but even in that state, while maintaining the standby demonstration effect (the game is interrupted It is possible to adjust the volume related to the production after the completion of the standby demonstration effect (while the game is in progress, that is, while the symbols are changing) while visualizing even during the standby demonstration effect.

  FIG. 29 is a time chart showing the relationship between the game state in which the game start preparation effect is executed and the game state in which the over-prize effect and the bonus prize effect are executed. During the execution of the standby demonstration effect, the effect unifying means 220 is triggered by the fact that the touch sensor detects the contact of the player (when the handle state effect command from the main control board 100 is received). The execution of the effect is ended, and the execution of the game start preparation effect (shooting detection effect) is started. In the game start preparation effect, for example, a character "Welcome" is displayed on the screen, or a voice "Welcome" is output from the speaker 11 to give a feeling of starting or resuming the game (a game welcome welcome effect. ). This game start preparation effect is an effect that is performed immediately after the standby demonstration effect is finished, and is executed when the game state is the normal game state (non-special game state), like the standby demonstration effect.

  In this embodiment, in the game state (non-special game state) in which the game start preparation effect can be performed, the over-prize effect or the bonus prize effect is not executed, and the game in which the over-prize effect or the bonus prize effect can be performed. In the state (special game state), the game start preparation effect is not performed. In other words, the game start preparation effect and the over-winning effect or bonus winning effect are not performed in the same gaming state, and, of course, are not repeatedly executed at the same timing.

(Sound notification when power is restored)
In the present embodiment, when a power failure occurs during the execution of the special game, when returning from the power failure, a power recovery notification effect for notifying that the power has been recovered is executed. In this power-off return notification effect, for example, an image indicating that the power is restored (power-return notification image) is displayed, and a sound indicating that the power is restored (power-return notification sound) is output from the speaker 11. Is. In the present embodiment, the execution time of the power recovery effect (output time of the power recovery notification sound) is longer than "29 seconds" which is the maximum time of one round game (long open round game), "30". Seconds "is set. For example, if a power failure occurs in the middle of a predetermined round game and the power is restored from the middle of the predetermined round game (when restarting from the middle of the predetermined round game), at least during the remaining time of the round game. Since the power-off recovery sound is output, it becomes possible for the player to reliably recognize that the round game is restarting. Here, when the power-off recovery sound and the big hit mid-range performance sound compete with each other, the power-off recovery sound is prioritized over the big-hit mid-range performance sound (for example, the power-off recovery sound is output at a louder sound level than the big hit medium performance sound Or to stop the output of the effect sound during the big hit). Also, when the power-off return sound is output, even if over-winning occurs in the round game after resumption, the power-off return sound is prioritized over the over-winning sound (for example, power-off over the over-winning sound. The return sound may be output at a high sound level, or the output of the over-winning sound may be stopped). In addition, the display time of the image indicating that the power is restored (power restoration notification image) is longer than the output time of the sound indicating that the power is restored (power restoration notification sound) so that it can be recognized that the big hit is in progress. It is desirable to make it short. For example, the display time of the image indicating that the power is restored (power restoration notification image) is set to 15 seconds, and the output time of the sound indicating that the power is restored (power restoration notification sound) is 30 seconds. Seconds are preferred. Also, in the situation where the image showing that the power is restored (power restoration notification image) is displayed, the effect of the big hit is not displayed, so the cumulative award ball number display, highlighting, over-winning image and bonus winning image are displayed. It is never displayed. When the power is restored, the effect information related to the accumulated prize ball value that was held before the power was turned off is deleted, so an image showing that the power was restored when the power was restored (power restoration When the display of the notification image) is finished and the effect of the big hit is displayed, the cumulative award ball number display will be restarted from zero (“0”), and the display condition of the highlighting will also be (the specific value is reached. The condition before the power is turned off will be reset, so that the cumulative award ball count display before the power is turned off reaches a specific value after the player has entered a single special winning opening 54 (for example, 10,000 pieces). Even before 999), during the big hit after the power has been cut off and the power has been restored, the accumulated prize balls display is zero, so in this situation, the big winning hole 54 is displayed. Even if there is only one ball, the highlight will not be displayed. Further, when the image (power restoration notification image) indicating that the power is restored when the power is restored is finished and the effect of the big hit is displayed, the image indicating that the power is restored (power restoration notification image) During the display, if there is a ball in the special winning opening 54 or in the general winning opening 64, the prize balls corresponding to the winning are paid out, but an image showing that the power is restored ( Display of over-prize image, display of bonus prize image, cumulative number of prize balls display, count up effect (large prize hole count up effect, general prize hole count up effect), etc. are not performed while the power restoration notification image) is displayed. At that time, even if (1) the display of the image indicating that the power source is restored (power source restoration notification image) is finished and the big hit medium production is restored, the cumulative prize ball number display may be started from zero. Then, (2) when the display of the image indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification image) is finished and the performance during the big hit is restored, the cumulative award number display shows an image indicating that the power is restored (power source). It is also possible to display a cumulative number of prize balls in which numerical values corresponding to the payout of the prize balls corresponding to the entrance into the special winning opening 54 and the entrance into the general winning opening 64 during the display of the return notification image) are added. In addition, before the power is turned off, the count-up effect (large prize hole count-up effect, general prize hole count-up effect) is being executed and the count-up effect is not yet finished, and the prize ball corresponding to the count-up effect is in effect. If the power is cut off when the payout is still in progress and is not completed yet (for example, during the count-up effect and payout for 300 prize balls), the power is restored after the power is restored. The rest of the count-up effect that was executed before the disconnection is not performed, but the prize balls that have not been paid out are paid out.

(Right-handed notification image)
During execution of the special game, as shown in FIG. 17 above, in the right-handed display area 731 of the screen, the player is urged to right-hand (shoot a game ball aiming at the right area PA2) to the right. A hit notification image is displayed. In addition, an over-winning image is displayed in the first prize-ball acquisition display area 732A of the screen when the over-winning occurs. The right-handed display area 731 and the first prize ball acquisition display area 732A are provided as different display areas, and the right-handed notification image and the over-winning image are separately displayed in a positional relationship that does not overlap each other. Further, during the execution of the special game, the bonus prize image is displayed in the second prize ball acquisition display area 732B of the screen in response to the occurrence of the bonus prize. The right hitting display area 731 and the second winning ball acquisition display area 732B are provided as different display areas, and the right hitting notification image and the bonus winning image are separately displayed in a positional relationship that does not overlap each other. Therefore, when an over-winning prize or bonus winning occurs during execution of the special game, the over-winning image or bonus winning image does not overlap with the right-handed notification image, and one information does not hide the other information. There is.

(Volume control screen)
FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram showing the volume adjustment screen of the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, when the left and right keys of the cross key are simultaneously operated by the player during the execution of the special game, the volume adjustment image display area 736 of the screen displays the volume adjustment images indicating a plurality of volume levels side by side. To be done. The volume adjustment image shows the current volume level, and in the illustrated example, the volume level is adjusted to the volume level of the third stage corresponding to the current volume level. Then, by operating the left key or the right key by the player, it is possible to adjust the output level (volume level) of the sound such as BGM or sound effect output from the speaker 11. Specifically, while the volume adjustment image is displayed, operating the right key raises the volume level, and operating the left key lowers the volume level.

  In the present embodiment, regardless of whether the special game is being executed, more specifically, whether the over-winning effect is being executed (the situation where the over-winning sound is output) or the bonus winning effect is being executed (an bonus). Regardless of whether or not the winning sound is output), the volume of the speaker 11 can be adjusted by the player operating the left and right keys. Therefore, the volume adjustment is performed by the player during the execution of the over-winning effect (the situation where the over-winning sound is output) or during the execution of the bonus winning effect (the situation where the bonus winning sound is output). In this case, the adjusted volume level changes in real time as the volume level of the over-winning sound or bonus winning sound currently being output. That is, the volume of the over-winning sound or bonus winning sound is changed midway through the volume adjustment operation performed by the player. It becomes possible. The sound image display area 736 and the first prize ball acquisition display area 732A are provided as different display areas, and the sound adjustment image and the over-winning image are separately displayed in a positional relationship that does not overlap each other. Similarly, the sound image display area 736 and the second prize ball acquisition display area 732B are provided as different display areas, and the sound adjustment image and the bonus winning image are separately displayed in a positional relationship that does not overlap each other. Therefore, when an over-winning prize or bonus winning occurs during execution of a special game, the over-winning image or bonus winning image does not overlap with the volume adjustment image, and one information does not hide the other information. . The highlighting and the volume adjustment screen are displayed in a superimposed manner when they are executed at the same time, but the volume adjustment screen has a higher display priority, and in the case of a superimposed display, the volume adjustment screen is displayed in front of the highlighted display. (Some or all of the highlighting is hidden in the volume control screen).

≪Conditions for occurrence of over-winning errors in general winning openings≫
The “error occurrence condition” is a condition for determining that an error has occurred in the gaming machine. In the present embodiment, when the main control board 100 determines that the predetermined error occurrence condition is satisfied, the main control board 100 transmits a predetermined effect control command (error effect designation command) to the effect control board 200 to effect the effect. The control board 200 produces an error notification effect.

In the following, as one of a plurality of types of error occurrence conditions, an excessive prize winning error occurrence condition of the general winning opening 61 to 64 will be described. In the present embodiment, among the plurality of general winning openings 61 to 64, the excessive winning error occurrence condition of the general winning openings 61 to 63 and the excessive winning error occurrence condition of the general winning opening 64 are set to different conditions.

  The excessive winning error occurrence condition of the general winning openings 61 to 63 is the number of game balls entering the general winning openings 61 to 63 within a unit time (30 seconds) (the number of game balls detected by the left general winning opening switch 611). Is a condition that is satisfied when reaches the first specified number. The first specified number is set to "30", for example. That is, when 30 game balls enter the general winning openings 61 to 63 in 30 seconds, the excessive winning error occurrence condition of the general winning openings 61 to 63 is satisfied.

  The condition for the excessive winning error of the general winning opening 64 is that the number of winning game balls in the general winning opening 64 (the number of gaming balls detected by the right general winning opening switch 641) within the unit time (30 seconds) is the second specified number. It is a condition that is satisfied when is reached. The second specified number is set to, for example, "60". In other words, when 60 game balls enter the general winning opening 64 in 30 seconds, the excessive winning error occurrence condition of the general winning opening 64 is satisfied.

  As a modified example of the present embodiment, the excessive winning error occurrence condition of the general winning openings 61 to 64 may be set according to the type of the game state currently being executed. For example, if the variable display of the first special symbol is the gaming state in which the game is the main subject (normal gaming state), the general winning a prize openings 61 to 63 have a relatively higher entry frequency per unit time than the general award winning openings 64. Since the excessive winning error occurrence condition of the general winning opening 64 is higher than the excessive winning error occurrence condition of the general winning opening 64, the threshold value for the condition satisfaction is set to be higher. In that case, the excess winning error condition is not satisfied even when the game balls enter the general winning openings 61 to 63 under a predetermined condition (predetermined entrance frequency), but the game balls enter the general winning opening 64. When a player wins a prize under a predetermined condition (predetermined winning frequency), an over-winning error occurs. On the other hand, if the gaming state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is the main (probability variation gaming state, time saving gaming state), the general winning a prize opening 64 is more frequent than the general winning a prize openings 61 to 63. Is set to be relatively higher, so that the condition for the excess winning error in the general winning opening 64 to be set higher than the condition for generating the excess winning error in the general winning openings 61 to 63 is set. ing. In that case, even if the gaming ball enters the general winning opening 64 under a specific condition (specific winning frequency), the excessive winning error is not established, but the gaming ball is specified in the general winning openings 61 to 64. If the player enters the ball under the condition (specific entry frequency), an over-winning error will occur.

  Even when the conditions for generating an excessive winning error in the general winning openings 61 to 63 and the conditions for causing an excessive winning error in the general winning openings 64 are set to different conditions, the excessive winning error in the general winning openings 61 to 63 is released. It is preferable to set the condition and the excessive winning error cancellation condition of the right general winning opening 64 to the same condition. The error release condition is, for example, a condition for ending the error notification effect (for example, 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the error notification screen display / error notification sound), and the ON output of the outer edge signal related to the excessive winning a prize error. Conditions to be stopped (conditions for off output, for example, 300 seconds have elapsed from the start of output), power-off once, and power-on thereafter are applicable.

≪Duplicate execution of over-prize production and bonus prize production≫
FIG. 31 is a time chart used for explaining the overlapping execution of the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect. In the present embodiment, when the over-winning and the bonus winning occur at substantially the same timing, the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect can be executed in duplicate. The overlapping execution of the over-prize effect and the bonus winning effect means that the execution period (or execution timing) of the over-winning effect and the execution period (or execution timing) of the bonus winning effect overlap, and the execution period of both effects And the case where both of the execution periods of both effects overlap. The illustrated example shows a case where the execution period of the over-winning effect and the execution period of the bonus winning effect partially overlap. When the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect are overlapped, a first prize ball acquisition display area 732A in which the over-winning image is displayed and a second prize ball acquisition display area 732B in which the bonus winning image is displayed. Are provided as separate and independent display areas, so that the over-winning image and the bonus winning image are not displayed in front and behind. On the other hand, the over-winning sound and the bonus winning sound may be output in an overlapping manner, or only one of them may be output. When only one is output, the first winning may be prioritized (that is, the first winning is the big winning opening 54, and the second winning is the general winning opening 64). In the case, the over-winning sound is prioritized, the first winning is the general winning opening 64, and when the later winning is the big winning opening 54, the bonus winning sound is prioritized), The winning may be prioritized (that is, when the previous winning is the winning in the large winning opening 54 and the subsequent winning is the winning in the general winning opening 64, the bonus winning sound is prioritized and the first winning is won. Is a prize in the general winning opening 64 and the subsequent winning is a winning in the large winning opening 54, the over winning sound is prioritized). When prioritizing the first prize, for example, when there is a second prize while outputting the first prize winning sound, after outputting the first prize winning sound, the second prize winning sound is output. The output may be started, or the winning sound relating to the subsequent winning may not be output at all. When priority is given to the later winning, for example, if there is a later winning while outputting the winning sound related to the first winning, the winning sound related to the first winning is interrupted by the second winning, and then It is also possible to start outputting the winning sound related to the winning.

  As a modified example of the present embodiment, when the over-winning and the bonus winning occur at substantially the same timing, the over-winning image and the bonus winning image may not be displayed in an overlapping manner. That is, when the over-winning prize and the bonus winning occur at substantially the same timing, even if the display period (or the display timing) of the over-winning image and the display period (or the display timing) of the bonus winning image do not overlap with each other. Good. In that case, there are cases in which the entire display periods of both images do not overlap, and cases in which the display periods of both images do not partially overlap.

  In addition, when the over-winning image and the bonus winning image are not displayed in an overlapping manner, one of the bonus winning image and the over-winning image that wins first in time (the one in which the ball of the game ball is detected first) The winning image may be preferentially displayed. In addition, as a configuration opposite to that, in the case where the over-winning image and the bonus winning image are not displayed in an overlapping manner, one of the bonus winning image and the over-winning image that wins later in time (the winning of the game ball later It may be configured to preferentially display the winning image of the detected one).

(Multiple over-winning prizes)
FIG. 32 is a time chart in the case where an over-winning prize and a bonus winning prize are respectively generated a plurality of times within a predetermined period. In the present embodiment, when a plurality of over-winnings occur within a predetermined period (interval period in the illustrated example), an over-winning effect is given to the first over-winning (11th game ball winning). However, it is configured such that the over-winning effect is not performed for the over-winning for the second time and thereafter (winning of the 12th game ball and after). That is, when a plurality of over-winning prizes occur within a predetermined period, only execution of the first over-winning winning effect is permitted, and execution of the second over-winning winning effect is restricted (regulated). ). However, the prize balls are paid out twice due to the over-winning, and the special winning hole count-up effect due to the over-winning is also performed twice (this is carried out twice without interrupting the first special winning hole count-up effect). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of bonus prizes are generated within a predetermined period (in the illustrated example, the interval period), a bonus prize presentation is performed for each of the bonus prizes, and the prize due to the bonus prizes is given. The ball payout is also performed twice, and the general prize-winning count-up effect by bonus is also performed twice (the second general prize-winning count-up effect is performed twice without interruption). That is, when multiple bonus prizes are generated within a predetermined period, execution of all bonus prize effects is permitted multiple times. As a modified example, when multiple over-winnings occur within a predetermined period, the over-winning effect is performed for the first over-winning (winning of the 11th game ball), and the second and subsequent winnings. While the over-winning effect (winning of the 12th or more gaming balls) is configured so that the over-winning effect is performed, when the second over-winning is performed during the execution of the first over-winning effect, ( 1) The execution of the second over-winning effect is started after the first over-winning effect is completed (after completion), or (2) Even if the first over-winning effect is in the middle. The second over winning may be interrupted, and then the second over winning effect may be executed. In that case, regardless of (1) or (2), the prize balls are paid out for the over-winning twice, and the large-prize-win count-up effect due to the over-winning is also performed twice (the first big-winning prize count It is preferable that the up production is performed twice without interruption. Furthermore, when multiple bonus prizes are generated within a predetermined period, bonus prize effects are given for the first bonus prize, and bonus prize effects are also given for the second and subsequent bonus prizes. On the other hand, if there is a second or more bonus prize during the execution of the first bonus prize effect, (3) the second time after the first bonus prize effect is completed (after completion). Start the execution of the bonus prize effect, or (4) Even if the first bonus prize effect is in the middle, it is interrupted by the second bonus prize, and then the second bonus prize effect is started. It may be configured as follows. In that case, in any of (3) and (4), the prize balls are paid out twice for the bonus prize, and the general winning hole count-up effect for the bonus prize is also performed twice (the first general prize hole count). It is preferable that the up production is performed twice without interruption.

≪External information signal≫
In the present embodiment, the external information signal (outer end signal) that the external information terminal board 600 outputs to the external device outside the machine as external information includes, for example, a prize ball signal, a big hit signal, a signal during a condominium, and a symbol confirmation signal. , Door frame open signal, security signal, disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality signal, abnormality sensor detection signal (abnormal passage time abnormality, etc.) signal, etc. are included.

  Here, the external device installed outside the gaming machine PM includes a data display, a hall computer, and the like. The data display is a device which is installed on the upper portion of the gaming machine PM and displays data (game information) regarding the operating state of the gaming machine PM based on an external information signal output from the gaming machine PM. The game information displayed on the data display is useful for the player to select a game machine. The hall computer collects the operating state of each gaming machine (this gaming machine PM is one of them) based on an external information signal output from each gaming machine installed in the hall in the game store, and then each gaming machine It is a device that manages the operating status of machines. The hall computer may be electrically connected to the gaming machine PM via a data display, or may be electrically connected to the gaming machine PM without a data display.

(Prize ball signal)
The prize ball signal is an external information signal output for a predetermined time each time a predetermined number (“10” in the present embodiment) of game balls are paid out from the game machine. That is, in the present embodiment, the prize ball signal is continuously output for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms) every time 10 prize balls are paid out. In the present embodiment, a prize ball number counter for counting the number of game balls paid out from the prize ball payout unit 34 is provided, and one payout ball is provided by a payout detection switch provided in the prize ball payout unit 34. Each time it is detected, "1" is added to the prize ball number counter. When the value of the prize ball number counter reaches the predetermined number “10”, the prize ball signal is output from the external information terminal board 600. When the value of the prize ball number counter reaches the predetermined number "10", the count value returns to the initial value "0" (that is, the initial value "0" is counted).

FIG. 33 is a time chart of a prize ball signal when a game ball enters the general winning opening 64. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls (the number of unit prize balls) provided based on one game ball entering the general winning opening 64 is “3”. Therefore, when the game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641, three game balls are paid out from the prize ball payout unit 34 and "3" is added to the value of the prize ball number counter. It At this time, as shown in (A) in the figure, when the value of the prize ball number counter before addition is in the range of “0” to “6” (corresponding to “0” in the illustrated example), The value of the prize ball number counter after addition does not reach a predetermined number, and the prize ball signal is not output. On the other hand, as shown in (B) in the figure, when the value of the prize ball number counter before addition is in the range of "7" to "9" (corresponding to "7" in the illustrated example), after addition When the value of the prize ball number counter reaches the predetermined number once, the prize ball signal is output once. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the award ball signal is output once even when the game ball enters the general winning opening 64 as a trigger (when the general winning award normal winning effect is executed once). There are cases where the prize ball signal is not output and cases where the prize ball signal is output once. In addition, in the above description, the general winning opening 64 has been described as an example of the plurality of general winning openings 61 to 64, but the same applies to the general winning openings 61 to 63.

  FIG. 34 is a time chart of a prize ball signal when a game ball enters the special winning opening 54. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls (number of unit prize balls) given based on one game ball entering the special winning opening 54 is “15”. Therefore, when the game ball is detected by the special winning opening switch 541, 15 game balls are paid out from the prize ball payout unit 34, and "15" is added to the value of the prize ball number counter. .. At this time, when the value of the prize ball number counter before addition is in the range of “0” to “4” (corresponding to “0” in the illustrated example), the value of the prize ball number counter after addition is predetermined. When the number is reached once, the prize ball signal is output once. On the other hand, when the value of the prize ball number counter before addition is in the range of “5” to “9” (corresponding to “5” in the illustrated example), the value of the prize ball number counter after addition is the predetermined number. By arriving at 2 times, the prize ball signal is output twice. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the award is triggered by the entry of one game ball into the special winning opening 54 (when the large winning opening normal winning effect or the large winning opening over winning effect is executed once). There are cases where the ball signal is output once and cases where the prize ball signal is output twice.

<Relationship with other big hit midfielders>
Next, a description will be given of the relationship between the winning-related effects (large winning a prize winning effect, general winning award winning effect) and other big hit medium effects. In the following, (C) holding continuous suggestion effect, (D) promotion effect, and (E) special effect are illustrated as other big hit effects.

<< C. On-hold rendition suggestion ≫
The hold consecutive suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the in-hold-end consecutive resort is established during the execution of the special game (there is a big hit hold). As described above, the "holding-end consortium" is a special related to the operation-holding ball when the result of the determination of the success or failure of the special symbol made by digesting a certain preceding operation-holding ball is a big hit. It is planned to be a big hit in one or more subsequent operation holding balls that exist at a predetermined timing between the end of the special game executed when the hit determination of the symbol is permitted and the big hit. It means that the operation holding ball (also called "big hit holding") is included. In the present embodiment, the game state at the time of a big hit that is a trigger for executing the special game that is currently being executed is the specific game state (high base state), and the game state after the end of the special game is also the specific game. When the state (high base state) is reached, that is, when the condominium is being continued, if there is a big hit hold in the hold, the hold consecutive suggestion effect is executed in the special game that is currently being executed. To put it the other way around, if the game state at the time of the big hit that triggers the execution of the special game that is currently being executed is the normal game state (low base state), even if the big hit hold is present in the hold, the current The pending rendition suggestion production is not executed in the special game being executed. In addition, it is preferable that the special game that is currently being executed is based on the result of hit determination relating to the second special symbol, and it is also preferable that the big hit hold in the hold is also the hold relating to the second special symbol. .

  In the present embodiment, the execution timing of the pending consecutive suggestion effect is set to the jackpot end demonstration period, as shown in FIGS. 12 and 14. Whether or not to execute the pending continuous suggestion effect is performed at the time of starting the special game execution, and is determined by a lottery when the pending continuous suggestion effect execution condition is satisfied at the start of the special game execution. As a modified example, if the winning continuous suggestion production is executed when the winning lottery suggestion execution condition is satisfied immediately before or at the start of the jackpot end demonstration, the pending consecutive suggestion production is executed. Good.

  On the assumption that the type of big hit that triggered the execution of the special game that is currently being executed is high profit big hit (16R special big hit), one or a plurality of special symbol operation hold balls This is a condition that is satisfied when the big hit hold that is a high profit big hit (16R specific big hit) is included. In other words, even if there is a big hit hold in the special design operation hold ball, if the big hit classification related to the big hit hold is not high profit big hit (4R specific big hit or 4R normal big hit), hold Continuous suggestion production is not executed. Furthermore, in the situation where there are multiple jackpots held in the special design operation holding ball, when the jackpot type related to the previous jackpot holding is a low-profit jackpot, and the jackpot type related to the jackpot holding is a high-profit jackpot. In, the pending continuous suggestion effect is not executed in the special game that is currently being executed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the pending consecutive suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the special game, the high profit big hit (16R big hit) is displayed on the variable display within the predetermined number of times (4 rotations) after the end of the special game. Not only is it certain that it will occur, but it is also certain that the special game next to the special game in which the pending consecutive suggestion effect has been executed is not a low profit big hit (4R specific big hit or 4R normal big hit). In addition, in this embodiment, the "special map 2 priority digestion method" which preferentially digests the operation reserved ball of the 2nd special symbol rather than the operation reserved ball of the 1st special symbol is adopted. The target operation holding ball is limited to the operation holding ball of the second special symbol.

  The pending continuous suggestion effect is an effect that is executed during the jackpot end demonstration period and displays a special image that does not appear in any other scene. Examples of the special image include an effect image composed of a still image, an effect image composed of a moving image, and an effect image composed of both a still image and a moving image.

  In the present embodiment, the pending consecutive suggestion effect can be executed only when the special game currently being executed is a high profit special game (16R special game). That is, the pending rendition suggestion production can be executed only in the super-jutsu big hit production as a big hit medium production pattern. On the other hand, the over-winning prize effect and the bonus winning effect can be executed regardless of whether the special game currently being executed is a high profit special game (16R special game) or a low profit special game (4R special game). That is, the over-winning prize effect and the bonus winning effect can be executed in any of the super-hit big hit effect, the longevity big hit A effect, the longevity big hit B effect, the big hit jackpot A effect, and the big hit jackpot effect.

In the present embodiment, the over-winning prize effect or the bonus winning prize effect is not executed during the execution of the pending consecutive suggestion effect. That is, the execution period (execution timing) of the pending continuous suggestion effect does not overlap with the execution period (execution timing) of the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect. In other words, the pending consecutive suggestion effect is executed during the jackpot end demo period, whereas the over-prize effect and bonus prize effect are not executed during the jackpot end demo period, but are executed during the interval period. Because. Therefore, during the execution of the special game, there is no overlapping execution of the pending rendition suggestion effect and the over-winning prize effect, and there is no overlapping execution of the pending rendition suggestion effect and the bonus winning effect. The effect and the over-winning effect or bonus winning effect are executed independently. As a modified example, it may be configured to execute the pending rendition suggestion effect during the round game, in which case, the pending rendition suggestion effect and the over-winning prize effect may be executed in an overlapping manner. The bonus winning effect may be duplicated, and when configured in such a manner, the pending consecutive suggestion effect has a higher display priority (displaying the over-winning image or the bonus winning image on the back surface, or In addition, if a special sound effect is generated during the pending continuous suggestion effect, this special sound effect is output with priority (reduce the volume of the over winning sound and bonus winning sound, or Output).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the execution time of the pending consecutive suggestion effect is set to be a long time, compared with the execution time of the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect. Since the On-hold Uchirenso is a reward that is more profitable for the player than the over-winning or bonus prize, the execution time of the On-hold Urenso production is set to be relatively long, and the player may miss it. I try not to.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the on-hold holiday resort is executed only as a “true production” that definitely notifies the establishment of the on-hold holiday resort, but as a modification thereof, the on-hold holiday resort is actually You may include the "gase production" which is not established. In this example, as one of the execution conditions of the in-hold-long holiday resort effect, it is a condition that the preceding operation-holding ball is a big profit big hit (16R big hit) big hit hold, but is not limited to this. Alternatively, the preceding operation holding ball may be a big hit holding other than the high-interest big hit (16R big hit), that is, a big hit holding corresponding to a low profit big hit (4R big hit).

  Further, it may be suggested by changing the display mode of the cumulative award ball number display from the normal display mode (for example, white display) to the special display mode (gold display) that the hold-in-resort resort is established. Further, the pending consecutive suggestion effect may be performed at the execution timing of the emphasis effect (highlighted display) performed when the value of the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value. In that case, it is preferable to suggest that the in-holding holiday resort is established by the display mode of the highlight effect.

<< D. Promotion production≫
Promotional performance, when a big hit occurs in the variable display of the special symbol, suggests or informs the profit mode related to the big game (for convenience, it is referred to as "provisional profit mode") before or at the start of the special game. After that, during the execution of the special game, it is an effect that suggests whether or not the actual profit form related to the jackpot is higher than the provisional profit form. In other words, whether or not the profit mode of the big hit suggested before or at the start of the special game is true (profit form as it is) or false (high profit form), the big hit is performed through the series of processes. Is an effect that shows whether or not the profit mode of is promoted (changed).

  The types of promotion effects are roughly classified into round promotion effects and probability variation promotion effects. Round promotion production is performed after the provisional number of rounds when the number of provisional rounds of the special game (provisional provisional number of rounds) suggested or notified when a big hit occurs is uncertain whether it is a true number of rounds or a false number of rounds. Is a production that suggests the possibility that round games will continue. In this round promotion production, there are one that simply indicates that the round has been promoted and one that indicates not only the round promotion but also the true prescribed number of rounds or the number of long open rounds. Probably strange promotion production is a state in which it is uncertain whether the big hit type (temporary big hit type) suggested or notified when the big hit occurs is a true big hit type or a false big hit type (whether it is a specific big hit or not) ), The effect suggests the possibility of shifting to the probability variation game state after the end of the special game. In the present embodiment, it is definite that the promotion is successful when the promotion effect (round promotion effect, probability variation promotion effect) occurs during execution of the special game.

Probability change promotion production, as shown in FIG. 11 and FIG. 16, when the first special symbol “4R specific jackpot” is won in the normal game state, or in the time saving game state or the probability variation game state, the second special symbol “ When the "4R specific big hit" is won, it is executed when "Ki big hit B effect" is selected as the effect pattern during the big hit. The execution timing of this probability variation promotion effect is set during the big hit end demo period. In the probability variation promotion effect, the movable accessory 24 is dropped and moved so as to overlap with the screen, and then the movable accessory 24 is moved upward again to display the title "Successful Bonus" on the exposed screen. By doing so, the content of the presentation is as if it were promoted from "Ki big hit production" to "Shouju big hit production" (the big hit type was promoted from 4R normal big hit to 4R specific big hit).

  As shown in FIG. 11 and FIG. 14, the round promotion effect is, when the “16 specified big hit” of the second special symbol is won in the time saving game state or the probability variation game state, as the big hit medium performance pattern, “jutsu big hit B production” Is executed when "" is selected. The execution timing of the round promotion effect is set from the fourth round to the interval period of the fourth round. This round promotion production displays the character "final round" (fake display object) on the screen once and makes it seem that the round game currently being executed is the final round game, then this model By displaying a cut-in image of the message "I don't think so!" Issued by the main character of, and then displaying the title "Super-jutsu jackpot", "Super-jutsu jackpot production" to "Super-jutsu jackpot production" It is the content of the effect that appears as if the player was promoted to a special jackpot (the jackpot type was promoted from the 4R jackpot to the 16R jackpot).

  In the present embodiment, the round promotion effect can be executed only when the special game currently being executed is the “16R special game (high profit special game)”, but the over-prize effect and the bonus prize effect are currently being executed. The special game of "16R special game (high profit special game)" or "4R special game (low profit special game)" can be executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the over-winning prize effect or the bonus winning prize effect is not executed during the execution of the probability variation promotion effect. That is, the execution period (execution timing) of the probability variation promotion effect and the execution period (execution timing) of the over-winning effect or bonus winning effect do not overlap. That is, the probability variation promotion effect is executed during the jackpot end demo period, whereas the over-prize effect and bonus prize effect are not executed during the jackpot end demo period, but are executed during the interval period. Is. Therefore, during the execution of the special game, the probability variation promotion effect and the over-prize effect will not be executed in duplicate, and the probability variation promotion effect and the bonus prize effect will not be executed in duplicate, and the probability variation promotion effect will be over. The winning effect or the bonus winning effect is independently executed. As a modified example, the probability variation promotion effect may be configured to be executed during the round game. In that case, the probability variation promotion effect and the over-prize effect may be executed in duplicate, and the probability variation promotion effect and the bonus prize effect. And may be executed in duplicate, and in such a configuration, the probability variation promotion effect has a higher display priority (display of the over-winning image or bonus winning image is displayed on the back or hidden) If a special sound effect is generated during the probabilistic change promotion, the special sound effect is prioritized to be output (the volume of the over-winning sound or bonus winning sound is reduced or not output). You may.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the over-prize effect and the bonus prize effect can be executed in duplicate while the round promotion effect is being executed. That is, since the round promotion effect is executed from the fourth round to the interval period of the fourth round, when an over-winning prize or bonus prize occurs within the interval period, the round promotion effect executing period ( The execution timing) and the execution period (execution timing) of the over-winning prize effect or the bonus winning effect can overlap. In addition, the round promotion effect has a higher display priority (the display of the over-winning image or bonus winning image is displayed on the back side or is hidden), and a special sound effect is generated during the round promoting effect. In this case, the dedicated sound effect may be preferentially output (the volume of the over-winning sound or bonus winning sound is reduced or not output).

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution time of the round promotion effect is set to "31 seconds" from the start of the fourth round to the end of the interval period, and the execution time of the probability variation promotion effect is set to the start of the big hit end demo. It is set to "20 seconds" from the time to the end. On the other hand, the execution time of the over-winning prize effect and the bonus winning effect is set to “0.5 seconds”. Therefore, the execution time of the round promotion effect is set longer than the execution time of the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect. The execution time of the probability variation promotion effect is set to be longer than the execution time of the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect.

<< E. Special production ≫
The special effect is an effect with high rarity that is executed when a predetermined condominium condition is satisfied. The "predetermined extended-resort condition" means that the number of extended-resort large hits reaches a specified number (20 times in the present embodiment), and at least the specified number of times (the 20th time in the present embodiment) is the maximum type. It is a condition that is satisfied when the profit is a big hit (16R specific big hit). This special effect appears during execution of the special game (16R special game) which is performed when the specified number of times (the 20th time) of the big hit occurs. However, this special effect ends at the final round (16th round) of the round game, and does not include the end demo period thereafter (however, even if it includes the final interval period, the final interval period It may not be included). Further, this special effect is composed of effect contents (special movie) for sequentially displaying the rare characters of this model, which are highly rare, one by one.

  In addition, as a predetermined consecutive holiday condition, in addition to the prescribed number of consecutive holidays, for example, the cumulative number of 16R specific jackpots in the extended holiday state reaches a predetermined number of times (the 16R specific jackpot of the second special symbol is the prescribed number of times). It may be added to the conditions such as being continuous), that the total number of acquisition rounds in the condominium state or the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number. Here, as described above, the term "long-term resort (long-term resort state)" refers to the gaming state during the non-special gaming state, after the occurrence of the first hit that triggers the transition from the non-specific gaming state to the specific gaming state, It refers to a state in which the specific game state continues without returning to the non-specific game state (a state in which a big hit occurs continuously in the specific game state after starting at the time of first hit). "Specific game state" is a game state in which the transition probability to the special game is higher than the normal game state, in a broad sense, probability fluctuation function of special symbols, fluctuation time shortening function of special symbols and electric cho support It is a gaming state in which any one of the functions is operating. In the present embodiment, the specific game state means a game state in which at least the electric Chu support function is operating, that is, a game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is the main subject of the game.

  In the present embodiment, the special effect can be executed only when the special game currently being executed is a high profit special game (16R special game). On the other hand, the over-winning prize effect and the bonus winning effect can be executed regardless of whether the special game currently being executed is a high profit special game (16R special game) or a low profit special game (4R special game).

  In the present embodiment, during the execution of the special effect, the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect is not executed even if the over-winning prize or the bonus winning effect occurs. That is, the execution period (execution timing) of the special effect does not overlap with the execution period (execution timing) of the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect. The reason is that when the special effect and the over-prize effect or the bonus prize effect compete with each other, it is preferable to prioritize the execution of the rare special effect (display of the premier character that can be seen only in the special effect). This is because the result will be satisfactory to the player.

As a modified example of the present embodiment, when an over-winning prize or bonus winning prize is generated during the execution of the special effect, the over-winning prize effect or the bonus winning prize effect may be configured to be repeatedly executed. When the special effect and the over-prize effect or bonus prize effect are overlapped, the display priority of the special effect (layer priority) is higher than the display priority (layer priority) of the over-prize effect or bonus prize effect. It is preferable that the priority) is set higher. However,
The special effect is an effect that is displayed large on the entire screen, while the over-prize effect and bonus prize effect are effects that are displayed smaller toward the edge of the screen, so the priority of the display of the special effect (layer May be set higher than the display priority of the over-winning effect or bonus winning effect (layer priority).

  In the present embodiment, the special effect execution time is set to "499 seconds" from the start of the big hit start demonstration to the end of the final round (16th round) of the round game. On the other hand, the execution time of the over-winning prize effect and the bonus winning effect is set to “0.5 seconds”. Therefore, the execution time of the special effect is set to be longer than the execution time of the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect.

  If a power failure occurs during the execution of a special game (for example, if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off due to a power failure, etc.), if an over-winning prize or bonus prize has occurred after the power-off is restored. After the power is turned off, the over-winning prize effect or the bonus winning effect is executed. This can be executed because the execution determination of the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect are triggered by the over-winning and the bonus winning, that is, by the event after the power is restored. On the other hand, the effect control command for power-off recovery transmitted from the main control board 100 after the power-off recovery does not include data for recovery of the pending continuous suggestion effect, promotion effect, and special effect, and Since the power supply is not backed up in the RAM 203 of the effect control board 200, if the power is cut off during the execution of the special game, even if the execution condition of each effect is satisfied or the execution trigger comes at the time of the power off, the special With regard to the pending consecutive suggestion effect, promotion effect, and special effect that determine whether or not execution is possible at the start of the game, after the power is turned off, there is no data regarding whether or not these effects can be executed. Is not executed in.

<Processing on the main control board side>
Next, the procedure of operation processing in the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing on the main control board 100 side includes a main control side main processing and a main control side timer interrupt processing.

<Main processing on the main control side>
35 to 36 are flowcharts showing main processing on the main control side of the main control board 100. In the main processing on the main control side, after the security check of the main CPU 101 is performed by the reset when the power is turned on, the program starts and the processing of S1 and thereafter is started.

  First, as an initial setting required when the power is turned on, a start address is set in the stack pointer as an initial value of the stack area (S1), and access to the RAM 103 is permitted (S2). Then, a vector table storing the start address of the program to be processed when the timer interrupt occurs is set (S3), and the initial value is set in the internal register of the main CPU 101 (S4).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch is turned on (S5). When the RAM clear switch is turned on (S5: YES), the entire area of the RAM 103 is cleared to zero in S9, which will be described later. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is not turned on (S5: NO), the value of the power-off information flag is read to determine whether or not the information on normal power-off is stored (S6).

Here, when the information indicating that the power is cut off normally is stored (S6: YES), a checksum is calculated for a predetermined area of the RAM 103 (S7). Then, it is determined whether or not this checksum is 0, that is, whether or not the checksum is normal (S8). Note that the power-on checksum calculated here includes the complement of the checksum calculated in the power-off processing described below, so if the backup was successful, the power-on checksum will be checked. Sam becomes "0". In this way, it is determined when the power is turned on whether the information stored in the RAM 103 before the power is turned off is correctly backed up. At this time, if the checksum is normal (S8: YES), the process proceeds to S12, which will be described later, in order to return to the state before the power was cut off. On the other hand, if the checksum is abnormal (S8: NO), the entire area of the RAM 103 is cleared to zero (S9). Next, initialization data at power-on is set in the RAM 103 (S10). Next, in order to initialize the effect display device 70 and the effect lamp LP, a request for an effect control command (“effect initial command”) to the effect control board 200 is made (S11).

  Next, in the power-off recovery setting process, setting of power-on normal information, initial setting of various errors, and communication initial setting with the payout control board 400 are sequentially performed in the RAM 103 (S12). Here, as the setting of the power-on normal information, in order to save that the power-on was correctly performed, the power-on normal data is stored in the power-off information flag, and the power-off occurrence information is initialized. Turn off the power-off confirmation flag. Next, the data transfer source address, the data transfer destination address, and the transfer byte number are set, and the data for the transfer byte number is transferred (S13). Then, the value of the special symbol game status at the time of power-off is read, and the power-off recovery process related to the special symbol game is performed (S14).

  Then, the main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 are requested to transmit an effect control command (“power off recovery command”) at the time of power off recovery (S15). This power-off recovery command includes information regarding the inspection of the communication line, the operating state of the special symbol, the number of times of probability variation, the number of times of shortening, the number of times of easy entry, variation pattern selection state, and error state. It should be noted that command requests that have not been transmitted before the power is turned off are cleared. Next, in the symbol memory number command request processing, the information of the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the power is turned off is read, and a performance control command including the information of the number of operation holding balls is requested ( S16).

  Then, the return setting for returning the normal electric accessory 522 to the state before the power is turned off (for example, the second starting port 52 is opened) is performed (S17). Further, the reset setting for returning the special electric accessory 542 to the state before the power is turned off (for example, the special winning opening 54 is opened) is performed (S18). Then, the value of the probability variation flag is read, and the operating state of the probability varying function of the special symbol when the power is turned off is set (S19). The probability variation flag is a flag for setting the operating probability (high probability or low probability) of the special symbol game (a flag indicating that the probability varying function of the special symbol is operating). Next, in order to activate the timer interrupt, a predetermined count value is set as the initial setting of the CTC circuit of the main control microcomputer 110, and the timer interrupt is generated every 4 ms (S20). Subsequently, interrupt inhibition is set to inhibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (S21). Then, clear word 1 (“55H”) is set in preparation for restarting the watchdog timer (S22).

  Next, in order to determine the occurrence of power failure, the value of the power failure confirmation flag is read and it is determined whether power failure has occurred (S23). If the power is not cut off, the initial value random number updating process is executed (S24). In this initial value random number updating process, in this initial value random number updating process, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each counter is incremented by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value "0".

Next, the interrupt permission is set to permit the generation of the timer interrupt process (S25), the process returns to the process of inhibiting the interrupt (S21), and the loop processes of S21 to S25 are repeatedly executed. Here, the timer interrupt process is executed periodically at a predetermined cycle, but the remaining time from the completion of the previous interrupt process to the occurrence of the next interrupt process is used to execute S21 to S25. Repeat the process up to. Then, if there is an interrupt request in the interrupt disabled state, the timer interrupt process is activated when the interrupt is permitted in S25. On the other hand, if the power-off confirmation flag is turned on in S23, that is, if the power-off occurs, the process proceeds to S26 and the power-off time process described below is executed.

  Next, as the power-off process (S26 to S32), first, clear word 2 (“AAH”) is set to restart the watchdog timer (S26). Next, it is determined whether the content of the power-off information flag is power-on normal data (S27). If it is power-on normal information (S27: Yes), power-off normal data is set in the power-off information flag (S28). On the other hand, if it is not the power-on normal information (S27: No), power-off abnormal data is set in the power-off information flag (S29), and the process proceeds to S32.

  Next, a checksum is calculated for a predetermined area (excluding the checksum area) of the RAM 103 (S30). Then, the complement to the checksum data is calculated, and the result value of this complement is set in the checksum area of the RAM 103 (S31). Then, the access prohibition setting of the RAM 103 is set (S32), and the process is looped until the power is turned off.

<Main control timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control side timer interrupt process of the main control board 100 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100. This timer interrupt processing is started by a clock pulse from the CTC circuit of the game control microcomputer 110 at fixed time intervals (for example, 4 ms), and is executed by interrupting the above main control side main processing.

  First, when this timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the register in the main CPU 101 are saved in the stack area of the RAM 103, and then the interrupt operation condition is set (S51).

  Next, clear word 2 (“AAH”) is set to restart the watchdog timer (S52). At this time, the clear word 1 and the clear word 2 are sequentially written into the WDT clear register of the CPU 101 within a preset time-out time, whereby the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted. That is, when the main CPU 101 is executing the program normally, the clear words 1 and 2 are set periodically, so that the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted before it times out. On the other hand, when the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

  Next, input processing is executed (S53). In this input process, information of switches other than the RAM clear switch is read as various switches connected to the main control board 100. That is, the first starting opening switch 511, the second starting opening switch 521, the operation gate switch 531, the special winning opening switch 541, the general winning opening switch 611, 641, the door opening switch, the frame opening switch, the back set opening switch, the magnetic sensor. , The radio wave sensor, etc. are read, the state of them is judged, and then the detected information is stored.

Next, various random number update processing is executed (S54). In this various random number update processing, the normal symbol variation pattern random number, the special symbol variation pattern random number, and the special symbol variation addition pattern random number are updated. For the normal symbol variation pattern random number, the numerical value of the random number counter is incremented by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value "0". On the other hand, for the special symbol variation pattern random number and the special symbol variation addition pattern random number, a predetermined value (eg 3511) is subtracted from the previous random number. If the subtraction result is less than 0, the subtraction result has a predetermined value (for example, 5
0000) is added.

  Next, an initial value updating type random number updating process is executed (S55). In this initial value update type random number updating process, the random number per normal symbol, the soft random number per special symbol and the symbol random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is incremented by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value "0". Further, when the value of the counter makes one round, the value of the corresponding initial value random number is set as the initial value.

  Next, the initial value random number updating process is executed (S56). In this initial value random number updating process, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is incremented by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value "0".

  Next, a timer subtraction process is executed (S57). In this timer subtraction processing, the values of various timers used for controlling the game operation of the pachinko gaming machine PM are subtracted and updated. For example, the value of each timer is subtracted for each interrupt cycle (4 ms in this example). The various timers include a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variation time, fixed display time) relating to variable display and stop display by the special symbol display devices 71 and 72, and the like. In the special symbol game timer, the specified variation time is set at the start of the variation display of the special symbol, and is subtracted as the time elapses. In the first special symbol and the second special symbol, during the variable display of one special symbol, if the small hit game of the other special symbol is executed, while the small hit game is being executed, one The variable display of the special symbol is stopped.

  Next, the second starting opening valid period setting process is executed (S58). In the second starting opening valid period setting process, the winning valid period and the winning invalid period of the second starting port 51 are determined, and the valid period data or the invalid period data of the second starting port 51 is set as the determination result.

  Next, a prize monitoring process is executed (S59). In this winning prize monitoring processing, the detection information of the first starting opening switch 511, the second starting opening switch 521, the operation gate switch 531, the special winning opening switch 541, the general winning opening switch 611, 641 in the input processing (S53) is used. Based on the switch pass inspection of the game ball based on the result, as a result, when it is determined that the game ball has passed each switch, information indicating that the game ball has passed each switch, winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180 In addition to the temporary storage, the transmission request of the effect control command including the information indicating that the game ball has passed each switch, and the like are performed. The details of the winning monitoring process (S59) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, prize ball control processing is executed (S60). In this prize ball control processing, a payout control command is transmitted to the payout control board 400 in order to instruct the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of prize, based on the detection result of the prize monitoring processing, and at the same time, the payout control board 400. The communication data with the payout control board 400 is inspected by monitoring the received data from.

  Next, the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process is executed (S61). In this normal symbol operation gate monitoring process, the passage of the game ball to the operation gate 53 is monitored, and when it is determined that the game gate 53 is passed, the random number related to the normal symbol lottery is acquired as the operation reserve ball information. , The number of operation-reserving balls is updated up to a maximum of four, and the random number related to the ordinary symbol lottery is stored.

Next, the normal symbol control process is executed (S62). In this normal symbol control process, in order to perform a series of processes related to the normal symbol display device 75 or the normal electric accessory 522, depending on the value of the normal symbol game status, the normal symbol changing process, the normal symbol stop symbol displaying process , Normal electric auditors product operating process, normal electric auditors product operation end demonstration process, etc. are executed. In the normal symbol changing process, the display pattern number data of the normal symbol is created (updated) in order to display the normal symbol in a variable display or a fixed display.

  Next, normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring processing is executed (S63). In this normal symbol variation start monitoring process, the operating state of the ordinary symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the variation start condition of the ordinary symbol is satisfied, the ordinary symbol operation holding ball number is extinguished, and the ordinary symbol Success / failure determination, symbol determination, variation pattern determination, variation time setting, and the like are performed in order.

  Next, the starting port monitoring control process is executed (S64). In this starting opening monitoring control processing, the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 51 and the second starting opening 52 is monitored, and when there is a winning of the gaming ball, the number of reserved balls is updated and the special symbol lottery is selected. Random number storage, pre-reading notice effect determination, command request for the number of symbols stored, etc. are performed in order.

  Next, a special symbol control process is executed (S65). In this special symbol control process, as a series of processes related to the special symbol display devices 71, 72, depending on the value of the special symbol game status, a special symbol variation start process (S420) and a special symbol variation process (S430) described later in detail. ), Special symbol stop symbol displaying process (S440), etc. are executed.

  Next, the special electric auditors product control process is executed (S66). In this process, when the special symbol lottery result is "big hit" or "small hit", as the operation process related to the special electric auditors product 542, the setting of the operation start and the operation end of the special electric auditors product 542, the large hit The opening time and the number of times of opening the winning opening 54 are updated, the operation start setting of the probability variation function, the operation start setting of the variation time shortening function, the variation pattern selection state, etc. are sequentially executed.

  Next, the special winning opening valid period setting process is executed (S67). In the special winning opening valid period setting process, the winning valid period and the winning invalid period of the special winning port 54 are determined, and the valid period data or the invalid period data of the special winning port 54 is set as the determination result.

  Next, a special symbol variation start monitoring control process is executed (S68). In this special symbol variation start monitoring control processing, if there is an operation holding ball of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, one reserve ball number is consumed, the command request of the symbol memory number, the judgment of the special symbol , The symbol determination of the special symbol, the determination of the probability variation function, the determination of the time shortening function, the operation pattern of the special electric auditors, the setting of the demonstration effect time, etc. are performed in order.

  Next, abnormality detection processing is executed (S69). In this abnormality detection processing, based on the input information in the input processing (S53), the magnetic detection signal by the magnetic sensor, the disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, the radio detection signal by the radio sensor, the door / frame opening signal, etc. are sequentially inspected. , It is determined whether the gaming machine is in an error state. In the case of an error state, in order to request the production control board 200 to display an error, a production control command including the error information (“error production designation command”) is generated.

  Next, the ball passing time abnormality detection processing is executed (S70). In this ball-passing time abnormality detection process, when the ON signal of the winning detection switch is continuously detected for a predetermined time or more, a ball-passing time abnormality is set, and an effect control command ("error Performance request command ”) and a security signal output request for output to an external terminal.

Next, a game state display process is executed (S71). In this game state display processing, the display data such as the number of times the special electric auditors product 542 operates continuously (the number of specified rounds), the number of operation-holding balls of the normal symbol and the special symbol, and the like are created. Further, the display data for displaying the information on the error state detected by the abnormality detection process on the state indicator lamp of the main control board 100 is created.

  Next, the LED output process is executed (S72). In this LED output process, the special symbol control process (S65), in order to display the special symbol and the normal symbol, the number of reserved balls, the number of times the special electric auditors operate continuously, the error, and the like. Abnormality detection processing (S69), display data created by the game state display processing (S71), each special symbol display device 71, 72, ordinary symbol display device 75, each special symbol holding lamp 73, 74, general symbol reservation It outputs to the lamp 76, the status display lamp of the main control board 100, etc., and initializes the display in these various display devices.

  Next, a firing control signal output process is executed (S73). In this launch control signal output process, when no communication abnormality with the payout control board 400 or a disconnection short circuit power source abnormality is detected, a launch permission signal is output to the payout control board 400 to permit the launch of the game ball. To do. On the other hand, when the communication abnormality with the payout control board 400 or the disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality is detected, a signal of the firing prohibition is output to the payout control board 400 to prohibit the firing of the game ball.

  Next, the solenoid output process is executed (S74). In this solenoid output process, the normal symbol control process (S62) and the special electric auditors control process (S66) are acquired in order to operate each electric accessory 542. An excitation signal is output to each electric accessory solenoid 623, 643 based on the control data.

  Next, production control command transmission processing is executed (S75). In this effect control command transmission process, the effect control command designated by the pointer is read out from the effect control commands stored in the command storage area (ring buffer) of the main information storage unit 180 in the above process, and this effect is generated. The control command is transmitted to the production control board 200.

  Next, external information output processing is executed (S76). In this external information output processing, the game information related to the gaming machine PM is output as an external information signal to an external device such as a hall computer via the external information terminal board 600. As the external information signal, for example, a prize ball signal, a door frame opening signal, a magnetic sensor abnormal signal, a disconnection short circuit power supply abnormal signal, an abnormal sensor detection (abnormal ball passing time etc.) signal, a big hit signal, a signal during the condominium, There is a symbol confirmation signal.

  Next, the saved contents of the register are restored and the main CPU 101 is set to the interrupt enable state (S77). As a result, the main control side timer interrupt process is terminated, the process returns to the main control side main process, and the main control side main process is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

When the main control board 100 detects a power failure (a decrease in the supply voltage based on a predetermined threshold) during main processing on the main control side or during interrupt processing, a non-maskable interrupt is generated and the power failure confirmation flag is turned on. To do. Then, after returning to the original processing, the above-described power-off processing (S
26-S32) will be performed.

≪Winning monitoring process≫
Next, the winning monitoring process (S59) will be described. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the details of the winning monitoring process (S59).

First, the first starting opening switch input processing is executed (S101). In the first starting port switch input processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the first starting port switch 511 is input. When the detection signal from the first starting port switch 511 is input, the first starting port winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the first starting port 51 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage unit 180. In addition to being stored, the first start opening winning command is generated and is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. On the other hand, if there is no detection signal input from the first starting port switch 511, the process directly proceeds to the next step.

  Subsequently, the second starting opening switch input processing is executed (S102). In the second starting port switch input processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the second starting port switch 521 is input. When the detection signal from the second starting port switch 521 is input, the second starting port winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the second starting port 52 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage unit 180. In addition to being stored, the second start opening winning command is generated and is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if there is no detection signal input from the second starting port switch 521, the process directly proceeds to the next step.

  Next, the operation gate switch input process is executed (S103). In the operation gate switch input processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the operation gate switch 531 is input. When the detection signal from the operation gate switch 531 is input, the operation gate winning data indicating that the game ball has passed through the operation gate 53 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180, and the operation gate winning is performed. A command is generated and is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. On the other hand, if there is no detection signal input from the operation gate switch 531, the process proceeds to the next step as it is.

  Subsequently, a special winning opening switch input process is executed (S104). In the special winning opening switch input processing, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the special winning opening switch 541 is input. When the detection signal from the special winning opening switch 541 is input, the special winning opening winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the big winning opening 54 is temporarily stored in the winning information storing area of the main information storing means 180. , A special winning opening winning command is generated, and this is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if there is no detection signal input from the special winning opening switch 541, the process directly proceeds to the next step.

  Then, the left general winning opening switch processing is executed (S105). In the left general winning opening switch input processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the left general winning opening switch 611 is input. When the detection signal from the left general winning opening switch 611 is input, the left general winning opening winning data indicating that the game ball has entered any of the general winning openings 61 to 63 is the winning data of the main information storage means 180. While temporarily storing in the storage area, a left general winning award winning command is generated and is temporarily stored in the command storing area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the left general winning opening switch 611, the present winning award monitoring processing is ended.

  Then, the right general winning opening switch processing is executed (S106). In the right general winning opening switch input processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the right general winning opening switch 641 is input. When the detection signal from the right general winning opening switch 641 is input, the right general winning opening winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the general winning opening 64 is temporarily stored in the winning data storage area of the main information storage means 180. At the same time, a right general winning award winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the right general winning opening switch 641, the present winning monitoring processing is ended.

≪Special symbol game processing≫
Next, a series of processes relating to the special symbol game in the main control side timer interrupt process will be described. In the processing related to the special symbol game, the above-described starting opening monitoring control processing (S64), special symbol control processing (S65), special electric auditors product control processing (S66), special symbol variation start monitoring control processing (S68), etc. Is applicable.

(Starting port monitoring control process)
First, the starting port monitoring control process (S64) will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing details of the starting port monitoring control process (S64).

  First, it is determined whether or not the game winning of the first starting opening 51 is detected (S201). When the winning to the first starting opening 51 is detected (S201: YES), it is determined whether the number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol is less than the upper limit number of 4 (S202).

  If the number of operation reserve balls of the first special symbol is less than 4 (S202: YES), as a random number value related to the first special symbol game, a random number value per special symbol, a random symbol value per special symbol, a special symbol Fluctuating pattern random number values are acquired, and each random number value is stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area (reserved n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 according to the ball entry order (S203). Then, as an update of the operation reserved sphere number of the first special symbol, the value of the first special symbol reserved sphere number counter is incremented by 1 (S204), and the winning check of the first starting opening 51 is completed.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the game winning of the second starting opening 52 is detected (S205). When the winning in the second starting opening 52 is detected (S205: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of operation reserved balls of the second special symbol is less than the upper limit number of 4 (S206). If the number of operation reserve balls of the second special symbol is less than 4 (S206: YES), as a random number value related to the second special symbol game, a random number per special symbol, a symbol random number per special symbol, a special symbol Fluctuating pattern random number values are acquired, and each random number value is stored in the second special symbol holding storage area (holding n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 in accordance with the order of entry (S207). Then, as an update of the operation reserved sphere number of the second special symbol, the value of the second special symbol reserved sphere number counter is incremented by 1 (S208), and the winning check of the second starting opening 52 is completed.

  Then, whether or not there is an update of the operation pending ball number of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, that is, whether the operation pending ball number of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is added in S204 or S208 It is determined (S209). When there is an update of the operation holding ball number (S209: YES), a symbol memory number command including information on the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is generated, and this is the main information storage means. It is stored in the command storage area 180 (S210).

  Next, the state of the gaming machine is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not it is the pre-determination timing (S211). If it is the pre-judgment timing (S211: YES), in order to generate pre-reading judgment information based on various random numbers acquired at the time of winning the starting mouth, the random symbol buffer (reserved n storage area or register, etc.) The numerical value is read out and a prior determination is made (S212). Then, a success / failure determination command including the information (presence / absence preliminary determination number) of this preliminary determination result is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S213).

  Further, the special symbol per symbol random number value is read out from the hit symbol random number buffer, and symbol preliminary determination is carried out (S214). Then, a symbol preliminary determination command including the information of the preliminary determination result (symbol preliminary determination number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S215). Furthermore, the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value is read from the fluctuation pattern random number buffer, and fluctuation pattern pre-determination is performed (S216). Then, a variation pattern preliminary determination command including the information of this preliminary determination result (variation pattern preliminary determination number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S217).

(Special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control processing)
Next, the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S68) will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S68).

  In this special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process (S68), of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, for the special symbol side that satisfies the fluctuation start condition, the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process described later. (S310) is executed. In addition, when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol satisfy the variation start condition, as described above, the process on the second special symbol side is preferentially executed.

  First, it is determined whether a big hit or a small hit is in progress (S301). Then, whether both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for variation, that is, whether the first special symbol gaming status and the second special symbol gaming status are both "00H (waiting for variation)" It is determined whether or not (S302).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the number of operation holding balls of the second special symbol is "0" (S303), and when the number of holding balls is not "0" (S303: NO), the second special Considering that the variation start condition of the symbol is satisfied, after setting the addresses of the second special symbol variation start monitoring table (addresses of various tables and RAM storage areas used in the subsequent processing) (S304) , Special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S310) on the second special symbol side. That is, in the present embodiment, when the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is present, the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is given priority regardless of the presence or absence of the operation holding ball of the first special symbol. It is designed to be digested. Details of this special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the number of operation holding balls of the second special symbol is "0" (S303: YES), it is determined whether the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol is "0" (S305). .. Here, if the number of holding balls is not "0" (S305: NO), it is considered that the variation start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied, and the address of the first special symbol variation start monitoring table (hereinafter After setting the addresses of the various tables and the RAM storage area used in the process) (S306), the process proceeds to the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310) on the first special symbol side.

  If the variation start conditions of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not both satisfied (S301: YES, S302: NO, S305: YES), the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310) is skipped. ..

(Special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process)
Next, the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S305, S309) will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S305, S309).

  In this special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S305, S309), referring to the first special symbol fluctuation start monitoring table or the second special symbol fluctuation start monitoring table set in S304 or S308, the fluctuation start of this time The target special symbol side will be executed, but since the method of processing is the same between the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, except for special cases, the first special symbol side Whether it is a process or a process on the side of the second special symbol will be collectively described without making a distinction.

First, 1 is subtracted from the number of operation holding balls on the side of the special symbol which is the target of the variation start this time (S311). Then, a symbol storage number command including information on the number of operation-reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after subtraction is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S312). Subsequently, the special symbol holding storage area on the special symbol side which is the target of the variation start this time is accessed, and the random number per special symbol stored in the earliest holding storage area (holding 1 storage area), per special symbol The symbol random number value and the special symbol variation pattern random number value are sequentially read, and these random number values are used for a special symbol validity determination process (S320), a symbol determination process (S330), and a variation pattern selection process (S423), which will be described later. It is transferred to the special symbol appropriateness determination area, the special symbol determination area, the special symbol variation pattern determination area, and the special symbol variation addition pattern determination area of the main information storage unit 180 (S313). Further, as an update of the hold storage area, the hold ball information stored in the hold 2 storage area to the hold 4 storage area is shifted to a lower hold storage area, and the hold 4 storage area is cleared to zero (S314).

  Then, a special symbol winning / discarding determination process is executed (S320). In the special symbol win / loss determination process (S320), first, the special symbol win / loss table is acquired. At this time, if the gaming state is the special symbol probability changing state, the winning probability lottery table with a high probability is obtained, and if the gaming state is the normal state, the winning probability lottery table with a low probability is obtained. Next, a random number per special symbol is read from the special symbol winning / discarding determination area of the main information storage unit 180. Then, referring to the special symbol win / loss lottery table, based on the random number per special symbol, the win / fail judgment of the special symbol is executed. Further, a value (big hit data “55H”, small hit data “33H”, deviating data “00H”) corresponding to the result of the hit determination is stored in the special symbol judgment flag of the main information storage unit 180.

  Then, a symbol determination process is executed (S330). In the symbol determination process (S330), the stop symbol of the special symbol and the character effect number (variation-added symbol information) are determined according to the result of the hit determination. Then, the special symbol stop symbol (symbol group) determined this time and the character effect number are stored in the symbol storage area of the main information storage unit 180. The character effect number is the type of the determined stop symbol (symbol group), and the operating state of the probability variation function of the special symbol and the regular symbol (the special symbol probability variation ON / special symbol probability variation OFF / normal symbol probability variation ON). / 4 patterns of regular variation off of normal symbol)) and the combination. It should be noted that if the result of the hit / miss determination is out of alignment, the character effect number “0” is determined.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit (S342). If the result of the determination whether or not the special symbol is true is out (S342: NO), the process proceeds to S351.

  If the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit (S342: YES), based on the type of the symbol group determined in S330 (big hit type) and the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit, after the big hit game is over. As the number of times the probability variation function of the special symbol operates, the probability variation number is determined (S345). Also, based on the type of the symbol group determined in S330 (big hit type) and the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit, the number of times the variable time is shortened as the number of times the special symbol variable time shortening function is activated after the big hit game is finished. Is determined (S346). Further, based on the type of the symbol group (big hit type) determined in S330 and the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit, the number of electric support is determined as the number of times the electric Chu support function is activated after the big hit game ends ( S347). The determination results (probability fluctuation count, fluctuation time shortening count, power support count) are stored in the time saving count storage area and power support count storage area of the main information storage unit 180. Then, the operation pattern of the special electric auditors product 542 in the big hit game (round game) is set based on the type of the symbol group (big hit type) determined in S330 (S348). Specifically, as the operation pattern of the special electric accessory 542, the specified number of rounds of the big hit game, the opening pattern (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 in each round, and the like are set.

Next, based on the type of symbol group determined in S330 and the current game state, the variation pattern selection state after the big hit game end or the small hit game is set (S349). Then, based on the type of symbol group determined in S330, the demonstration effect time (hit start demo time and hit end demo time) of the special game (big hit game or small hit game) is set (S350). Then, the special symbol appropriateness determination area and the special symbol determination area of the main information storage unit 180 used in the above-mentioned special symbol appropriateness determination processing (S320) and symbol determination processing (S330) are cleared (S351). Then, the special symbol game status on the special symbol side to be changed this time is transited from "00H (standby)" to "01H (variation start)" (S352).

(Special symbol control processing)
Next, the special symbol control process (S65) will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol control process (S65).

  First, it is determined whether or not the special electric auditors product 542 is inactive, that is, whether or not the special electric auditors product game status is "00H (waiting for hit)" (S401). Then, if the special electric auditors product 542 is not in operation (S401: YES), it is determined whether the second special symbol game status is not "00H (standby)" (S402).

  If the second special symbol game status is not "00H (standby)" (S402: YES), to execute the process related to the second special symbol, the second special symbol control table (used in the subsequent process Addresses of various tables and RAM storage area) are set (S403), and special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410) is performed. On the other hand, if the second special symbol game status is "00H (standby)" (S402: NO), to execute the process related to the first special symbol, the first special symbol control table (in the subsequent process Addresses of various tables and RAM storage area used) are set (S404), and the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410) is performed.

  In the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410) described below, using the first special symbol control table or the second special symbol control table set in the above S403 or S404, the special target of the change this time. Although the process of the symbol side will be executed, since the method of processing is common between the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, unless otherwise specified, is it the process of the first special symbol side? , Will be collectively described without distinguishing whether or not the processing is on the second special symbol side. Details of this special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410) will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Special symbol control general-purpose processing)
Then, special symbol control general-purpose processing is executed (S404, S407). Here, FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing details of special symbol control general-purpose processing (S404, S407).

  In this special symbol control general-purpose process (S404, S407), the branch process (S411-S414) for shifting to the process according to the value ("01H", "02H", "03H") of the special symbol game status is executed. To do. First, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status on the special symbol side which is the target of the change this time is not 0 (S411). If the special symbol game status is not "00H" (S411: YES), it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is "01H (start of fluctuation)" (S412). If the special symbol game status is "01H" (S412: YES), the process proceeds to the special symbol variation start process (S420). Details of this special symbol variation start processing (S420) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the case of NO in S412, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is "02H (changing)" (S413). If the special symbol game status is "02H" (S413: YES), the process proceeds to the special symbol changing process (S430). Details of this special symbol changing process (S430) will be described later with reference to FIG. In the case of NO in S413, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is "03H (during symbol display)" (S414). If the special symbol game status is "03H" (S414: YES), the process proceeds to the special symbol stop symbol displaying process (S440). Details of the special symbol stop symbol displaying process (S440) will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Special symbol fluctuation start processing)
Next, the special symbol variation start process (S420) will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation start process (S420).

  First, the special symbol variation pattern table is acquired based on the result of the winning / disapproval lottery and the variation pattern selection state (S421). Subsequently, the special symbol variation pattern random number value is read from the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage unit 180 (S422). Then, referring to the special symbol variation pattern table, based on the special symbol variation pattern random value, one is selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns (S423).

  Next, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected this time is set (S424). Then, as the setting of the variation start of the special symbol, the variation time is stored in the special symbol game timer of the symbol display control means 165 (S425), and the variation start command to the effect control board 200 is generated (S426). As the variation start command, in order to start the symbol variation effect in the effect display device 70, a communication inspection command, a variation addition symbol information designation command, a variation pattern designation command, a symbol designation command are sequentially generated, and this is the main information storage means. This is stored in the command storage area 180.

  Then, the contents of the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage unit 180 used for determining the variation pattern are cleared (S427). Then, the special symbol game status is transited from "01H (start of fluctuation)" to "02H (during fluctuation)" (S428).

(Processing during special symbol fluctuation)
Next, the special symbol changing process (S430) will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol changing process (S430).

  First, in order to perform variable display of special symbols, display pattern number switching processing of special symbols is executed (S431). In this display pattern number switching process (S431), display pattern number data of a special symbol is generated every predetermined switching time. This display pattern number data is output to the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72 in the LED output process (S73) so that the special symbol is variably displayed or confirmed.

  Next, whether or not the special symbol game timer has become “0 (timeout)”, that is, whether or not the variation time of the special symbol has ended (S432). When the variation time of the special symbol is over (S432: YES), the stop symbol of the special symbol to be confirmed and displayed on the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72 is set (S433). Then, a variation stop command for instructing the final display of the decorative symbol to the effect control board 200 is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S434).

  Next, "500 (ms)" is stored as the confirmed display time in the special symbol game timer (S435). The "confirmed display time" is the time during which the stop symbol is definitely stopped and displayed when the special symbol is changed and stopped. Then, the special symbol game status is changed from "02H (during change)" to "03H (during symbol display)" (S436).

(Special symbol stop symbol display processing)
Next, the special symbol stop symbol displaying process (S440) will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol stop symbol displaying process (S440).

First, whether or not the special symbol game timer is "0 (timeout)", that is, whether or not the confirmed display time of the special symbol (stop symbol) has ended (S441). Here, when the fixed display time of the special symbol has ended (S441: YES), the special symbol game status is changed from "03H (displaying stopped symbol)" to "00H (standby)" (S442).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the hit / miss determination data stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage unit 180 is the big hit data “55H” (S443). If the hit determination data is a big hit data (S443: YES), the probability variation function of the special symbol is deactivated (S444), the variation time shortening function of the special symbol is deactivated (S445), and the electric chewing support function is activated. Stop (S446) is performed in order. Specifically, the probability variation flag is set to "00H (OFF)", and the probability variation number counter, the variation time reduction number counter, and the easy entry state number counter are also set to "00H" to clear to zero.

  Next, as the start demonstration setting process of the special game, the start demonstration display time is set and a production control command (big hit start demo command) for instructing the start of the start demonstration production is generated (S447). Then, the number of executions of the variation pattern selection state (variation pattern selection state number counter) is cleared to zero (S448). Also, the special electric auditors game game status is changed from "00H (waiting for hit)" to "01H (special game)" (S449). Then, "00H" is set to clear the contents of the hit / miss determination flag (S450).

  On the other hand, if the hit determination data is not the big hit data (S443: NO), it is determined whether or not the probability varying function of the special symbol is in operation (S451). If the probability variation function of the special symbol is in operation (S451: YES), the probability variation number counter of the main information storage unit 180 is decremented by 1 as the consumed amount of the variation number of the special symbol this time (step S452). .. Then, it is determined whether the probability variation counter is zero (step S453). If the probability variation counter is zero (S453: YES), the operation of the probability variation function of the special symbol is stopped (S454). When the probability variation counter after subtraction is not zero (S453: NO), S454 is skipped and the process proceeds to S455.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the special symbol variation time reduction function is in operation (S455). When the variation time reduction function of the special symbol is in operation (S455: YES), the hour / hour counter of the main information storage unit 180 is decremented by 1 as the consumed amount of the variation number of the special symbol this time (step S456). .. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time reduction number counter is zero (step S457). When the variation time reduction number counter is zero (S457: YES), the operation of the variation time reduction function of the special symbol is stopped as the number of times the special symbol time saving state has been reached is reached (S458). When the variable time reduction number counter after subtraction is not zero (S457: NO), S458 is skipped and the process proceeds to S459.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the power cable support function is operating (S459). When the power-chu support function is operating (S459: YES), the power-support frequency counter of the main information storage unit 180 is decremented by 1 as the amount of change in the number of times the special symbol changes this time (step S460). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the power support counter is zero (step S461). If the power support counter is zero (S461: YES), the operation of the power support function is stopped (S462), assuming that the number of times of the easy entry state is reached. When the power support counter after subtraction is not zero (S461: NO), S462 is skipped and the process proceeds to S463.

Next, the fluctuation pattern selection state number counter of the main information storage unit 180 is decremented by 1 (S463). Then, the variation pattern selection state is updated (S464). Specifically, by referring to the variation pattern selection state number counter of the main information storage unit 180, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the current variation pattern selection state has reached a preset end number, and the end number is set. When it has reached, it switches to the fluctuation pattern selection state defined next. On the other hand, when the number of end times has not been reached, the current variation pattern selection state is maintained.

  Next, an effect control command (game state designation command) including the current game state information and variation pattern selection state information updated in S451 to S464 is generated, and this is generated in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. (S465). On the side of the effect control board 200, the effect mode is set and updated based on the information of the game state designation command.

(Special electric accessory control processing)
Next, the special electric auditors product control process (S66) will be described. 47 to 48 are flowcharts showing details of the electric accessory control process (S66).

  First, it is determined whether or not the special electric auditors game game status is "01H (special game)" (S501). When the special electric auditors product game status is "01H" (S501: YES), the special game process is executed in the subsequent process. In this special game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory 542 is in operation (S502). When the special electric auditors product 542 is not operating (S502: NO), it is determined whether it is the operation start time of the special electric auditors product 542 (S503). The operation start time of the special electric accessory 542 is the timing to start the operation of the special electric accessory 542 in each round game.

  When it is the operation start time of the special electric auditors product 542 (S503: YES), an effect control command (round effect designation command) is generated to start the round effect, and this is stored in the command of the main information storage unit 180. The data is stored in the area (S504). On the side of the effect control board 200, a round effect corresponding to each round game during the special game is executed based on the information (information such as the current number of rounds) of this round effect designation command. Then, the operation of the special electric accessory 542 is started (S505), and the processing of S506 to S510 is executed as the processing during the operation of the special electric accessory 542.

  As a process during the operation of the special electric auditors product 542, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the specified winning number (maximum winning number) in the special winning opening 54 (S506), and the operating time of the special electric auditors product 542. It is determined whether (opening time) has elapsed (S507). At this time, if the game ball has won the specified winning number (maximum winning number) in the special winning opening 54 (S506: YES) or if the operation time of the special electric auditors product 542 has elapsed (S507: YES), The operation of the electric accessory 542 is stopped (S508). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of continuous operations of the special electric auditors product 542 has reached a predetermined specified round number (S509). When the number of continuous operations does not reach the specified number of rounds (S509: NO), the number of continuous operations of the special electric auditors product 542 is incremented by 1 (S510).

  On the other hand, when the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory 542 has reached the specified number of rounds (S509: YES), the process proceeds to S511, and the end demo display time is set as the special game hit end demo setting process. At the same time, an effect control command (big hit end demo command) for instructing the start of the end demo effect is generated (S511).

  Then, the fluctuation time reduction frequency information set in S346 is stored in the fluctuation time reduction frequency counter (S512). In addition, the power support frequency information set in S347 is stored in the power support frequency counter (S513).

Subsequently, with reference to the content of the probability variation determination flag set in S343, it is determined whether or not the operation of the condition device is an operation according to a specific symbol (so-called probability variation symbol) (S514).
If it is the operation of the condition device according to the specific symbol (S514: YES), the probability variation number counter of the main information storage means 180 stores the probability variation number (data at the time of operation) set in S345, and the special symbol The operation of the probability variation function of is started (S515). On the other hand, when it is not the operation of the condition device according to the specific symbol (S514: NO), the non-operation data “00H” is stored in the probability variation counter and S515 is skipped.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the variation time reduction number information stored in the time reduction counter is variation time reduction function operation data (data other than "00H") (S516). If it is the variable time shortening function operation data (S516: YES), the operation of the variable time shortening function of the special symbol is started (S517). On the other hand, if it is not the variation time reduction function operation data (S516: NO), S517 is skipped.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the power support frequency information stored in the power support frequency counter is power channel support function operation data (data other than "00H") (S518). If the data is the electric power support function operation data (S518: YES), the operation of the electric power support function is started (S519 to S521). That is, the operation start of the probability variation function of the normal symbol (S519), the operation start of the variation time shortening function of the ordinary symbol (S520), the operation start of the opening extension function of the ordinary electric auditors product 522 (S521) are sequentially executed. On the other hand, if it is not the data of the electric power support function operation, S519 to S521 are skipped.

  Next, the state is switched to the variation pattern selection state determined in S347 (S522). Subsequently, an effect control command (game state designation command) including the game state information after the special game and the variation pattern selection state information set in S512 to S522 described above is generated and stored in the main information storage means 180. It is stored in the command storage area (S523). On the side of the effect control board 200, the effect mode after the special game is set based on the information of this game state designation command. Then, the special electric accessory game game status is changed from "01H (special game)" to "00H (hit waiting state)" (S524).

<Processing on production control board side>
Next, the procedure of the operation process in the effect control board 200 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 49 to 55. The process on the effect control board 200 side includes a reset start process (including the effect control side main process) that is executed when the sub-main CPU 201 is reset such as after the power is turned on, and an effect control side timer interrupt activated at regular intervals. The process, the reception interrupt process of the effect control command activated due to the strobe signal from the main control board 100, and the lamp activated when the predetermined generation time defined in the time schedule of the variable effect pattern arrives. It is configured to include an effect interruption process and an image control command transmission interruption process that is activated at regular intervals.

  Each interrupt process (exception process) is set with a priority level indicating the priority when a plurality of interrupt processes occur. In this example, "reset start processing by power supply reset: highest priority", "reset start processing by various abnormalities: highest priority" → "reception interrupt processing of production control command: level 7" → "WDT (when runaway is detected) The priority levels are prioritized in the order of reset start processing: level 3> image control command transmission interrupt processing: level 2> performance control timer interrupt processing: level 1. It should be noted that the “reset start processing upon various abnormalities” is performed by, for example, DMA (Direct Memory) when the sub-main CPU 201 executes an illegal instruction, when the sub-main CPU 201 tries to access in an illegal area or an illegal method. Access) Activated when an error occurs during transfer. In the present embodiment, the above-described plurality of types of interrupt processing are illustrated, but in reality, other interrupt processing also exists.

In the effect control side main processing, basically, the processing is performed after setting all the interrupts disabled or interrupts other than the effect control command reception interrupt. Then, when the effect control side main process is in the interrupt enabled state, each interrupt process is activated by interrupting the main process. In each interrupt process, if there is a request for another interrupt process (multiple interrupts occur) during the execution of the interrupt process, as long as the interrupt process has a higher priority level than the interrupt process being executed, it is a rule. While the interrupt request is permitted, the interrupt request is prohibited when the interrupt processing has a lower priority level or the same priority level as the interrupt processing being executed. That is, each interrupt process proceeds in a state where other interrupts having the same priority level or lower priority levels are prohibited. Then, each interrupt process returns to the main process on the effect control side in a state where all interrupts are permitted. In addition, the priority order (priority level) of such an interrupt factor is defined by the register setting of the effect control microcomputer 210 (interrupt controller).

<< Reset start processing >>
First, the reset start process of the effect control board 200 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a reset start process of the effect control board 200. In this reset start processing, the power is turned on, a reset caused by various abnormalities, or a reset caused by WDT (when a runaway is detected) is started, and a security check is performed on the sub-main CPU 201. , The program starts, and the processing after S601 is started.

  First, as an initial setting required when the power is turned on, a leading address is set in the stack pointer as an initial value of the stack area (S601). Then, all interrupt processing is prohibited until various initial settings are completed (S602).

  Subsequently, as a basic setting regarding hardware, an initial value is set in a built-in register provided in the sub-main CPU 201 and the I / O port circuit 204 is initialized (S603). Further, the memory area in the RAM 203 of the effect control microcomputer 210 is initialized (S604). Here, an initial value is set to a variable with an initial value, and a variable without an initial value is initialized by clearing 0. Further, the sub-main CPU 201 expands the control program stored in the ROM 202 into the RAM 203 as appropriate.

  Then, interrupts other than the reception interrupt process of the effect control command are prohibited (S605). Next, processing is performed to set the type of error that should be validated for the model among various errors set in advance for each model (S606). Further, a turn-off request is made in order to turn off all the effect lamps LP (frame lamp 10, board lamp 80) (S607). Then, the watchdog timer is activated to monitor the runaway of the sub-main CPU 201 (S608).

  Then, the main process of the production control side is executed as the main process of the game production (S609). Details of this effect control side main processing (S609) will be described later with reference to FIG. It should be noted that when the process shifts to the main control process on the production control side in S609, there is normally no possibility of returning from the main process to the reset start process, but in the unlikely event that a process such as a bug in the program causes a return to this process First, the power consumption is changed to a small power consumption mode (sleep mode) in which the power consumption is reduced as compared with the normal operation.

<< Main processing on the production control side >>
Next, the main process (S609) on the effect control side of the effect control board 200 will be described. 50 is a flowchart showing the effect control side main processing (S609).

First, an address for starting a check as to whether or not the control program is correctly expanded in the RAM 203 in the main process on the effect control side (start address where the program is expanded)
Is acquired (S611). Then, all the interrupts are permitted (the activation of various interrupt processes is permitted) (S612).

  Next, the device initialization operation is executed (S613). This initialization operation is an operation mode that is executed only once when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PM is turned on (when reset is started), and in order to control the operation of the movable accessory 24 by a device such as a motor or a solenoid. It is executed for the purpose of confirming the positional information required for. At the end of the initialization operation, the movable accessory 24 returns to the preset initial position (reference position).

  Then, the watchdog timer is cleared to restart the watchdog timer (S614). At this time, when the sub-main CPU 201 is executing the program normally, a predetermined clear word is written in the WDT clear register of the sub-main CPU 201 within a preset time-out period, so that the watchdog timer It is cleared and restarted. On the other hand, when the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

  Then, the input port check process is executed (S615). In this input port check process, the reading of the I / O port circuit 204 (input port) in the port input / output process S912 in the timer interrupt process described later is monitored every time an interrupt occurs, and is monitored a plurality of times (for example, four times). If the input port states are all "1", the signal level is "1 (H level)", if all "0", the signal level is "0 (L level)", otherwise the signal level is Do not change (this determines the input signal).

  Subsequently, an error effect management process is executed (S616). In this error effect management process, error effects by various devices are started based on the error effect pattern set in the subsequent command analysis process (S622). Further, in the error effect management process, an error management timer is set to an initial value (error effect time) to manage the progress of the error effect. This error management timer is subtracted and updated at a cycle of 16 ms in the error management timer updating process (S920) of the effect control side timer interrupt process. When the error management timer times out, the error effect is ended.

  Subsequently, effect button monitoring control processing is executed (S617). In this effect button monitoring control process, when the button notice effect is incorporated during the fluctuation of the symbol, the input state of the effect button 15 is monitored within a predetermined operation effective time, and the information regarding the input state of the effect button 15 is monitored. Hold.

Then, the notice lottery management process is executed (S618). In the notice lottery management process, a notice effect pattern that defines the contents of the notice effect that occurs at each stage of the decorative pattern changing process is created in accordance with the variation effect pattern scenario selected in the subsequent command analysis process (S620). Determined by lottery. The notice effect pattern number determined here is temporarily stored in the notice effect pattern storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260. Further, an image control command for designating this notice effect pattern number to the image control board 300 side is generated and set in the image control command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260. At this time, when the accessory preview effect pattern is selected as the preview effect pattern, an accessory request is generated, and the drive pattern of the movable accessory 24 is specified in the subsequent device management process (S619). .. In this example, the main loop processing efficiency is improved rather than lottery of all of the plurality of types of advance notice effects (announcement effect patterns) that occur within one variation of the decorative design, in one main loop process. In order to do so, it is configured such that the notice production is divided for each generation time (for example, the variation start stage, the reach generation stage, the variation stop stage) and the lottery is performed over a plurality of main loop processes. At that time, for the notice effect that occurs at the variation start stage of the decorative pattern, it is necessary to synchronize with the variation start of the decorative pattern (send the image control command as soon as possible), so the lottery is performed within the starting main loop process. I am supposed to do it.

  Next, a device management process is executed (S619). In this device management process, when there is an operation request (lamp request, accessory request) of various devices in the command analysis process (S620) described later, plural types of pattern data (lamp pattern, drive pattern) stored in the ROM 203. ), The pattern data corresponding to the effect number (lamp effect number, accessory notice effect number) is specified, and control of the target device is started. In the lamp pattern data of the effect lamp LP, lamp data associated with each one frame time (time required to update the image frame once: 16 ms) is stored as schedule data. In the present example, one frame time corresponds to the time required for one frame drawing processing when the effect display device 70 draws at about 60 frames per second (= about 60 fps). Similarly, in the drive pattern data of the movable accessory 24, drive data associated with each interrupt cycle (1 ms) is stored as schedule data. As a result, each control data (lamp data, drive data, etc.) is output to the target device at regular intervals in the effect control timer interrupt processing described later, and the operation of the target device is started. On the other hand, in the production control timer interrupt process described later, when the output of a series of control data (lamp data, drive data) is all completed, the production lamp LP is turned off or the operation of the movable accessory 24 is stopped. , Control of the target device ends.

  Then, a command analysis process (S620) is executed. In this command analysis processing, it is monitored whether or not the effect control command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and if the effect control command is stored, this command is read and the read effect control command is read. Perform effect control processing corresponding to the type. Details of this command analysis processing (S620) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, during the current loop processing, it is determined whether command analysis (effect control command analysis) has been executed (S621). If it is immediately after the command analysis (S621: YES), the process returns to S614 and shifts to the next loop processing. On the other hand, when the command analysis is not executed (S621: NO), that is, when the command buffer is empty, the effect lottery random number updating process is executed until a predetermined time has elapsed (S622). In the present embodiment, "16 ms", which is half the minimum unit (32 ms) of the switching control of the lamp LP, is set as the predetermined time. In this production lottery random number update processing, various production lottery random numbers such as a look-ahead notice lottery random number, a decorative pattern random number, a variation production pattern random number, a notice production pattern random number are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is incremented by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value.

(Command analysis process)
Next, the command analysis process (S622) will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing details of the command analysis process (S622). In this command analysis processing, it is monitored whether or not the effect control command from the main control board 100 is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage means 260, and the effect corresponding to the type of the stored effect control command is monitored. Perform control processing.

  First, it is determined whether a game state designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260 (S631). When the game state designation command is stored (step S631: YES), the process proceeds to the effect state transition process (S632). In the effect state transition process (S632), a process of changing the effect mode is executed based on the game state information and the variation pattern selection state information included in the game state designation command.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the hold-related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260 (S633). Here, the hold-related commands include a symbol storage number command and a preliminary determination command. If this hold-related command is stored (S633: YES), the process moves to the hold information management process (S634). In the hold information management process (S634), the symbol storage number command or the pre-determination command is read from the sub-main information storage unit 260, pre-reading determination is executed based on the information of the pre-determination result, and the reserved image of the effect display device 70 is also executed. Processing for updating the number of held images and the display mode (display color etc.) displayed on the display unit 710 is performed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the symbol variation related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260 (S635). Here, the symbol variation related command includes a variation start command and a variation stop command. When the symbol variation related command is stored (step S635: YES), the process proceeds to the variation effect content determination process (S636). In this variation effect content determination processing (S636), if the received symbol variation related command is a variation start command, processing for starting variation effect of the decorative symbol is executed, and the received symbol variation related command stops varying. If it is a command, a process for ending the variation effect of the decorative pattern is executed.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a big hit production related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260 (S637). Here, the big hit production related commands include a big hit start demonstration effect command, a round effect designation command, and a big hit end demonstration effect command. When the big hit production related command is stored (step S637: YES), the process shifts to the big hit production content determination processing (S638). In this jackpot effect content determination processing (S638), processing for executing a start demonstration effect, a round effect, and an end demonstration effect is performed.

  Then, it is determined whether or not a small hit production related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260 (S639). Here, the small hit production related commands include a small hit start demonstration effect command and a small hit end demonstration effect command. When the small hit production related command is stored (step S639: YES), the processing shifts to the small hit production content determination processing (S640). In this small hit production content determination process (S640), a process for executing a small hit start demonstration effect and a small hit end demonstration effect is performed.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a winning prize winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260 (S641). Here, the winning opening prize-related commands include a first starting opening winning command, a second starting opening winning command, an actuation gate winning command, a large winning opening winning command, a left general winning opening winning command, and a right general winning opening winning command. Etc. are included. When this winning a prize winning related command is stored (S641: YES), the process proceeds to the winning effect content determination process (S642). Details of the winning effect content determination processing (S642) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not an error effect designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub information storage unit 280 (S643). If this error effect designation command is stored (S643: YES), the process proceeds to error effect content determination processing (S644). In this error effect content determination processing (S644), an error effect designation command is read from the sub information storage unit 280, and the error state is notified by image display of the liquid crystal display device 70, lighting of the effect lamp LP, sound of the speaker 11, and the like. Error effect pattern to determine.

When the effect control command is not stored in the command storage area of the sub information storage unit 280 (S631: NO, S633: NO, S635: NO, S637: NO, S63).
9: NO, S641: NO, S643: NO), the command analysis process is terminated without doing anything.

(Prize winning content determination process)
Next, the winning effect content determination processing (S642) will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the details of the winning effect content determination processing (S642).

  First, the first starting mouth winning effect control process is executed (S701). In the first starting mouth winning effect control process (S701), it is determined whether or not the first starting mouth winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and the first starting mouth winning command is If it is stored, the first start mouth winning effect that notifies that the game ball has entered the first start opening 51 is executed on condition that the predetermined effect executing condition is satisfied.

  Next, the second start mouth winning effect control process is executed (S702). In the second starting mouth winning effect control process (S702), it is determined whether or not the second starting mouth winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and the second starting mouth winning command is If it is stored, the second starting mouth winning effect that notifies that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 52 is executed on condition that a predetermined effect executing condition is satisfied.

  Then, the operation gate winning effect control processing is executed (S703). In this operation gate winning effect control process (S703), it is determined whether or not the operation gate winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and if the operation gate winning command is stored, On the condition that a predetermined performance execution condition is satisfied, an operation gate winning effect that notifies that the game ball has passed through the operation gate 53 is executed.

  Then, the special winning opening winning effect control processing is executed (S704). In the special winning opening winning effect control process (S704), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260, and the big winning opening winning command is stored. Then, on the condition that the predetermined effect execution condition is satisfied, the special winning opening winning effect is executed to notify that the game ball has entered the special winning opening 54.

  Then, the left general winning a prize winning effect control processing is executed (S705). In the left general winning award winning effect control processing (S705), it is determined whether or not the left general winning award winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and the left general winning award winning command is determined. If it is stored, the left general winning a prize winning effect that notifies that the game ball has entered one of the general winning holes 61 to 63 is executed on condition that the predetermined effect executing condition is satisfied. .

  Then, the right general winning a prize winning effect control processing is executed (S706). In the right general winning award winning effect control processing (S706), it is determined whether or not the right general winning award winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and the right general winning award winning command is determined. If it is stored, the right general winning a prize winning effect that notifies that the game ball has entered the general winning opening 64 is executed on condition that the predetermined effect executing condition is satisfied.

<Reception control command reception interrupt processing>
Next, the reception interrupt processing of the production control command will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing reception interrupt processing of a production control command. In this effect control command reception interrupt process, as described above, an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal from the main control board 100, and various effect control commands are acquired in this interrupt process. It is like this. The effect control command is configured to include 1 byte of MODE data and 1 byte of EVENT data, and the MODE data and the EVENT data are transmitted from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200 in this order. Hereinafter, for convenience of description, the MODE data is also referred to as a “first command” and the EVENT data is also referred to as a “second command”.

  First, when an interrupt based on a strobe signal from the main control board 100 occurs, it is determined whether the input value of the effect control command has been decided (S901). Specifically, the command value is read up to 5 times, and the input value becomes fixed when the same value is read twice consecutively. This is because reading of the effect control command may fail due to noise or the like, and the input value is not fixed until the same value is read twice consecutively.

  Then, it is determined whether the command received this time is the first command (MODE), in other words, whether it is the first command (MODE) or the second command (EVENT) (S902). When the command received this time is the first command (S902: YES), the first command is temporarily stored in the temporary area (S903). Then, the effect lottery random number is obtained from the effect lottery random number generation means 210, and this random number information is temporarily stored in the effect lottery random number storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S904). The production lottery random number is acquired when the production control command is received. The production control command is transmitted at a physically irregular timing such as when the game ball starts winning or when the special symbol starts changing. Therefore, this is an opportunity to prevent the occurrence of periodicity at the time of acquisition. By thus setting the random acquisition time of the effect lottery random number, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the same effect is unnaturally and repeatedly selected even in various effect lottery.

  On the other hand, if the command received this time is the second command (S902: NO), it is determined whether the first command has already been received (S905). That is, it is determined whether or not the production control commands are received in the order of the first command (MODE) and the second command (EVENT), and it is confirmed whether or not there is a contradiction in the combination of the production control commands. If there is no contradiction in the combination of effect control commands (S905: YES), the address indicated by the write pointer (pointer for writing) is acquired (S906). Then, the first command and the second command are stored in the effect control command buffer (ring buffer) of the sub-main information storage unit 260 in accordance with the address designated by the write pointer (S907). The stored command data is read in the command analysis process (S620) in the main process, and the effect control process corresponding to the type of effect control command is executed. Next, the address indicated by the write pointer is updated (S908). Further, the command data (first command) temporarily stored in S903 is cleared (S909). Then, the effect control command reception interrupt process is ended, and the process returns to the original process before the interrupt.

《Timer interrupt processing on the production control side》
Next, the production control timer interrupt processing will be described. 54 is a flowchart showing the effect control timer interrupt processing. This timer interrupt process is activated by a clock pulse at regular intervals, and is executed by interrupting the above-mentioned effect control side main process.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the registers in the sub-main CPU 201 are saved in the stack area of the RAM 203, and then the processing from S911 onward is sequentially executed. In this timer interrupt process, interrupts of priority level 2 or higher such as effect control command reception interrupts from the main control board 100 and watchdog timer interrupts are permitted (S911).

Then, a port input / output process is executed (S912). In this port input / output processing, input / output processing of port data in the I / O port circuit 204 is performed. In the input processing, various signals input to the I / O port circuit 204 (input port) are read and stored as input information. In the output process, various control signals (motor control signals) temporarily stored in the sub-main information storage unit 260 are read and output from the I / O port circuit 204 (output port).

  Subsequently, a device control data output process is executed (S913). In this device control data output processing, drive data for a predetermined time is read from the drive pattern data specified in the device management processing (S619) and set in the drive data storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. The drive data set in this process is data indicating control for 1 ms corresponding to the interrupt cycle. When the drive data is set in this process, the drive data is output from the I / O port circuit 204 (output port) to the motor driver 92 in the next timer interrupt process. Therefore, in this device control data output processing, the drive data is switched every interrupt cycle (1 ms) according to the drive pattern data.

  Next, the production timer update process is executed (S914). In this effect timer update processing, the values of various effect timers used for effect operation control are subtracted and updated for each interrupt cycle (1 ms in the present embodiment). The effect timer includes a timer for managing the variation time of the decorative design, a timer for managing the occurrence timing of the notice effect, and the like. This production timer manages the time schedule in the fluctuating production pattern, and manages time such as the drive timing of the movable accessory 24 and the lighting timing of the production lamp LP on the time axis. The effect timer is also used in the device control data output process (S913) and the lamp data update process (S917) in the effect control timer interrupt process.

  Subsequently, the button control timer updating process is executed (S915). The value of the effective time management timer for managing the effective operation time of the effect button 15 is subtracted and updated for each interrupt cycle (1 ms in this embodiment). The operation valid time is the time during which the operation input of the effect button 15 is valid.

  Subsequently, the task control counter updating process is executed (S916). In this task control counter update processing, the task counter value (“0” to “15”) is updated for each timer interrupt. Specifically, if the value of the task counter is "0" to "14", it is incremented by 1, and if the value of the task counter is "15", it is returned to "0". That is, this task counter can take a circulation cycle of 16 ms. Then, various tasks (task processing) are assigned corresponding to the value of the task counter updated this time, and the ramp control task (lamp data update processing of S917) and runaway monitoring are assigned according to the value of the task counter. Each processing such as a task (image CPU runaway monitoring processing in S9189) and an error management task (error management timer updating processing in S919) is executed. In this example, one of the values (“0” to “15”) of the task counter is assigned to the lamp control task, and the other two values (values at intervals of 8 ms) are used for runaway monitoring. It is assigned to the task, and the other one value is assigned to the error management task (the description of the other tasks is omitted). As described above, the cycle period of the task counter is set to 16 ms in order to match the minimum unit (16 ms) of the switching control of the effect lamp LP. The minimum unit (16 ms) of the switching control of the effect lamp LP corresponds to one frame time of the image frame, and the image effect and the lamp effect are synchronized.

Then, a ramp data update process is executed (S917). In the lamp data updating process, the lamp data for a predetermined time is read and set from the lamp pattern data specified in the device management process (S621). The lamp data set in this process is data indicating the lighting control for 16 ms which is the minimum unit of the switching control of the effect lamp LP. When the lamp data is set, the lamp data is automatically output from the output port (serial port) to the lamp connection board 91 by serial transfer. The ramp data output process is configured as a serial communication interrupt process, and is realized by sequentially writing the ramp data in the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit. The serial communication circuit serially converts the lamp data in the transmission buffer in 1-byte units, and outputs it to the lamp connection board 91 bit by bit in synchronization with the serial clock. This process is repeated until the transmission buffer becomes empty, whereby all the ramp data (all bytes) stored in the transmission buffer are output. Therefore, in this lamp data update processing, the lamp data is switched every frame time (16 ms) according to the lamp pattern, and this lamp data is output to the lamp connection board 91 by serial transfer.

  Subsequently, the image CPU runaway monitoring process is executed (S918). In this image CPU runaway monitoring process, the toggle signal input from the image control board 300 is monitored, and when the toggle signal does not continuously change for 1600 ms (about 50 to 100 frames), the image control board 300 is monitored. It is determined that the sub-sub CPU 301 is running out of control, and the effect control board 200 transmits a reset signal to the image control board 300. As a result, the image control board 300 side executes a predetermined reset process when the reset state of the sub-sub CPU 301 occurs. The toggle signal is a signal having a waveform in which H level / L level is alternately repeated for each frame time.

  Next, an error management timer process is executed (S919). In the error management timer process, the value of the error effect timer for managing the error effect time set in the error effect management process (S616) is subtracted and updated. Then, after all interrupts are enabled and the saved contents of the register are restored, the effect control side timer interrupt process is terminated and the process returns to the original process before the interrupt occurred.

<< Image control command transmission interrupt processing >>
Next, the transmission interrupt processing of the image control command will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the transmission interruption processing of the image control command. This image control command transmission interrupt processing occurs at preset constant intervals (500 μs).

  In this image control command transmission interrupt process, first, the image control command buffer of the sub-main information storage unit 260 is checked (S931). Then, the read pointer is acquired in the image control command buffer (S932). Next, it is determined whether the image control command is stored in the image control command buffer (S933). Whether or not the image control command is stored can be confirmed by, for example, the read pointer and the write pointer. If the read pointer and the write pointer match, it means that the image control command is not stored. If the image control command is stored (S933: YES), the image control command is read from the area pointed to by the read pointer (S934). The read image control command is set in the output buffer of the serial communication circuit designated as the output destination (S935). As a result, the image control command is serially transmitted from the serial port to the image control board 300. Next, the command data (command data transmitted in S935) is cleared (S936). Then, the read pointer is incremented by 1 and updated (S937). Then, the transmission interrupt process of the image control command is terminated, and the process returns to the original process before the interrupt.

  The main effects achieved in this embodiment are summarized below.

  First, according to the present embodiment, during the execution of the special game, the over-winning effect is executed when the game ball enters the special winning opening 54 in excess of the specified count number, so that the over-winning is achieved. By clearly informing the player of the occurrence, it is possible to enhance the player's satisfaction and excitement that he or she has enjoyed a special benefit that otherwise would not have been obtained. It is possible to improve the property.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the special winning opening 54 during the execution of the special game, the big winning opening winning effect (over winning effect) is performed, and the game ball is the general winning opening 64. By providing a general winning a prize winning effect (make bonus winning effect) with the opportunity to enter the game, a reduction will be added between the large winning a prize winning effect and the general winning award winning effect that are performed during the execution of the special game. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of the performance during the big hit, and as a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the general winning award winning effect (make bonus winning effect) is triggered by the fact that the game ball enters the general award winning opening 64 during the execution of the special game, so that the great winning a prize hole 54 is won. It is possible to prevent the player's sole interest from advancing the game, and to allow the player to enjoy the fun of aiming at the general winning opening 64, so that the player can actively play the game. It can be expected that the chances of putting the ball into the general winning opening 64 can be increased, the player's motivation can be increased, and the game can be made even more interesting. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced. It is possible to improve.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, by appropriately setting the execution time of the special winning hole count-up effect in relation to the big hit end demo period and the interval period, the timing when the special winning hole count-up effect is performed, and Regardless of the number of consecutive winning prize count up effects, this special winning prize count up effect can be properly completed without being delayed more than necessary. It becomes possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the current game situation by clearly adding a break from the variable display after the end of the special game, and as a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game. Becomes In particular, by configuring the total time of execution of the special winning opening count-up production for the specified number of counts to be shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration, multiple times can be set just before the end of the final round game. Even if multiple big prize hole count-up effects are performed consecutively based on the game balls successively entering the big prize hole, the big prize hole count-up effect will be given within the jackpot end demonstration period. It will be completed. Therefore, the special winning opening count-up effect does not extend beyond the jackpot end demo period until the variation display after the special game ends, and at the end of the special game and the start of the variation display of the first rotation. It is possible to clarify the break.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when the execution condition of the later special winning hole count-up effect is satisfied during the execution of the first special winning hole count-up effect, the execution of the first special winning hole count-up effect is executed. It is possible to prevent the process of the count effect from becoming complicated by starting the execution of the later-explained prize hole count-up effect, and also to divide the two prize-winning hole count-up effects in the future. By making it clear, the count-up display of the cumulative prize balls will not be unpleasant for the player, and the player will be satisfied with how the cumulative prize balls increase on the screen at a good tempo. It becomes possible to see with the result, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when an over-winning occurs, the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value and an emphasis effect is performed, or when an over-winning occurs in a situation where the emphasis effect is being performed. In this case, by executing this emphasis effect and the over-winning effect in an overlapping manner, there is a non-regular timing that the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific number and a non-regular timing that an over-winning occurs. Since it is possible to clearly inform the player of the special situation in which both match with each other by the appearance of both effects, it is possible to further enhance the player's feeling of uplifting and achievement, and as a result, the game It is possible to improve the interest of the.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when an over-winning prize or a bonus winning prize occurs in a situation where a specific error with a relatively high priority (importance) that prohibits or makes it difficult to continue the game occurs, In the above, the execution of the over-winning prize effect or the bonus winning prize effect is restricted so that the serious error in the gaming machine is not overlooked. On the other hand, when an over-winning or bonus win occurs in a situation where a non-specific error with a relatively low priority (importance) that prohibits or makes it difficult to continue playing occurs, an over-winning effect is created. Even if the execution of the bonus winning effect is allowed, there is no particular harm, and if the over-winning effect is obstructed by the error notification effect, the player's willingness to play may be diminished. I'm going to do. By appropriately notifying the occurrence of the error and the occurrence of the over-winning according to the type of the error occurring in the gaming machine in this way, the player's willingness to play the game without excessively hindering the occurrence of the over-winning performance. Since the game can be maintained, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when the continuous game is continued, the cumulative prize ball number is displayed not only during execution of the special game but also in the electric power support state after the end of the special game, It is expected that the player will proceed with the game while expecting to further increase the cumulative number of prize balls in the villa, which can further increase the player's motivation for the occurrence of a big hit and improve the operating rate of the game machine. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, during the execution of the special game, while the bonus winning effect is executed when the game ball enters the general winning opening 64 arranged in the right area PA2, the left area PA1 is executed. Even if a game ball enters the general winning openings 61 to 63 arranged in the above, the bonus winning effect is not executed even if the game winning ball is entered, so that the bonus winning effect is monotonous. It is possible to prevent becoming (mannericization) and to further enhance the joy of winning incidentally to the general winning opening 64 as a result of launching a game ball aiming at winning at the large winning opening 54. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when the over-winning and the bonus winning occur substantially simultaneously during the execution of the special game, the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect are overlapped, so that the large winning opening 54 is won. As a result of playing a game aiming for the entry of a game ball, it is possible to clearly inform the player of both the over-winning prize and the bonus winning that occurred incidentally, so that the fun of the special game can be further enhanced, It is possible to prevent monotonous performance during a big hit, and as a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, while the execution of the over-prize effect or bonus prize effect during the jackpot end demonstration period is restricted, the over-prize effect or bonus prize effect is performed during the interval period immediately after the final round game. By permitting, even though it is informed that the special game will end during the execution of the jackpot end demo, any winning effect (over-winning effect or bonus winning effect) will occur interruptively. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game production from having a sense of unity as a whole, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the fun of the game.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when a plurality of bonus prizes are generated within a predetermined period during the special game, execution of the multiple bonus prize effects is allowed while the predetermined bonus during the special game is performed. When multiple over-winnings occur within the period, only the over-winning performance corresponding to the first over-winning of the multiple over-winnings is executed, so that the over-winning performance can be performed without difficulty. It is possible to prevent the over-winning effect from becoming monotonous (making it into a rut) on the contrary, and as a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, a prize ball signal can be output once when one game ball enters the general winning opening 64, but one game ball enters the large winning opening 54. Since it is configured so that the prize ball signal can be output twice, the operating status of the gaming machine can be properly managed by the hall computer, and the true operating status of the gaming machine can be displayed by the data display. It is possible to inform the player and use it as a judgment material for selecting a game machine or as reference information for the game, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the above embodiment, the cumulative prize sphere number is notified by numerical value information (for example, “1000pt”), but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the cumulative prize sphere number is indicated by image information such as an icon or a meter. It may be configured to notify by.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the count-up effect (large prize hole count-up effect, general prize hole count-up effect) for the cumulative number of prize balls in the condominium has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration. Even if the above-mentioned characteristic configuration is applied to the count-up effect (large prize hole count-up effect, general prize hole count-up effect) for the cumulative number of prize balls during the execution of one big hit game (the number of medium prize balls for big hits) The same effect can be achieved.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, a pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment basically has the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, parts having the same configurations are designated by the same reference numerals. The description will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described. That is, in the following description, a configuration common to that of the first embodiment can be applied, except for special cases.

  Hereinafter, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment will be sequentially described. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment employs a small hit RUSH in which a "small hit" frequently occurs as a result of the hit determination of the special symbol when the gaming state is the latent probability change gaming state. The playability of this small hit RUSH will be described later.

  The determination of whether or not the special symbol of the second embodiment is true will be described. FIG. 56 is a diagram schematically showing the special symbol winning / missing lottery table of the second embodiment. In the figure, (A) is referred to in the gaming state (low probability state) in which the special symbol probability variation function is not operating, and (B) is a gaming state in which the special symbol probability variation function is operating (high probability state). ). In this special symbol winning / losing lottery table, the random number range of the random number per special symbol and the result of winning / swapping determination (big hit, small hit, out) are associated with each other. As shown in FIG. 56, in the determination of whether or not the special symbol is in the gaming state in which the probability varying function of the special symbol is not operating (low probability state), the random value per special symbol is in the range of "0 to 204". When it corresponds to, it becomes a big hit, and when the gaming state (high probability state) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is operating is a big hit when the random value per special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 818". Becomes That is, when the probability varying function of the special symbol operates, the winning probability of the big hit varies from the low probability “1/320” to the high probability “1/80”. In this way, the winning probability of the big hit changes according to the game state, but the winning probability of the big hit is designed to be the same in the winning / non-judgment determination of the first special symbol and the winning / non-judgment determination of the second special symbol. Here, even if the result of the winning / judgment determination does not correspond to the big hit, in the winning / judgment determination of the second special symbol, the small hit is won with a relatively high probability “1 / 1.1”. The winning probability of the small hit is designed to be the same winning probability regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state). In the second embodiment, the small hit is set only for the hit determination of the second special symbol, for example, the small hit is also set for the hit determination of the first special symbol, and the hit determination of the first special symbol is determined. Also, the second special symbol may be configured to win the small hit with a higher probability of the determination of win or failure.

In the second embodiment, of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, one of the special symbols is the result of the determination whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, during the variable display of the special symbol (during the big hit variation display),
When the other special symbol win / loss determination is executed, it is prohibited to derive a big hit as a result of the other special symbol win / loss determination, and only a small hit or outlier is derived. When the result of the hit determination of the other special symbol corresponds to the big hit, the result of the hit determination is forcibly replaced with the big hit. In other words, in the above special symbol win / loss table, when the gaming state (low probability state) in which the probability varying function of the special symbol is not operating, the random number per special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 204". In this case, the result of the corresponding judgment is forced out (replaced by out of the big hit), the probability variation function of the special symbol is operating in the gaming state (high probability state), the special symbol perturbation When the numerical value falls within the range of “0 to 818”, the result of the hit / fail judgment is forcibly deviated (replaced by deduction from the big hit). As a modification, in addition to the above special symbol win / loss lottery table, a big hit non-lottery table that does not include the jackpot judgment value (random number range) as a result of the win / loss judgment of the special symbol is prepared. During the fluctuation display of the special symbol big hit, refer to the table dedicated to the big hit non-lottery process, not the above special symbol win / loss table A method may be adopted. In this modified example, if the spec is that the small hit is not set as a result of the hit / miss determination, a method of immediately determining the out-of-match without performing the hit / disallow determination may be adopted.

  Next, the jackpot type (breakdown breakdown) of the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, when the result of the determination whether or not the special symbol is “big hit” is “big hit”, the big hit type (big hit symbol, symbol group) is determined by referring to the special symbol big hit symbol table shown in FIG. 57.

  FIG. 57 (A) is a diagram schematically showing the first special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this first special symbol big hit symbol table, for the symbol random number value per special symbol, the symbol group, the big hit type, the specified number of rounds of the big hit game, the opening time (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 of each round They are associated with each other (in this example, the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the first special symbol jackpot table, four kinds of jackpot types are set according to each symbol group. Specifically, it is divided into 10R specific jackpot (symbol group A), 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group B), 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group C), and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group D). In the 10R specific big hit (symbol group A), the number of specified rounds of the big hit game is 10, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 in one round game is 28 seconds. 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group B), 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group C) and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group D), the specified number of rounds in the jackpot game is 4 rounds, and a big prize in one round game. The opening time (maximum opening time) of the mouth 54 is 28 seconds.

  FIG. 57 (B) is a diagram schematically showing the second special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this second special symbol big hit symbol table, for the symbol random number value per special symbol, the symbol group, the big hit type, the specified number of rounds of the big hit game, the opening time (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 of each round They are associated with each other (in this example, description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the second special symbol jackpot table, five jackpot types are set according to each symbol group. Specifically, 10R specific jackpot (design group E), 6R specific jackpot (design group F), 4R specific jackpot 1 (design group G), 4R specific jackpot 2 (design group H), 2R normal jackpot (Symbol group I). In the 10R specific big hit (symbol group E), the number of specified rounds of the big hit game is 10, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 in one round game is 28 seconds. 6R specific big hit (symbol group F), the prescribed number of rounds of the big hit game is 6, the opening time (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 in one round game is 28 seconds. 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group G) and 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group H), the prescribed number of rounds of the jackpot game is 4 rounds, the opening time of the special winning opening 54 in one round game (maximum opening time ) Is 28 seconds. In the 2R normal big hit (symbol group I), the number of specified rounds of the big hit game is two, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 in one round game is 2 seconds.

  Of the various types of jackpots, each jackpot other than the 2R regular jackpot is an opportunity to execute a long open round game in which the jackpot 54 is opened for a long time (28 seconds) in all round games during the jackpot game. It is a big hit. On the other hand, the 2R normal big hit is a big hit that triggers a short open round game in which the big winning opening 54 is opened for a short time (2 seconds) in all round games during the big hit game. In the present embodiment, a long open round game is a round in which the opening time of the special winning opening 54 is set to allow or easily enter a prescribed number (full count: 15 balls) of game balls into the special winning opening 54. It is a game. The short-opening round game is a round game in which the opening time of the special winning opening 54 is set to be impossible or difficult to enter a predetermined number (full count: 15 balls) of game balls in the special winning opening 54.

  Although illustration is omitted, when the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is a small hit, one small hit symbol (symbol group) is selected from a plurality of types of small hit symbols (symbol group), and the 2 At the end of the variable display of the special symbols, the selected small hit symbol (symbol group) is to be stopped and displayed. The opening / closing pattern (opening time, number of times of opening) of the special winning opening 54 in the small hitting game may be configured to be different depending on the type of the small hitting pattern.

  Then, the game state of 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 58 is a transition diagram of the game state and the effect mode in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, a "normal game state", a "time saving game state", a "latent probability game state", and a "probability variation game state" are set as a plurality of types of game states. As the type of the game state, (1) the probability variation function of the special symbol, the variation time shortening function of the special symbol and the game state in which the electric Chu support function operates are called "probability variation state" or "probability variation game state", ( 2) The game state in which the probability variation function of the special symbol and the variation time shortening function of the special symbol operate and the electric Chu support function does not operate is called the "latent probability gaming state (latent probability variation gaming state)" or "latency probability variation state". However, (3) the special symbol probability variation function does not operate, the special symbol variation time shortening function and the electric Chu support function operate the game state is called "time saving state" or "time saving game state", (4 ) A state in which all functions are not operating is called a "normal state" or a "normal game state". Here, it can be said that the "probability variation game state", the "latent probability game state" and the "time saving game state" are advantageous game states for the player as compared with the "normal game state". In addition, each game state, by the combination of the operating state of the special symbol probability fluctuation function (high probability state / low probability state) and the operating state of the electric Chu support function (high base state / low base state), (1 ) Probability change game state is "high probability high base state", (2) latent probability game state is "high probability low base state", (3) time saving game state is "low probability high base state", (4) normal game state Can also be expressed as “low probability low base state”. Here, regarding the variation time reduction function of the special symbol, the variation time of the special symbol which is the main subject of the game in at least the game state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be reduced. In other words, it can be said that the variation time reduction function of the special symbol is operating, the variation time of the first special symbol is shortened in the gaming state in which the variation display of the first special symbol is the main subject of the game (normal gaming state). In the gaming state where the variable display of the second special symbol is the main subject of the game (time saving game state, latent probability gaming state, probability variation gaming state), the variation time of the second special symbol may be shortened.

FIG. 59 is a schematic diagram showing a game state setting table in the second embodiment. In the game state setting table, for each jackpot type (type of symbol group), a game state to be set after the jackpot game is finished is set. In the present embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit, the game state after the end of the big hit game is (A) big hit type (type of symbol group), and (B) game at the time of big hit winning It is set according to the status. In addition, the number of times each gaming state continues (the number of times the special symbol changes and displays) is the number of probability fluctuations that the probability change function of the special symbol operates (the number of probability changes), and the change time that the change time shortening function of the special symbol operates. It is set on the basis of the number of times of shortening (the number of times of time saving operation) and the number of times of electric power support (the number of times of electric power support operation) by which the electric power tube support function operates. It should be noted that “ST” is a period (abbreviation of special time) in which the jackpot probability is set to a high probability up to the prescribed fluctuation display count. In other words, the probability variation state (probability variation game state) is maintained up to the specified variation display number, but if a big hit does not occur within the specified variation display number, the number-of-definite variation machine that shifts to the normal state (normal game state) It is called an "ST machine". In that sense, the specified variable display count is also referred to as “specified ST count” or “ST count” below.

  If you win the "10R specific jackpot (symbol group A)", "4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group B)" in the first special symbol, regardless of the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning, after the jackpot game is over The latent probability game state is set as the game state. When shifting to the latent probability game state after the big hit game is finished, the probability variation number "100 times", the variation time shortening number "100 times", and the power support number "0 times" are set. This latent probability game state is continued until the number of times the variable display of special symbols reaches the specified ST number (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within this specified ST number (100 times). When the latent probability game state is ended by the number of times the variable display of the special symbol reaches the specified ST number (100 times), the next variable symbol display is changed to the normal game state.

  When the "4R special jackpot 2 (symbol group C)" is won in the first special symbol, the probability variation game state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game, regardless of the game state at the time of jackpot winning. When shifting to the probability variation game state after the end of the big hit game, the probability variation frequency “100 times”, the variation time reduction frequency “100 times”, and the electric power support frequency “100 times” are set. This probability variation game state is continued until the number of times the variable display of the special symbol reaches the specified ST number (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within this specified ST number (100 times). When the probability variation game state ends when the variable display number of special symbols reaches the specified ST number (100 times), the next variable symbol variation display is transferred to the normal game state.

  When the "4R normal big hit (symbol group D)" is won in the first special symbol, regardless of the game state at the time of big hit winning, the time saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. When shifting to the time saving game state after the big hit game is finished, the probability fluctuation number “0”, the fluctuation time shortening number “70”, and the electric power support number “70” are set. At this time, the short game state continues until the number of times of variable display of the special symbol reaches a specific number (70 times) or until the next big hit occurs within this specific number (70 times). When the time saving game state ends when the variable display number of special symbols reaches a specific number (70 times), the variable display of the next special symbol shifts to the normal game state.

If you win the "10R specific jackpot (symbol group E)", "6R specific jackpot (symbol group F)", "4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group G)" in the second special symbol, the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning According to, the game state set after the end of the big hit game is different. Specifically, when the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning is the normal gaming state, the probability variation gaming state is set as the gaming state after the completion of the jackpot game, and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time saving gaming state and the probability variation gaming. When the state or the latent probability game state, the latent probability game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. When transitioning to the probability variation game state after the jackpot game is over, the probability variation number "100 times", the variation time shortening number "100 times", and the number of electric support "100 times" are set, and the latent probability game after the jackpot game is finished. When transitioning to the state, the number of times of probability fluctuation “100 times”, the number of times of shortening of fluctuation time “100 times”, and the number of power support times “0 times” are set. Therefore, the probability variation game state is continued until the number of times the variable display of the special symbol reaches the specified ST number (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within this specified ST number (100 times). When the probability variation game state ends when the variable display number of special symbols reaches the specified ST number (100 times), the variable display of the next special symbol shifts to the normal game state. Similarly, the latent probability gaming state is continued until the number of times the variable display of the special symbol reaches the specified ST number (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within this specified ST number (100 times). The variable display count of special symbols is the specified ST count (100
When the latent probability game state ends by reaching (number of times), the next special symbol fluctuation display is shifted to the normal game state.

  When the "4R special jackpot 2 (symbol group H)" is won in the second special symbol, regardless of the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning, the probability variation gaming state is set as the gaming state after the termination of the jackpot game. When shifting to the probability variation game state after the end of the big hit game, the probability variation frequency “100 times”, the variation time reduction frequency “100 times”, and the electric power support frequency “100 times” are set. This probability variation game state is continued until the number of times the variable display of the special symbol reaches the specified ST number (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within this specified ST number (100 times). When the probability variation game state ends when the variable display number of special symbols reaches the specified ST number (100 times), the next variable symbol variation display is transferred to the normal game state.

  When the "2R normal big hit (symbol group I)" is won in the second special symbol, regardless of the game state at the time of big hit winning, the time saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. When shifting to the time saving game state after the big hit game is finished, the probability fluctuation number “0”, the fluctuation time shortening number “70”, and the electric power support number “70” are set. At this time, the short game state continues until the number of times of variable display of the special symbol reaches a specific number (70 times) or until the next big hit occurs within this specific number (70 times). When the time saving game state ends when the variable display number of special symbols reaches a specific number (70 times), the variable display of the next special symbol shifts to the normal game state.

  As described above, the occurrence of a big hit can be a trigger for shifting to the gaming state, but the occurrence of a small hit is not a trigger for shifting to the gaming state. That is, when the result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol is a small hit is a small hit, the fluctuation display of the final time that is the ending condition of the game state (for example, the fluctuation display at the 100th rotation in the probability variation game state and the latent probability game state, the time saving game) Except for the 70th rotation variation display), the gaming state at the time of the small hit win is continued as it is, and the transition control of the gaming state is not performed when the small hit win is triggered. That is, if the gaming state before the small hit occurrence is the normal gaming state, the gaming state during the small hit game and the gaming state after the small hit game also become the normal gaming state, and if the gaming state before the small hit occurrence is the time saving gaming state, During the small hitting game and after the small hitting game also becomes a time saving game state, if the gaming state before the small hit occurrence is the probability changing game state, the gaming state during the small hitting game and after the small hitting game will also be the certain changing game state. , If the gaming state before the small hit occurs is the latent probability gaming state, the gaming state during the small hit game and the gaming state after the small hit game also become the latent probability gaming state.

  Next, the effect mode of the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, a normal mode, a time saving mode, a latent probability mode, and a probability variation mode are set as a plurality of types of effect modes, and depending on a game state (or a variation pattern selection state) or the like. Thus, any one of the plurality of types of effect modes is selectively set, and the variable effect according to the set effect mode is executed.

Basically, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the "normal mode" is set, when the gaming state is the time saving gaming state, the "time saving mode" is set, and the gaming state is the latent probability gaming state. When the "latent probability mode" is set, when the game state is the probability variation game state, the "probability variation mode" is set. However, when transitioning to the normal state based on the end of the non-normal game state (time saving game state, latent probability game state, probability variation game state), a predetermined number of fluctuation displays immediately after the game state transitions to the normal game state In, the special effect mode is set, and when the variable display of the predetermined number of times is finished, the normal effect mode is set. The predetermined number of times is “4 times” as the variable display number of special symbols. This means that the total variable display count of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is "4 times". That is, when the variable display number of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number, it means that the total number of the variable display number of the first special symbol and the variable display number of the second special symbol has reached “4 times”. As a modified example, only the variable display number of the first special symbol reaches a predetermined number (4 times), or only the variable display number of the second special symbol reaches the predetermined number (4 times). As a trigger, the special mode may be ended (it may be shifted to the normal mode). Then, when one of the effect modes is set, as an effect (variable effect) that suggests that the user is staying in the effect mode, a background image dedicated to the effect mode (a rear display of the decorative pattern is displayed on the screen. (Background image) is displayed, and BGM dedicated to the effect mode is output from the speaker 11. In this way, the background image and BGM are set to be different for each effect mode, so that the player can recognize from the type of background image or BGM which effect mode the player is currently staying in. ing.

  Next, the variation time (variation pattern) of the special symbol of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 60 is a comparison table of variation times of special symbols in the second embodiment. In addition, in the second embodiment, the illustration of the variation pattern table of the special symbol is omitted, but in reality, like the first embodiment, the variation time (variation pattern) of the special symbol is the special symbol. It is selected by referring to the fluctuation pattern table.

  In (A) in the figure, the variation time of the special symbol when the game state is the normal game state is shown. The variation time of the first special symbol is set to "3 seconds to 60 seconds" when the result of the hit / miss determination is out of order, and is set to "30 seconds to 90 seconds" when the result of the hit / miss determination is a big hit. ing. The variation time of the second special symbol is set to "1000 seconds" when the result of the hit / miss determination is a small hit or out, and "30 seconds to 90 seconds" when the result of the hit / miss determination is a big hit. ing. That is, for the variation time of the second special symbol, an extremely long variation time (1000 seconds) is set as compared with the other variation times, except when the result of the hit determination is a big hit.

  In (B) of the figure, the variation time of the special symbol when the game state is a time saving game state, a probability variation game state, and a latent probability game state is shown. The variation time of the first special symbol is set to "1 second to 60 seconds" when the result of the hit determination is off, and "30 seconds to 60 seconds" when the result of the hit determination is a big hit. ing. The variation time of the second special symbol is set to "1 second to 3 seconds" when the result of the hit determination is out of order, and is set to "0.5 second" when the result of the hit determination is a small hit. If the result of the hit / miss judgment is a big hit, it is set to “30 seconds to 60 seconds”.

  Next, the normal symbol lottery in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 61 is a schematic diagram for explaining the normal symbol lottery in the second embodiment. In the figure, (A) shows a normal symbol winning / discarding lottery table, (B) shows a normal symbol variation pattern table, and (C) shows a normal electric auditors opening pattern table.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (A), the normal symbol hit probability is set to "1 / 1.02" when the electric Chu support function (ordinary symbol probability variation function) is not operating, and the electric Chu support It is set to "1 / 1.01" when the function (ordinary symbol probability variation function) is operating. Therefore, in the second embodiment, regardless of whether the gaming state is the low base state or the high base state, the winning design is a specification in which the winning is determined with a very high probability in the hit determination of the normal symbol.

The variation time of the normal symbol is set to "0.5 seconds" when the electric chewing support function (ordinary symbol variation time shortening function) is not operating, as shown in FIG. 61 (B). It is set to "0.2 seconds" when the function (normal symbol variation time reduction function) is operating. That is, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether the game state is the low base state or the high base state, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to an extremely short time. It should be noted that, regardless of which variation pattern of the normal symbol is selected, the fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the normal symbol is set to "0.1 seconds". The fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the normal symbol is the time when the normal symbol is definitely stopped and displayed (the time when the completely stopped state is held).

  As shown in FIG. 61 (C), the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 522 is “open for 1 second → close for 2 seconds → for 1 second” when the electric Chu support function (open extension function) is not operating. It is set to “Open → Close for 2 seconds → Open for 1 second”, and is set to “Open for 5.9 seconds” when the electronic Chu support function (open extension function) is operating. That is, as the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 522, in the low base state, the opening operation of 1 second is performed three times, so the total opening time is “3 seconds”, and in the high base state, it is 5.9 seconds. Since the opening operation is performed only once, the total opening time is "5.9 seconds".

  Subsequently, the simultaneous variation process (variation interruption process, variation forced stop process) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol will be described. FIG. 62 is a schematic diagram for explaining the simultaneous variation processing (variation interruption processing, variation forced stop processing) in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the determination of the variation start condition of the first special symbol and the determination of the variation start condition of the second special symbol are independently performed, and thus the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 71. The variable display and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 72 are simultaneously executed in parallel (a so-called parallel machine). That is, by separately and independently digesting the operation holding ball of the first special symbol and the operation holding ball of the second special symbol, for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the winning / absence lottery and the variable display corresponding to each of them. It is configured to perform the above in parallel. Therefore, of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, even if the variation display of one special symbol is performed for a long time, the variation display of the other special symbol in parallel with the variation display of this one special symbol Therefore, while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the other special symbol is not delayed. In the following, with regard to the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable display of the big hit is referred to as "big hit variable display", and the variable display of the small hit is referred to as "small hit variable display", which is off. The variable display of is referred to as "outside variable display".

(Variation interruption processing)
Here, of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation display of one special symbol is the big hit variation display, the small hit variation display or the out-of-range variation display, and the variation display of the other special symbol is the small hit variation display. In the situation where the variable display of one special symbol and the small hit variation display of the other special symbol are executed in parallel in the case of, before the variable display of one special symbol ends, the other When the small hit variation display of the special symbol ends, from the time when the small hit variation display of the other special symbol ends until the small hit game ends, the variable display of one special symbol is suspended ( Measurement of the fluctuation time related to the fluctuation display of one special symbol is interrupted). The suspension of the variable display is used to mean that the variable display is temporarily stopped (meaning that it is scheduled to be resumed later). Then, when the small hit game of the other special symbol ends, the measurement of the variation time related to the variation display of the one special symbol is restarted, and the measurement time of the variation time before the restart and the measurement time of the variation time after the restart When the total time of has reached a preset specified variation time (variation time according to the design value), the variation display of one special symbol will end.

(Variable forced stop processing)
On the other hand, among the first special symbol and the second special symbol, if the variation display of one special symbol is a big hit variation display, and the variation display of the other special symbol is a small hit variation display or outlying variation display, one Under the situation that the big hit variation display of the special symbol and the small hit variation display or the deviating variation display of the other special symbol are being executed in parallel, the small hit variation display or the deviating variation display of the other special symbol ends. Before, when the big hit variation display of one special symbol is finished, the measurement time of the small hit variation display or the outlying variation display of the other special symbol is the preset variation time (variation time as designed) Even before reaching, at the end of the big hit variation display of one special symbol, in conjunction with or in synchronization with it, the small hit variation display or the outlying variation display of the other special symbol is forcibly ended. In addition, in the case of forcibly ending the small hit variation display of the other special symbol, the symbol (fixed display symbol) that is stopped and displayed at the end of the small hit variation display is replaced with a symbol deviating from the small hit symbol. . That is, the small hit variation display of the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed by the deviation variation display (as a result, the small hit game is canceled). Thereby, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the special game in one special symbol (big hit game) and the special game in the other special symbol (small hit game) compete with each other. If the variation display of one of the special symbols starts as a big hit variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation display of the other special symbol that starts varying after that is other than the big hit variation display. Change display (that is, display as out-of-range change or small hit change display, and if the result is a random number corresponding to a big hit in the win / fail judgment process, the win / fail judgment result is forcibly replaced with off / off, and it is displayed as out of focus) Is desirable. In addition, when the variation display of one special symbol starts as a big hit variation display, the variation display of the other special symbol that starts to change after that is a variation display (the big hit or the small hit in the hit determination process) In the case of a random number, the win / fail judgment result is forcibly replaced with “off”, and the out fluctuation display may be displayed.

≪Playability of small hit RUSH≫
Next, the playability of the small hit RUSH (latent probability mode) will be described. Small hit RUSH (latent probability mode), small hits frequently appear in the second special symbol winning and losing judgment triggered by entering the game ball into the second starting opening 52, until the big hit is won It is a game that aims to continuously and intensively generate hit games.

  When the gaming state is a latent probability gaming state, when the game ball passes through the actuation gate 53, the hit is derived with an extremely high probability (1 / 1.02) in the judgment of the normal symbol. In this latent probability gaming state (low base state), when the winning / deciding judgment of the ordinary symbol is won, the ordinary electric auditors role product 522 performs the opening operation for one second three times. Therefore, if the player is hitting the right at the second starting opening 52, it is possible or easy to insert the game ball into the second starting opening 52 while the ordinary electric accessory 522 is in the open state. is there. In addition, in this latent probability game state, the winning probability of the small hit in the winning determination of the second special symbol is set to an extremely high probability (about 1 / 1.1), and moreover, when the small hit is won. Since the variation time of the two special symbols is set to an extremely short time (0.5 seconds), it is highly possible that a small hit frequently occurs based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 52.

  At this time, while the normal electric accessory 522 is performing the opening operation 3 times for 1 second, when the game ball enters the second starting opening 52 and wins the small hit, the second special symbol The fluctuation display of is ended within an extremely short time, and the small hit game is immediately started. Here, the normal electric accessory 522 is configured to perform the closing operation for 2 seconds immediately after performing the opening operation for 1 second (excluding the opening operation for the third time). Therefore, after the small hit game is started, the game ball flowing down in the right side area PA2 is a normal electric auditors's handpiece 522 (movable) while the normal electric auditors' handpiece 522 is performing a closing operation for 2 seconds. It easily passes through the upper surface of the member 524) and reaches the special winning opening 54. Therefore, during the execution of the small hitting game, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA2 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 524 without entering the ordinary electric accessory 522, and the big prize is arranged diagonally below it. By flowing down toward the mouth 54, it is possible to enter the special winning opening 54. Therefore, when the gaming state is the latent probability variation gaming state, the game ball is inserted into the second starting opening 52 and the variable display of the second special symbol is frequently displayed, until the next big hit occurs. It becomes a game property that a small hit game is executed with high frequency. Thereby, each time a small hit game is executed, about 2 to 3 game balls are inserted into the big winning opening 54, and about 20 to 30 prize balls are continuously acquired each time, so that the player It becomes possible to proceed with the game while increasing the number of balls.

  On the other hand, even when the gaming state is a time saving gaming state or a probability variation gaming state, the winning probability of the small hit is extremely high in the winning / non-judgment determination of the second special symbol, and further, the variation time of the small hit is set to be extremely short. Small hit games are more likely to occur frequently. However, in order to limit the playability of the small hit RUSH to the latent probability game state only, and for the gaming states other than the latent probability game state, the following measures are taken in order to suppress the increase of balls held by the small hit game. Has been.

  Specifically, when the game state is a time saving game state or a probability variation game state, when the game ball passes through the actuation gate 53, the hit is derived with an extremely high probability (1 / 1.01) in the judgment of the normal symbol. It In this gaming state (high base state), if the winning / deciding judgment of the ordinary symbol is won, the ordinary electric accessory 522 performs one opening operation for 5.9 seconds. Therefore, if the player is hitting the right at the second starting opening 52, it is extremely easy to insert the game ball into the second starting opening 52 while the ordinary electric accessory 522 is in the open state. . In addition, even in this short time gaming state or probability variation gaming state, the winning probability of the small hit in the win / no judgment of the second special symbol is set to an extremely high probability (about 1 / 1.1), and the small hit is won. Since the variation time of the second special symbol is set to an extremely short time (0.5 seconds), a small hit may occur frequently based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 52. high.

  Here, if the game ball enters the second starting port 52 and wins the small hit while the normal electric accessory 522 is performing the opening operation for 5.9 seconds, the second special symbol The variable display ends within an extremely short time, and the small hit game is immediately started. At this time, if the small hit game is executed while the ordinary electric accessory 522 continues the opening operation (while the second starting opening 52 is in the open state), it flows down the right side area PA2. The game sphere to be played is extremely easy to enter the normal electric auditors' handpiece 522 being opened, and the possibility of reaching the special winning opening 54 is significantly reduced. On the other hand, when the small hit game is executed after the ordinary electric accessory 522 is closed (after the second starting opening 52 is in the closed state), the subsequent game ball passes through the operation gate 53. Since the time from when the normal electric accessory 522 is opened is set to an extremely short time (fluctuation time 0.2 seconds + stop time 0.1 seconds), the normal electric accessory 522 is immediately opened. It is easy for game balls to enter 522. In other words, during the execution of the small hit game, the normal electric auditors product 522 (the second starting opening 52) is almost open, and the game ball flowing down the right side area PA2 is the normal electric electric player in the open state. It is extremely easy to enter the object 522 (the second starting opening 52), and it is extremely difficult to enter the object into the special winning opening 54 arranged downstream thereof. Therefore, when the game state is a time saving game state or a probability variation game state (high base state), even if small hits frequently occur in the second special symbol hit determination, the game ball reaches the big winning opening 54. The possibility is extremely low, and it is extremely difficult to increase the number of payouts by a small hit game.

  In addition, even when the gaming state is the normal gaming state (excluding the limited period), the winning probability of the small hit is set to an extremely high probability (about 1 / 1.1) in the determination of the second special symbol. However, since the variation time of the second special symbol is set to an extremely long time (10 minutes or more), the player enters the game ball into the second starting opening 52 and performs a game aiming for a small hit. Even so, the efficiency of digesting the second special symbol is very poor, and the small hit game cannot be frequently made. In the variable display of the predetermined number of times immediately after shifting to the normal game state, the limited frequency selection state is set as the variation pattern selection state, and the variation efficiency of the second special symbol is set relatively high (second special The variation time of the design will not be extremely long). That is, in the variable display of the predetermined number of times immediately after the transition to the normal game state (variable display within 4 rotations), than in the variable display after the display of the variable number of predetermined times (variation display after the fifth rotation), The variation time of the second special symbol (average value of the variation time) is shortened, and the variation efficiency of the second special symbol is set to be high.

Here, in the second embodiment, during execution of the small hit RUSH (latent probability mode), the cumulative prize ball number display area 733 of the screen displays the cumulative prize ball number, and the player can be notified of the cumulative prize ball number. Is configured. When a game ball enters the general winning opening 64 during execution of this small hit RUSH (latent probability mode), while the bonus winning effect is not performed, the cumulative prize ball addition display (general winning opening count) Up production) is performed. Also, during the execution of this small hit RUSH (latent probability mode), if the result of the determination result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the game ball entered the big winning opening 54 in the small hit game. For this, it is preferable that an addition display of the cumulative number of prize balls (a special winning hole count-up effect) is performed. As a modified example, while a small hit RUSH (latent probability mode) is being executed, even if a game ball enters the general winning opening 64, no bonus winning effect is produced and the cumulative prize ball addition display (general winning opening) It may be configured not to perform the count-up effect).

  In addition, also in the second embodiment, by applying the characteristic configuration of the above-described first embodiment, it is possible to achieve the same operational effect as that of the above-described first embodiment, and as a result, the entertainment of the game is interesting. It is possible to improve.

  As a modified example of the second embodiment, the second starting port 52 may be configured as a normally open winning port. That is, in this modification, the first starting port 51 and the second starting port 52 are configured as non-variable starting ports (normally opening type starting ports), and no ordinary electric accessory is mounted. FIG. 63 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a modified example of the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 63, the second starting opening 52 is arranged in the right side area (right side area PA2) of the center decoration 21, and the special winning opening 54 is arranged diagonally below and to the left of the second starting opening 52. The second starting opening 52 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the second special symbol game, and is provided with a second starting opening switch 521 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The second starting opening 52 is a normally-open type winning opening that is opened upward, and mainly allows a game ball (right-handed game ball) flowing down the right side area PA2 to enter. That is, the second starting opening 52 also serves as a general winning opening 64 through which the game balls flowing down the right side area PA2 can always enter, whether in the special gaming state or the non-special gaming state. It is configured to be able to enter at all times. In this modified example, when the game ball enters the second starting opening 52 (general winning opening 64) during execution of the special game, the bonus winning effect and the cumulative prize ball addition display (general winning opening count) Up production) is performed. When the game ball enters the second starting opening 52 (general winning opening 64) during the execution of the special game, only the cumulative prize ball number addition display (general winning opening count-up effect) is displayed. The winning effect may not be performed. Further, while the small hit RUSH (latent accuracy mode) is being executed, even if the game ball enters the second starting opening 52 (general winning opening 64), the bonus winning effect is not performed, and the accumulated prize balls are additionally displayed. It may be configured not to perform (general winning hole count-up effect).

[Third Embodiment]
Next, a pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment basically has the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, parts having the same configurations are designated by the same reference numerals. The description will be omitted, and different points will be mainly described. That is, in the following description, a configuration common to that of the first embodiment can be applied, except for special cases.

  Hereinafter, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment will be sequentially described.

In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1 (similar to the above-described first embodiment), the game ball flowing down the left side area PA1 is mainly the first starting opening 51 arranged below the center ornament 21. It is possible to enter any of the general winning openings 61 to 63. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA2 can mainly enter any of the operation gate 53, the general winning opening 64, the second starting opening 52, and the big winning opening 54 arranged on the right side of the center decoration 21. Is. At the lower end of the game area PA, there is provided an outlet 29 for discharging the rolling-down game balls to the back side of the game board 20 without entering the respective winning ports.

  In the third embodiment, as the number of prize balls (number of unit prize balls) to be paid out when one game ball enters each prize hole, the first starting port 51 is "4" and the second starting port 52 is “1”, general winning openings 61 to 64 are set to “3”, and special winning openings 54 are set to “11”. Note that the number of unit prize balls is not limited to that illustrated in the third embodiment, and other unit prize balls may be applied.

  Next, the determination of whether or not the special symbol of the third embodiment is true will be described. FIG. 64 is a diagram schematically showing the special symbol winning / missing lottery table of the third embodiment. 64 (A) is referred to in a gaming state (low probability state) in which the probability varying function of the special symbol is not operating, and FIG. 64 (B) is a gaming state in which the probability varying function of the special symbol is operating (high probability) State).

  As shown in FIG. 64, the random range of the random number per special symbol and the result of the special symbol hit determination (big hit, out) are associated with this special symbol hit / miss lottery table. In the determination of whether or not the special symbol is valid, the game state in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is not operating (low probability state) is a big hit when the random number per special symbol falls within the range of “0 to 655”, and the special symbol In the gaming state (high probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of is operating, it becomes a big hit when the random number per special symbol falls within the range of "0-1700". In other words, when the probability varying function of the special symbol is activated, the winning probability of the jackpot changes from "1 / 99.90" with low probability to "1 / 38.53" with high probability. In this way, the winning probability of the big hit changes according to the game state, but the winning probability of the big hit is set to be the same in the winning / failing judgment of the first special symbol and the winning judgment of the second special symbol. In addition, in the present embodiment, "small hit" is not set as the result of the special symbol hit determination, but "small hit" may be set as the result of the special symbol hit determination. The winning probability of the small hit is set to the same winning probability regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state).

  Subsequently, the big hit type (big hit breakdown) of the special symbol of the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, when the result of the hit determination of the special symbol is "big hit", the big symbol type (big hit symbol, symbol group) is determined by referring to the special symbol big hit symbol table shown in FIG. As described above, the "specific jackpot" means a jackpot (probable variation jackpot) that triggers the probability variation function of the special symbol after the jackpot game is over, and "normal jackpot" is a special jackpot after the jackpot game is over. It means a big hit (uncertain variation big hit) that does not trigger the probability variation function of the symbol. Although details will be described later, if you win a specific jackpot, the probability variation function of the special symbol operates after the jackpot game is over, and the variation display count of the special symbol is calculated from the end of the jackpot game It continues until it reaches (40 times) or until the next big hit occurs within this specified ST number (40 times). In addition, even if you win either "specific big hit" or "normal big hit", the variation time shortening function of special symbols and the electric Chu support function operate after the end of the big hit game, and start counting after the end of the big hit game. Then, the number of times the variable display of the special symbol reaches the predetermined number (15 times or 100 times) is continued.

FIG. 65 (A) is a diagram schematically showing the first special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this first special symbol big hit symbol table, for the symbol random number value per special symbol, the symbol group, the big hit type, the specified number of rounds of the big hit game, the opening time (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 of each round They are associated with each other (in this example, description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In this first special symbol jackpot symbol table, three types of jackpot types (symbol group), 10R specific jackpot (symbol group A), 4R specific jackpot (symbol group B), and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group C) And are set. In the 10R specific jackpot (symbol group A), the number of specified rounds of the jackpot game is "10 rounds", and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 in one round game is "28 seconds". 4R specific jackpot (symbol group B) and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group C), the prescribed round number of jackpot game is "4 rounds", the opening time of the big winning opening 54 in one round game (maximum opening time ) Is "28 seconds".

  FIG. 65 (B) is a diagram schematically showing a second special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this second special symbol big hit symbol table, for the symbol random number value per special symbol, the symbol group, the big hit type, the specified number of rounds of the big hit game, the opening time (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 of each round They are associated with each other (in this example, description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In this second special symbol jackpot symbol table, 5R jackpot type (symbol group), 10R specific jackpot (symbol group D), 4R specific jackpot (symbol group E), 10R normal jackpot (symbol group F) And 4R normal big hit (symbol group G) are set. In the 10R specific jackpot (symbol group D) and the 10R normal jackpot (symbol group F), the prescribed number of rounds of the jackpot game is "10 rounds", and the opening time of the big winning hole 54 in one round game (the maximum opening time) ) Is "28 seconds". 4R specific jackpot (symbol group E) and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group G), the prescribed number of rounds of jackpot game is "4 rounds", the opening time of the big winning opening 54 in one round game (maximum opening time ) Is "28 seconds".

  In the third embodiment, all the big hit types are big hit types that trigger the execution of a round game (long open round game) in which the big winning hole 54 is open for a long time in each round game during the big hit game. In this long open round game, the opening time (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 is set so that a predetermined number of game balls (full count = 10 balls) can be or can easily be entered into the special winning opening 54. It is a round game. In this third embodiment, the maximum opening time of each round game during the big hit game is set to a fixed time of "28 seconds" (although all round games are "long open round games"). In a predetermined round game or all round games during the same big hit game, a "short open round game" for setting the maximum opening time of the special winning opening 54 to a short time of "2 seconds" is provided. Even if the number of rounds is the same, it is possible to adopt a configuration having jackpot types with different actual round numbers (substantially the number of rounds in which a payout can be obtained). In the short opening round game, the opening time (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 is set to be impossible or difficult to enter a game ball having a specified count (full count = 10 balls) in the special winning opening 54. It is a round game.

  Then, the game state of 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 66 is a transition diagram of the game state and the effect mode in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, as a plurality of types of gaming states, a normal gaming state, a time saving gaming state, a latent probability gaming state, and a probability variation gaming state are set. As the type of the gaming state, (1) the probability variation function of the special symbol, the variation time shortening function of the special symbol and the gaming state in which the electric Chu support function operates are referred to as "probability variation state" or "probability variation gaming state", ( 2) The gaming state in which the probability variation function of the special symbol operates and the variation time shortening function of the special symbol and the electric Chu support function do not operate is called "latent probability gaming state" or "latent probability state", and (3) special The game state in which the variable time shortening function of the special symbol and the electric Chu support function operates without the probability variation function of the symbol is called the "time saving state" or the "time saving game state", and (4) all the functions operate The state not played is called a "normal state" or a "normal game state". Here, it can be said that the "probability variation game state", the "latent probability game state", and the "time saving game state" are advantageous game states for the player as compared with the "normal game state" in all the game states. Therefore, in the following, as a gaming state having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the normal gaming state, the probability variation gaming state, the latent probability gaming state, and the time saving gaming state are also referred to as advantageous gaming states.

In addition, each gaming state is a combination of the operating state (high probability state / low probability state) of the probability variation function of the special symbol and the operating state (high base state / low base state) of the electric Chu support function, (1 ) Probability change game state is "high probability high base state", (2) latent probability game state is "high probability low base state", (3) time saving game state is "low probability high base state", (4) normal game state Can also be expressed as “low probability low base state”. At this time, the variation time shortening function of the special symbol is a state in which the variation time of the special symbol that is the main subject of the game is shortened in at least the game state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Means that. That is, in the present embodiment, when the variation time reduction function of the special symbol operates, in the gaming state in which the variation display of the first special symbol is the main subject of the game (normal gaming state), at least the variation time of the first special symbol ( Average variation time) is shortened, variation display of the second special symbol is the main game of the game state (probability variation gaming state, latent probability gaming state, time saving game state), at least the variation time of the second special symbol (average variation) Time) is shortened.

  FIG. 67 is a schematic diagram showing a game state setting table in the third embodiment. In the gaming state setting table, for each jackpot type (type of symbol group), the number of times the special symbol probability variation function and variation time shortening function (electricity chew support function) after the jackpot game are set are set. ing. In the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit, the game state after the end of the big hit game is (1) a big hit type (a type of symbol group), and (2) a big hit winning game. It is decided according to the condition. In addition, the number of times each gaming state continues (the number of times the special symbol changes and displays) is the number of times the probability changing function of the special symbol operates (called the "number of times of probability change"), and the variable time shortening function of the special symbol operates. It is set in accordance with the number of times (referred to as “the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time”) and the number of times the electric power support function operates (referred to as “the number of electric power support”). In addition, in the present embodiment, the variable time shortening function of the special symbol and the electric Chu support function start the operations at the same time and end the operations at the same time. This is the number of times (therefore, in FIG. 67, the description of the “number of times of electric support operation” is omitted).

(Special figure 1_10R specific jackpot)
If you win the "10R special jackpot (symbol group A)" of the first special symbol, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the probability fluctuation frequency "40 times", fluctuation time reduction frequency "100 times", electric support The number of times “100 times” is set, and the probability variation game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. This probability variation gaming state is continued until the number of times the variable display of the special symbol reaches the specified ST number (40 times), or until the next big hit occurs within this specified ST number (40 times). When the probability variation game state ends by reaching the specified ST number (40 times) of the variable display number of special symbols, the next special symbol variable display is transferred to the time saving game state.

(Special figure 1_4R specific jackpot)
If you win the "4R special jackpot (symbol group B)" of the first special symbol, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal gaming state or the latent probability gaming state, the probability variation number "40 times", variation time The number of times of shortening “15 times” and the number of times of electric power support “15 times” are set, and the probability variation gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the big hit game. This probability variation gaming state, until the variation display number of special symbols reaches 15 times which is the variation time shortening number (or power support number) out of the specified ST number (40 times), or within the 15 times, the next Continue until a big hit occurs. When the probability variation game state ends when the variable display number of special symbols reaches 15 times, the transition from the variable display of the next special symbol to the latent probability game state is performed. This latent probability game state, until the variation display number of special symbols from the latent probability game state reaches 25 times (in other words, until reaching the prescribed ST number of 40 times), or this 25 Continue until the next big hit occurs within the number of times. When the latent probability game state ends by the number of times the variable display of the special symbol reaches 25 times since it becomes the latent probability game state, the normal game state is shifted from the variable display of the next special symbol. On the other hand, if the first special symbol "4R special jackpot (symbol group B)" is won, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a probability variation gaming state or a shortened gaming state, the probability variation number "40 times", variation The number of time reductions "100 times" and the number of electric power support "100 times" are set, and the probability variation game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. This probability variation gaming state is continued until the number of times the variable display of the special symbol reaches the specified ST number (40 times), or until the next big hit occurs within this specified ST number (40 times). When the probability variation game state ends by reaching the specified ST number (40 times) of the variable display number of special symbols, the next special symbol variable display is transferred to the time saving game state. This time saving game state, until the variable display number of special symbols after reaching the time saving game state reaches 60 times (in other words, until it reaches 100 times which is the variation time reduction number or the power support number), or , Within 60 times until the next big hit occurs. When the time saving game state ends by reaching 60 times the variable display number of special symbols since it becomes the time saving game state, the variable display of the next special symbol shifts to the normal game state.

(Special figure 1_4R normal jackpot)
If you win the "4R normal big hit (symbol group C)" of the first special symbol, if the gaming state at the time of the big hit is the normal gaming state or the latent probability gaming state, the probability variation number "0 times", variation time The number of times of shortening “15 times” and the number of times of electric power support “15 times” are set, and the time saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. At this time, the short gaming state is continued until the number of times the variable display of special symbols reaches 15 times, or until the next big hit occurs within 15 times. When the time saving game state ends by the variable display number of special symbols reaching 15 times, the next special symbol variable display shifts to the normal game state. On the other hand, if the first special symbol "4R normal big hit (symbol group C)" is won, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a probability variation gaming state or a time saving gaming state, the probability variation number "0", variation The number of time reductions “100 times” and the number of electric power support “100 times” are set, and the time saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. At this time, the short game state continues until the number of times the variable display of the special symbol reaches 100 times, or until the next big hit occurs within 100 times. When the time saving game state ends when the variable display number of special symbols reaches 100 times, the variable display of the next special symbol shifts to the normal game state.

(Special figure 2_10R specific jackpot)
If you win the "10R special jackpot (symbol group D)" of the second special symbol, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the probability variation frequency "40 times", variation time reduction frequency "100 times", electric support The number of times "100 times" is set, and the probability variation game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. This probability variation gaming state is continued until the number of times the variable display of the special symbol reaches the specified ST number (40 times), or until the next big hit occurs within this specified ST number (40 times). When the probability variation game state ends by reaching the specified ST number (40 times) of the variable display number of special symbols, the next special symbol variable display is transferred to the time saving game state. This time saving game state, until the variable display number of special symbols after reaching the time saving game state reaches 60 times (in other words, until it reaches 100 times which is the variation time reduction number or the power support number), or , Within 60 times until the next big hit occurs. When the time saving game state ends by reaching 60 times the variable display number of special symbols since it becomes the time saving game state, the variable display of the next special symbol shifts to the normal game state.

(Special figure 2_4R specific jackpot)
If you win the "4R special jackpot (symbol group E)" of the second special symbol, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the probability fluctuation frequency "40 times", fluctuation time reduction frequency "100 times", electric support The number of times “100 times” is set, and the probability variation game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. This probability variation gaming state is continued until the number of times the variable display of the special symbol reaches the specified ST number (40 times), or until the next big hit occurs within this specified ST number (40 times). When the probability variation game state ends by reaching the specified ST number (40 times) of the variable display number of special symbols, the next special symbol variable display is transferred to the time saving game state. This time saving game state, until the variable display number of special symbols after reaching the time saving game state reaches 60 times (in other words, until it reaches 100 times which is the variation time reduction number or the power support number), or , Within 60 times until the next big hit occurs. When the time saving game state ends by reaching 60 times the variable display number of special symbols since it becomes the time saving game state, the variable display of the next special symbol shifts to the normal game state.

(Special figure 2_10R normal jackpot)
If you win the second special symbol "10R normal big hit (symbol group F)", regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit, probability fluctuation frequency "0 times", fluctuation time reduction frequency "100 times", electric support The number of times "100 times" is set, and the time saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. At this time, the short game state continues until the number of times the variable display of the special symbol reaches 100 times, or until the next big hit occurs within 100 times. When the time saving game state ends when the variable display number of special symbols reaches 100 times, the variable display of the next special symbol shifts to the normal game state.

(Special figure 2_4R normal big hit)
If you win the "4R normal jackpot (symbol group G)" of the second special symbol, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the probability fluctuation frequency "0 times", fluctuation time reduction frequency "100 times", electric support The number of times "100 times" is set, and the time saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. At this time, the short game state continues until the number of times the variable display of the special symbol reaches 100 times, or until the next big hit occurs within 100 times. When the time saving game state ends when the variable display number of special symbols reaches 100 times, the variable display of the next special symbol shifts to the normal game state.

  Next, the variation pattern selection state of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 68 is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern selection state table of the third embodiment.

  The variation pattern selection state is one of the selection conditions referred to when selecting a variation pattern (variation pattern table) of a special symbol. In the present embodiment, as the nine types of variation pattern selection states, “selection state 0”, “selection state 1”, “selection state 2”, “selection state 3”, “selection state 4”, “selection state 5”, "Selected state 6", "selected state 7", and "selected state 8" are set. It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 68, seven types of “selection states 1 to 7” among the nine types of variation pattern selection states are common to a plurality of game states, that is, common to a plurality of game states. You are using a table. The "use of a common table" here may mean that one table is used for any of a plurality of gaming states, or the tables are divided in each gaming state, but the contents of each table are different. It may also mean that the fluctuation pattern candidates to be selected and their selection rates are the same.

  The selection state 0 is a variation pattern selection state set corresponding to the normal game state (low probability / low base). In addition, this selection state 0 is set corresponding to the variable display when the effect mode is the “normal mode” described later.

  The selection state 1 is a variation pattern selection state set corresponding to the normal game state (low probability / low base) or the latent probability game state (high probability / low base). In addition, this selection state 1 is set corresponding to the variable display when the effect mode is the "pullback mode" described later.

  The selection state 2 is a variation pattern selection state set corresponding to the normal game state (low probability / low base) or the latent probability game state (high probability / low base). Further, the selection state 2 is set in correspondence with the four-rotational fluctuation display immediately after the selection state 4 is ended (four-rotational fluctuation display after leaving the electrical support state). In addition, as shown in FIG. 66, when there are operation holding balls of the second special symbol at the end of the “chance mode” of 15 rotations (when the selection state 4 ends), the number of the operation holding balls ( The "chance mode" is continued in this selection state 2 for a maximum of 4 pieces. On the other hand, when the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is lost in the middle of the selected state 2, from the variable display of the first special symbol which is the next variable display, the "pullback mode" is set in the selected state 2. It will be.

  The selection state 3 is a variation pattern selection state set corresponding to the probability variation game state (high probability / high base) or the time saving game state (low probability / high base). In addition, this selection state 3 is set corresponding to the variable display of the 1st to 14th rotations when the effect mode is the “chance mode” described later.

  The selection state 4 is a variation pattern selection state set corresponding to the probability variation game state (high probability / high base) or the time saving game state (low probability / high base). In addition, this selection state 4 is set corresponding to the fluctuating display of the fifteenth rotation (the last-time fluctuating display of the electric support state) when the effect mode is the “chance mode” described later.

  The selection state 5 is a variation pattern selection state set corresponding to the probability variation game state (high probability / high base) or the time saving game state (low probability / high base). In addition, this selection state 5 is set corresponding to the variable display of the first to fifth rotations when the effect mode is the "rush mode" described later.

  The selection state 6 is a variation pattern selection state set corresponding to the probability variation game state (high probability / high base) or the time saving game state (low probability / high base). In addition, this selection state 6 is set corresponding to the variable display of the 6th to 30th rotations when the effect mode is the "rush mode" described later.

  The selection state 7 is a variation pattern selection state set corresponding to the probability variation game state (high probability / high base) or the time saving game state (low probability / high base). In addition, this selection state 7 is set corresponding to the variable display of the 31st to 40th rotations when the effect mode is the "rush mode" described later.

  The selection state 8 is a variation pattern selection state set corresponding to the time saving game state (low probability / high base). In addition, this selection state 8 is set corresponding to the variable display of the 41st to 100th rotations when the effect mode is the "rush mode" described later.

  Next, the order of transition of the variation pattern selection state will be described. FIG. 69 is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern selection state transition table. In this variation pattern selection state transition table, the transition order of variation pattern selection states (selection states 0 to 8) is defined for each jackpot type.

  In the third embodiment, as a transition pattern of the variation pattern selection state, the variation pattern selection state is “selection state 3 (14 times) → selection state 4 (1 time) → selection state 2 (4 times) → selection state 1 (21 Pattern) (transition pattern A) and the variation pattern selection state is “selection state 5 (5 times) → selection state 6 (25 times) → selection state 7 (10 times) → selection” A pattern (transition pattern B) that transits in the order of “state 8 (60 times) → selected state 0” is set. Since the selected state 0 continues until the next big hit occurs, the number of stays in the selected state 0 becomes an indefinite number.

  When the "10R special jackpot (symbol group A)" of the first special symbol is won, the variation pattern selection state is "selection state 5 (5 (Time) → selected state 6 (25 times) → selected state 7 (10 times) → selected state 8 (60 times) → selected state 0 ”.

If the "4R special jackpot (symbol group B)" or "4R normal jackpot (symbol group C)" of the first special symbol is won, the variation pattern selection state is the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal gaming state or the latent state. If the certain game state, after the jackpot game is over, "selection state 3 (14 times) → selection state 4 (1 time) → selection state 2 (4 times) → selection state 1 (21 times) → selection state 0 If the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a probability variation gaming state or a time saving gaming state, after the jackpot game ends, "selection state 5 (5 times) → selection state 6 (25 times) → selection State 7 (10 times) → selected state 8 (60 times) → selected state 0 ”.

  The second special symbol "10R specific jackpot (design group D)", "4R specific jackpot (design group E)", "10R normal jackpot (design group F)", "4R normal jackpot (design group G)" If, that is, when it is a big jackpot in the second special symbol, the variation pattern selection state, regardless of which jackpot type is won, regardless of the gaming state at the time of the jackpot win, the jackpot game end After that, the state transits in the order of “selected state 5 (5 times) → selected state 6 (25 times) → selected state 7 (10 times) → selected state 8 (60 times) → selected state 0”.

  Subsequently, a variation pattern of the special symbol of the third embodiment will be described. 70 to 78 are schematic diagrams showing a variation pattern table of special symbols.

  As for the variation pattern table of the special symbol, as shown in FIGS. 70 to 78, the columns referred to by the first special symbol and the second special symbol are different, and the same special symbol variation pattern random value is acquired. Even if it does, different variation patterns can be selected. Here, the number of operation-holding balls described in each figure (“holding 0 pieces”, “holding 1-2 pieces”, “holding 3 pieces”) is a variation pattern lottery of the first special symbol, The number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol (the number of operation-holding balls after the holding digestion) means, if it is a variation pattern lottery of the second special symbol, the number of operation-holding balls of the second special symbol (after the holding digestion) The number of holding balls). The number of operation-holding balls is the number of operation-holding balls that exist at the time of the variation pattern lottery (at the start of the change display / after the hold exhaustion) (not including the operation-holding balls exhausted by the change display). .. In addition, as the modification, you may use the total value of the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Further, during a predetermined limited frequency period (a state in which a special variation pattern table is referred to, and particularly, a variation pattern of the final variation in the high-probability-high base state or the low-probability-high base state is selected), the first special Regardless of the symbol and the second special symbol, the variation pattern lottery may be performed using a common table, and in that case, in particular, it is possible to use the common table when selecting the variation pattern of the outlier. Desirable, that is, when selecting a variation pattern of the outlier, it is desirable that the selection tendency of the variation pattern is common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when selecting the variation pattern of the big hit, the first special symbol Depending on the symbol, the second special symbol, the type of special game that can be executed may be different, so it is desirable not to use a common table in order to select a variation pattern corresponding to the type of special game, that is, variation of the big hit. When selecting a pattern, it is desirable that the selection tendency of the variation pattern be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and in particular, it will be different from the special game type in the third embodiment, but the second A variation pattern corresponding to a special game (for example, 3R certainty variation big hit) that is not executed during the big hit of the special symbol and is executed during the big hit of the first special symbol, and is not executed during the big hit of the first special symbol. It is desirable that the tendency of the variation pattern is different from the variation pattern corresponding to the special game to be executed (for example, 9R certainty variation big hit). In addition, "using a common table" here may mean that one table is used for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, or the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Although the tables are separated from each other by the design, it may mean that the contents of the tables (variable pattern candidates to be selected, selection rates thereof, etc.) are the same.

The variation effect of the decorative symbol that is performed in conjunction with the variable display of the special symbol is determined based on the type (variation time) of the variation pattern of the special symbol. 70 to 78, for reference, the content of the variation effect set corresponding to each variation pattern (variation time) is also described. In the figure, "ultra-shortening variation", "shortening variation", and "normal variation" are three rows of decorative patterns that fluctuate and do not go through the reach state even once, and become "out of focus" in so-called variability. Is. Hereinafter, the ultra-shortening fluctuation, the shortening fluctuation, and the normal fluctuation are collectively referred to as "non-reach outliers". In this non-reach deviation, the variation mode differs from each other in that the variation display is stopped in a shorter time than the normal variation and the ultra-short variation is shorter than the short variation.

  "N-reach (normal reach)" is a state (reach state) where the same decorative pattern is stopped in two rows (generally the left row and the right row) of the three rows of decorative patterns, and the remaining one row (general) In the reach production, if different decorative designs stop in the middle row), it becomes “out”, and if the same decorative design stops in the remaining one row (generally in the middle row), it becomes “big hit”.

  "SP reach" is a reach production that has a relatively high expectation for a big hit compared to the N reach described above. It is a reach production. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of SP reach A to E are prepared as the types of SP reach.

  "Immediate hit" is an effect in which the variation time is set to an extremely short time, and immediately after the start of the variation display, the "big hit" is immediately achieved without passing through the reach state. In addition, the "special effect" is an effect in which the premier character suddenly rushes into the variable display and becomes a "big hit".

  Although not explicitly shown in the figure, pseudo-relation (pseudo-reproduction) may be performed. In the "pseudo-run", the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (pseudo-stop, temporarily stopped) and re-variably displayed during one variable display of the decorative pattern, so that the variable display is simulated multiple times. It is an effect (pseudo continuous effect, pseudo variation effect, pseudo continuous variation effect, re-variation effect) that looks like this. In this pseudo-continuous production, the pseudo-variation in which all of the three rows of decorative symbols start changing or re-changing and then temporarily stop or definitely stop is executed a plurality of times. The number of times of this pseudo fluctuation is also referred to as “pseudo consecutive times”. Then, it is shown that the larger the number of times of this pseudo-repeating, the higher the possibility of developing to SP reach with high expectation of a big hit. In addition, among the three rows of decorative designs, the left and right rows of the decorative designs are temporarily stopped in the reach state (temple), while the left and right rows of the decorative designs are temporarily stopped in the non-reach state. The jackpot expectation is higher than in the case.

(Variation pattern table 0)
FIG. 70 is a schematic diagram showing the fluctuation pattern table 0. The fluctuation pattern table 0 is a fluctuation pattern table set when the fluctuation pattern selection state during the current stay is the selection state 0. The variation pattern table 0 is configured such that the table contents are different depending on the result (big hit, miss) of the special symbol.

In the variation pattern table 0 for out-of-range, there are five types of variation patterns PH0-1 (super shortening variation: 4 seconds), PH0-2 (shortening variation: 8 seconds), PH0-3 (normal variation: 12 seconds), PH0. -4 (N reach: 20 seconds) and PH0-5 (SP reach A: 50 seconds) are set. When the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is “out”, any one of the five types of fluctuation patterns PH0-1 to PH0-5 is selected. In the present embodiment, when the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is “out”, the reference destination is according to the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol (0/1/2/3) The table contents are set to be different, and even if the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value is the same, different kinds of fluctuation patterns can be selected. Specifically, the larger the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol, the easier it is to select the variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is set relatively short, and the number of operation retaining balls of the first special symbol is The smaller the number, the easier the variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is set to be relatively long. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is "out", it does not depend on the number of operation holding balls of the second special symbol (0/1/2/3) Variation pattern PH0-
Only 1 is selected. As a modified example, when the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is “out”, it does not depend on the number of operation pending of the second special symbol, from among the variation patterns PH0-1 to PH0-5, The variation pattern PH0-1 of the ultra-shortening variation may be most easily selected (the selection ratio is preferably the same regardless of the number of operation holding balls of the second special symbol).

  In the variation pattern table 0 for big hits, three types of variation patterns PA0-1 (N reach: 20 seconds), PA0-2 (SP reach A: 50 seconds), PA0-3 (special effect: 40 seconds) are set. Has been done. When the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is "big hit", any one of the three types of variation patterns PA0-1 to PA0-3 is selected irrespective of the big hit type. On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is "big hit", only the variation pattern PA0-3 of the special effect is selected regardless of the big hit type. It should be noted that the special effect is an effect in which a big hit is determined when a predetermined premier character appears (an effect in which the big hit expectation rate is set to 100%). In addition, even when the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol or the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is “out”, the “specific effect” may be selected. In that case, if the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is “out”, the special effect is not selected, while the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is “out”. When it is, the special effect may be selected. On the contrary, if the result of the judgment result of the second special symbol is "out", the special effect is not selected, while the result of the judgment of the first special symbol is "out" A special effect may be selected for the.

(Variation pattern table 1)
FIG. 71 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 1. The fluctuation pattern table 0 is a fluctuation pattern table set when the fluctuation pattern selection state during the current stay is the selection state 1. The fluctuation pattern table 1 is configured such that the table contents are different depending on the result (big hit, miss) of the special symbol.

  In the fluctuation pattern table 1 for deviation, four kinds of fluctuation patterns PH1-1 (super shortening: 4 seconds), PH1-2 (shortening: 8 seconds), PH1-3 (normal: 12 seconds), PH1-4 ( SP reach B: 60 seconds) is set. When the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is “out”, any one of the four types of fluctuation patterns PH1-1 to PH1-4 is selected. In the present embodiment, when the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is “out”, the reference destination is according to the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol (0/1/2/3) The table contents are set to be different, and even if the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value is the same, different kinds of fluctuation patterns can be selected. Specifically, the larger the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol, the easier it is to select the variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is set relatively short, and the number of operation retaining balls of the first special symbol is The smaller the number, the easier the variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is set to be relatively long. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is "out", it does not depend on the number of operation holding balls of the second special symbol (0/1/2/3) The fluctuation pattern PH1-1 is selected. In addition, as a modification, when the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is “out”, it does not depend on the operation pending number of the second special symbol, from among the variation patterns PH1-1 to PH1-4, The variation pattern PH1-1 of the ultra-shortening variation may be most easily selected (the selection ratio is preferably the same regardless of the number of operation retaining balls of the second special symbol).

  In the variation pattern table 1 for big hits, only one variation pattern PA1-1 (SP reach B: 60 seconds) is set. When the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is "big hit", the variation pattern PA1-1 is selected regardless of the big hit type. Similarly, when the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is "big hit", the variation pattern PA1-1 is selected without depending on the big hit type.

(Variation pattern table 2)
FIG. 72 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 2. The fluctuation pattern table 2 is a fluctuation pattern table set when the fluctuation pattern selection state in which the user is currently staying is the selection state 2. The variation pattern table 2 is configured such that the table contents are different depending on the result (big hit, out) of the special symbol. The fluctuation pattern table 2 is set corresponding to the fluctuation display of 4 rotations immediately after the fluctuation display of 15 rotations in the chance mode is finished (immediately after leaving the power support state). Here, as shown in FIG. 66, when there are operation holding balls of the second special symbol at the end of the electric power support state (chance mode for 15 rotations), the number of the operation holding balls (maximum 4 pieces) ), The chance mode is continued, and the variation pattern table 2 is referred to in this chance mode. On the other hand, when the operation holding ball of the second special symbol disappears within 4 rotations immediately after leaving the electric support state, the variable display of the first special symbol which is the next variable display is changed to the pullback mode, In this pullback mode, the fluctuation pattern table 2 is referred to.

  One variation pattern PH2-1 (super shortening: 2 seconds) is set in the variation pattern table 2 for out-of-range. If the result of the judgment result of the first special symbol is "off", it does not depend on the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol (0/1/2/3), and the variation pattern of the ultra-shortening variation PH2-1 is selected. Similarly, if the result of the judgment result of the second special symbol is “out”, it does not depend on the number of operation-holding balls of the second special symbol (0/1/2/3), and the super shortening fluctuation Fluctuation pattern PH2-1 is selected. That is, in the variation display (variation display of four rotations immediately after the electric support state ends) in which this variation pattern table 2 is referred to, the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is “out”. In this case, the variation pattern PH2-1 of the ultra-shortening variation is always selected.

  In the variation pattern table 2 for big hits, two types of variation patterns PA2-1 (immediate hit: 3 seconds) and PA2-2 (SP reach B: 70 seconds) are set. When the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is "big hit", the variation pattern PA2-2 is selected without depending on the big hit type. On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is "big hit", the variation pattern PA2-1 is selected without depending on the big hit type.

(Variation pattern table 3)
FIG. 73 is a schematic diagram showing the fluctuation pattern table 3. The fluctuation pattern table 3 is a fluctuation pattern table set when the fluctuation pattern selection state during the current stay is the selection state 3. The variation pattern table 3 is configured such that the table contents are different depending on the result (big hit, miss) of the special symbol.

  In the fluctuation pattern table 3 for out-of-range, four kinds of fluctuation patterns PH3-1 (super shortening: 2 seconds), PH3-2 (shortening: 4 seconds), PH3-3 (normal: 12 seconds), PH3-4 ( SP reach C: 80 seconds) is set. If the result of the judgment result of the first special symbol is "off", it does not depend on the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol (0/1/2/3), and the variation pattern of the ultra-shortening variation PH3-3 is selected. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is “out”, any one of the four types of fluctuation patterns PH3-1 to PH3-4 is selected. In the present embodiment, if the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is out of alignment, depending on the number of operation holding balls of the second special symbol (specifically, the presence or absence of the operation holding ball of the second special symbol), refer to The above table contents are set to be different, and even if the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value is the same, different kinds of fluctuation patterns can be selected. Specifically, than when the operation holding ball of the second special symbol does not exist, when the operation holding ball of the second special symbol exists, the variation time of the second special symbol is set relatively short. It is easy to select different fluctuation patterns.

  In the variation pattern table 3 for big hits, one variation pattern PA3-1 (SP reach C: 90 seconds) is set. When the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is "big hit", the variation pattern PA3-1 is selected without depending on the big hit type. Similarly, when the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is "big hit", the variation pattern PA3-1 is selected without depending on the big hit type. That is, when the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is "big hit", SP reach C ( A variation pattern PA3-1 that develops into a normal battle effect) is selected.

(Variation pattern table 4)
FIG. 74 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 4. The variation pattern table 4 is a variation pattern table set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the selection state 4. The fluctuation pattern table 4 is configured such that the table contents are different depending on the result (big hit, out) of the special symbol hit determination.

  One type of variation pattern PH4-1 (final battle defeat production or final battle victory production: 35 seconds) is set in the variation pattern table 4 for out-of-range. If the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is “out”, the variation pattern PH4-1 does not depend on the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol (0/1 to 2/3). Selected. Similarly, when the result of the judgment result of the second special symbol is “out”, the variation pattern PH4 does not depend on the number of operation-holding balls (0/1 to 2/3) of the second special symbol. -1 is selected. In addition, as described in the column of "contents of production" in the drawing, when the result of the judgment result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is "out", at the time of execution of the judgment result (the concerned When there is no action-holding ball that becomes a "big hit" in the action-holding ball of the second special symbol at the time of starting the variation display), the final battle defeat production is executed, and at the time of executing the hit / absence determination (starting the variation display). When there is an operation holding ball that is a "big hit" in the operation holding balls of the second special symbol, the final battle victory effect is executed. However, in the present embodiment, the action holding ball of the second special symbol is preferentially digested over the action holding ball of the first special symbol, so that the judgment result of the first special symbol is executed (first At the start of the variable display of the special symbol), there is no operation holding ball of the second special symbol (the operation holding ball that becomes a "big hit"), and the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is "out." When it becomes, only the final battle defeat effect is executed, only when the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is "out", the final battle victory effect or the final battle defeat effect is selectively executed. In addition, as will be described later in detail, when the final battle effect is executed by the result of the determination result of the second special symbol being “off”, when the final battle effect is finished (the variation display is finished. At the time), using the symbol fixing time (symbol fixing time B which will be described later), a fixed time effect after the final fluctuation is performed.

  In the variation pattern table 4 for big hits, one variation pattern PA4-1 (final battle victory effect: 40 seconds) is set. When the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is "big hit", the variation pattern PA4-1 is selected. Similarly, when the result of the determination result of the second special symbol is "big hit", the variation pattern PA4-1 is selected.

(Variation pattern table 5)
FIG. 75 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 5. The variation pattern table 5 is a variation pattern table set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the selection state 5. The variation pattern table 5 is configured so that the table contents are different depending on the result (big hit, out) of the special symbol hit determination.

In the fluctuation pattern table 5 for the deviation, two kinds of fluctuation patterns PH5-1 (super shortening:
4 seconds) and PH5-2 (normal fluctuation: 12 seconds) are set. If the result of the judgment result of the first special symbol is “out”, it does not depend on the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol (0/1 to 2/3), and the fluctuation pattern PH5 of normal fluctuation -2 is selected. Similarly, if the result of the judgment result of the second special symbol is “out”, it does not depend on the number of operation-holding balls of the second special symbol (0/1/2/3), and the super shortening fluctuation Fluctuation pattern PH5-1 is selected.

  In the variation pattern table 5 for big hits, one variation pattern PA5-1 (immediate hit: 5 seconds) is set. When the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is "big hit", the variation pattern PA5-1 is selected without depending on the big hit type. Similarly, when the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is "big hit", the variation pattern PA5-1 is selected without depending on the big hit type.

(Variation pattern table 6)
FIG. 76 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 6. The variation pattern table 6 is a variation pattern table set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the selection state 6. The variation pattern table 6 is configured such that the table contents are different depending on the result (big hit, out) of the special symbol.

  In the fluctuation pattern table 6 for deviation, four kinds of fluctuation patterns PH6-1 (super shortening: 2 seconds), PH6-2 (shortening: 4 seconds), PH6-3 (normal: 12 seconds), PH6-4 ( SP reach D: 50 seconds) is set. If the result of the judgment result of the first special symbol is “out”, three types of fluctuation patterns PH6 do not depend on the number of operation holding balls (0/1/2/3) of the first special symbol Any one of −2 to PH6-4 is selected. On the other hand, if the result of the judgment result of the second special symbol is “out”, three types of fluctuations do not depend on the number of operation-holding balls of the second special symbol (0/1/2/3) Any of the patterns PH6-1, PH6-2, PH6-4 is selected.

  In the variation pattern table 6 for big hits, two types of variation patterns PA6-1 (immediate hit: 5 seconds) and PA6-2 (SP reach D: 50 seconds) are set. In the case where the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is "big hit", if the big hit type is a particular big hit (10R particular big hit, 4R particular big hit), the variation pattern PA6-1 or PA6-2 is selected, and the big hit If the type is a normal big hit (4R normal big hit), the variation pattern PA6-2 is selected. When the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is "big hit", if the big hit type is a specific big hit (10R specific big hit, 4R specific big hit), the variation pattern PA6-1 or PA6-2 is selected, and the big hit If the type is a normal big hit (10R normal big hit, 4R normal big hit), the variation pattern PA6-2 is selected.

(Variation pattern table 7)
FIG. 77 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 7. The variation pattern table 7 is a variation pattern table set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the selection state 7. The variation pattern table 7 is configured so that the table contents are different depending on the result (big hit, out) of the special symbol.

In the fluctuation pattern table 7 for deviation, four kinds of fluctuation patterns PH7-1 (super shortening: 2 seconds), PH7-2 (shortening: 4 seconds), PH7-3 (normal: 12 seconds), PH7-4 ( SP reach E: 50 seconds) is set. If the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is “out”, it does not depend on the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol (0/1/2/3), and three types of fluctuation patterns PH7 Any one of −2 to PH7-4 is selected. On the other hand, if the result of the judgment result of the second special symbol is “out”, three types of fluctuations do not depend on the number of operation-holding balls of the second special symbol (0/1/2/3) Any one of the patterns PH7-1, PH7-2, and PH7-4 is selected.

  In the variation pattern table 7 for big hits, one variation pattern PA7-1 (SP reach E: 50 seconds) is set. When the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is "big hit", the variation pattern PA7-1 is selected without depending on the big hit type. Similarly, when the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is "big hit", the variation pattern PA7-1 is selected without depending on the big hit type.

(Variation pattern table 8)
FIG. 78 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 8. The fluctuation pattern table 8 is a fluctuation pattern table set when the fluctuation pattern selection state during the current stay is the selection state 8. The variation pattern table 8 is configured so that the table contents are different depending on the result (big hit, out) of the special symbol. The variation pattern table 8 has substantially the same setting contents as the variation pattern table 7 described above. However, this variation pattern table 8 is a variation pattern table that is referred to when the gaming state is the time saving gaming state, whereas the variation pattern table 7 is referred to when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. The difference is that it is a fluctuation pattern table.

  In the variation pattern table 8 for out-of-range, four types of variation patterns PH8-1 (super shortening: 2 seconds), PH8-2 (shortening: 4 seconds), PH8-3 (normal: 12 seconds), PH8-4 ( SP reach E: 50 seconds) is set. If the result of the judgment result of the first special symbol is “out”, three types of fluctuation patterns PH8 do not depend on the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol (0/1/2/3) Any one of −2 to PH8-4 is selected. On the other hand, if the result of the judgment result of the second special symbol is “out”, three types of fluctuations do not depend on the number of operation-holding balls of the second special symbol (0/1/2/3) Any one of the patterns PH8-1, PH8-2, and PH8-4 is selected.

  In the variation pattern table 8 for big hits, one variation pattern PA8-1 (SP reach E: 50 seconds) is set. When the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is "big hit", the variation pattern PA8-1 is selected without depending on the big hit type. Similarly, when the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is "big hit", the variation pattern PA8-1 is selected without depending on the big hit type. Here, the variation pattern tables 6 to 8 are (1) in the third embodiment, the result of the determination of whether or not the second special symbol is “off” and the number of operation holding balls of the second special symbol is 0. The variation pattern of the second special symbol in the case is configured so that any one of three types of super-shortening variation, shortening variation, and SP reach is selected, but in the modified example, only normal variation is selected or normal variation is selected. It may be configured to select any one of SP reach (as a selection rate, SP reach is 10% with a normal fluctuation of 90%). (2) In the third embodiment, whether or not the first special symbol is determined If the result is “out”, it does not depend on the number of operation-retaining balls of the first special symbol (0/1 to 2/3), and it is either one of three types of shortening fluctuation, normal fluctuation, and SP reach. However, in the modified example, only the normal fluctuation is selected, or one of the normal fluctuation and the SP reach (the selection rate is 90% of the normal fluctuation and 10% of the SP reach) is selected. (3) In the third embodiment, the variation pattern table 7 and the variation pattern table 8 are tables having substantially the same contents, but as a modified example, for example, the first special symbol The selection rate of SP reach (SP reach E) when the result of the hit determination or the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is “out” is made different (as an example, shortened fluctuation in the fluctuation pattern table 7: normal fluctuation) : SP reach E = 20%: 70%: 10%, but in the variation pattern table 8, shortened variation: normal variation: SP reach E = 20%: 65%: 15%.

Subsequently, the stop display time of the special symbol of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 79 is a schematic diagram showing a symbol fixed time table of the third embodiment. The stop display time of the special symbol (hereinafter also referred to as "symbol fixed time") is the time when the variable display of the special symbol is finished and the special symbol is definitely stopped (the completely stopped state is maintained. Time). In this example, the variable time and the stop display time of the decorative symbol (the symbol fixed time) are set corresponding to the variable time of the special symbol and the stop display time (the symbol fixed time). Therefore, in the following, when the term "stop display time (symbol fixed time)" is used, unless otherwise specified, the stop display time of the special symbol (fixed symbol time) and the stop display time of the decorative symbol (symbol) (Fixed time) and both.

  In the symbol fixed time table, as shown in FIG. 79, the fluctuation pattern selection state, the number of times of fluctuation display when staying in the fluctuation pattern selected state, the result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol is valid, and the symbol fixed time ( Correspondence with the stop display time of special symbols) is defined. In the third embodiment, as symbol fixing times, there are relatively short symbol fixing times A (0.5 seconds) and relatively long symbol fixing times B (6.5 seconds). In any of the variation pattern selection states, when the result of the special symbol hit determination is "big hit", the symbol fixing time A (0.5 seconds) is relatively short. On the other hand, if the result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol is “out”, if it is a variable display that does not trigger the end of the electric support state, the symbol fixed time A (0.5 seconds) becomes the termination trigger of the electric support state. If it is such a variable display, it becomes the symbol fixed time B (6.5 seconds). In detail, when the variation pattern selection state is the “selection state 4”, that is, in the variation display of the 15th rotation of the chance mode (the variation display of the last time that triggers the termination of the electric support state), the special symbol When the result of the hit / miss judgment is “out”, the symbol fixed time B (6.5 seconds) is set. Similarly, in the final variation display when the variation pattern selection state is the “selected state 8”, that is, the final variation display in the rush mode (the final variation display that triggers the termination of the power support state). , If the result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol is “out”, the symbol fixed time B (6.5 seconds) is set.

  Here, in the chance mode, when the symbol fixed time of the variable display of the special symbol is the symbol fixed time B (6.5 seconds), the specific effect (fixed time effect after the final change) is executed during the symbol fixed time. Is configured to be. The details of this specific effect (fixed time effect after final change) will be described later. Further, in the rush mode, when the symbol fixed time of the variable display of the special symbol becomes the symbol fixed time B (6.5 seconds), the rush mode is terminated during the symbol fixed time (the state of the extended game is terminated. The final result effect suggesting that you should do) is displayed. On the final result screen, information on the number of consecutive holidays and information on the number of cumulative prize balls in the consecutive holidays is displayed. The number of consecutive holidays information is information on the number of consecutive big hits during the consecutive holidays (in this example, the number of consecutive big hits that triggers a shift to the rush mode). The accumulated prize ball number information is the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the condominium (by the entrance into the special winning opening 54 and / or the entrance into the general winning opening 64 during the execution of the special game that occurs during the condominium. It is the number of prize balls that can be acquired, and does not include the number of prize balls that can be acquired by entering the general winning openings 61 to 63, the first starting opening 51, and the second starting opening 52 in the condominium) Information. It should be noted that the condominium (condominium state) is a gaming state during the non-special gaming state, and does not return to the non-specific gaming state after the occurrence of the first hit that triggers a transition from the non-specific gaming state to the specific gaming state. , A state in which the specific game state continues (a state in which the big hit in the specific game state occurs continuously after the first hit is the starting point). In addition, the specific game state is a game state in which the transition probability to the special game is higher than in the normal game state, and in a broad sense, the probability variation function of the special symbol, the variation time shortening function of the special symbol, and the electric Chu support It is a gaming state in which any one of the functions is operating. In this example, the specific game state means a game state in which at least the electric Chu support function is operating (a game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is the main subject of the game), and more specifically , The game state while staying in the rush mode (probability variation game state or time saving game state).

Next, the effect mode of the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66, “normal mode”, “chance mode”, “pullback mode”, and “rush mode” are set as a plurality of types of effect modes, and the main control board 100 side Depending on the game state (or the variation pattern selection state) managed in, or the number of times the special symbol is displayed in variation, any one of a plurality of effect modes is selectively set, and the effect mode is set. A corresponding variable effect is executed. When one of the effect modes is set, as an effect (variable effect) that suggests that the user is staying in the effect mode, a background image dedicated to the effect mode on the screen (a background image that is a rear display of the decorative pattern) ) Is displayed, and BGM dedicated to the effect mode is output from the speaker 11. In this way, the background image and BGM are set to be different for each effect mode, so that the player can recognize from the type of background image or BGM which effect mode the player is currently staying in. ing. The details of the effect mode (game flow) will be described below.

[Game flow]
Next, the game flow of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a transition diagram of the game state and the effect mode in the third embodiment, as described above. In the present embodiment, after pulling the big hit (so-called first hit) of the first special symbol in the normal mode, the fluctuation display of 15 rotations while staying in the electric support state and the 4 rotations after leaving the electric support state By the gameplay aiming to draw a big jackpot with the second special symbol (that is, to break through this barrier and shift to the rush mode) until the variable display of a total of 19 rotations which is combined with the variable display is completed. is there. In other words, after the first hit, the number of electric support is only given 15 times, but the big hit of the second special symbol is drawn in the variable display of 15 rotations while staying in this electric support state, or after leaving the electric support state 4 rotation variation display (variation display related to the remaining reserved ball of the 2nd special symbol that occurred while staying in the electric support state) If you hit the big jackpot of the 2nd special symbol, 100 times of electric support will be given after that. It is designed to loop in rush mode (the most advantageous state). In this embodiment, since the jackpot probability is set to a relatively high value, the jackpot of the second special symbol is displayed even in the variable display of the above four rotations after leaving the electric support state. It has specifications that ensure the possibility of pulling.

<Normal mode>
First, the Pachinko gaming machine PM when the power is turned on after the RAM clear switch is pressed is set to the normal mode as the effect mode regardless of the type of the effect mode before the power is turned on, and the game is started from this normal mode. It The pachinko game machine PM when the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch is set to the same effect mode as the effect mode before the power is turned on. The normal mode is an effect mode corresponding to the normal game state (low probability low base state). When the effect mode is the normal mode, the frequency of entering the game balls into the first starting opening 51 is set to be higher than the frequency of entering the game balls into the second starting opening 52. The game ball is inserted into the first starting port 51 by firing the game ball aiming at the left side area PA1), and the judgment of the winning / losing of the first special symbol (variable display of the first special symbol) is mainly executed. It becomes playable. In this normal mode, if the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol corresponds to a big hit, as a big hit type of the first special symbol, "10R specific big hit (symbol group A)" is 1%, "4R special big hit (symbol group B) ”is 59%, and“ 4R normal big hit (symbol group C) ”is 40%. When the big hit type is "10R special big hit (symbol group A)", after the big hit game ends, the effect mode shifts to the rush mode. On the other hand, when the big hit type is "4R specific big hit (symbol group B)" or "4R normal big hit (symbol group C)", after the big hit game, the effect mode shifts to the chance mode. Therefore, when the big hit of the first special symbol is drawn in this normal mode, the rush mode shifts with a probability of 1%, and the chance mode shifts with a probability of 99%.

<Chance mode>
The chance mode is a production mode corresponding to a time saving game state (low probability high base state) or a probability variation game state (high probability high base state), that is, a production mode corresponding to a high base state in which the electric Chu support function is activated. .. When the production mode shifts to the chance mode, the electric Chu support function is activated to increase the easiness of entering the game ball into the second starting opening 52. Therefore, right-handed (the game ball is shot at the right side area PA2. By doing) to enter the game ball into the second starting port 52, it becomes a game nature that mainly executes the determination of the win or failure of the second special symbol (variable display of the second special symbol). In this chance mode, if the result of the determination result of the second special symbol corresponds to a big hit, as a big hit type of the second special symbol, "10R specific big hit (symbol group D)" is 30%, "4R special big hit (symbol group E) ”is 30%,“ 10R normal big hit (symbol group F) ”is 20%, and“ 4R normal big hit (symbol group G) ”is 20%. And the jackpot type is any of "10R special jackpot (design group D)", "4R particular jackpot (design group E)", "10R normal jackpot (design group F)", "4R normal jackpot (design group G)" Even if it is, after the jackpot game, it shifts to the rush mode. In other words, in the chance mode, when a big hit with the second special symbol, there is a probability of substantially 100% to shift to the rush mode (the rush rate to the rush mode is set to substantially 100%). As a result, in this chance mode, basically, until the chance mode ends (until the electric power support state ends), a big hit is won by the hit determination of the second special symbol, and the big hit game. After the end of the game, the game is advanced aiming to shift to the rush mode.

  In addition, this chance mode is basically counted from the end of the big hit game until the variable display number of special symbols reaches a predetermined upper limit number (15 times), that is, the electric choo support function ends. Continue until. Then, in the chance mode, the next big hit does not occur, and the chance mode ends when the variable display number of the special symbol reaches a predetermined upper limit number (15 times), and the mode returns to the pullback mode. It will be. However, in the final variation display (variation display of the 15th rotation) when the variation display number of the special symbol reaches a predetermined upper limit number, when the operation holding ball of the second special symbol exists, this second special symbol Until the variation display corresponding to the operation-holding sphere of the symbol is completed, the end screen of the last variation display is continuously displayed, and the chance mode is continued. In other words, when the last time the variable display is stopped, if the operation holding balls of the second special symbol are present, the number of times the chance mode is continued for the number of the operation holding balls of the second special symbol (maximum 4). Is added, and the number of continuations of the chance mode is substantially extended (the number of continuations of the chance mode is extended to a maximum of 19 revolutions). The end timing of the electric power support state in the chance mode will be described later. Then, after all the operation reserve balls of the second special symbol are exhausted, the operation reserve balls of the first special symbol are exhausted (variable display of the first special symbol is performed), and the production mode is pulled back. Switch to mode.

<Pullback mode>
The pullback mode is an effect mode corresponding to a normal game state (low probability low base state) or a latent probability game state (high probability low base state), that is, an effect corresponding to a low base state in which the electric Chu support function is not operating. Mode. During the stay in the pullback mode, whether the current game state is the normal game state (low probability state) or the latent probability game state (high probability state), the game proceeds in a hidden state. In the chance mode and the rush mode as well, whether the current game state is the time saving game state (low probability state) or the probability variation game state (high probability state), the game proceeds in a secret manner. When the production mode is the pullback mode, the frequency of entering the game balls into the first starting opening 51 is set to be higher than the frequency of entering the game balls into the second starting opening 52, so left-handing ( The game ball is inserted into the first starting port 51 by firing the game ball aiming at the left side area PA1), and the judgment of the winning / losing of the first special symbol (variable display of the first special symbol) is mainly executed. It becomes playable. In this pull-back mode, if the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol corresponds to a big hit, as a big hit type of the first special symbol, "10R specific big hit (symbol group A)" is 1%, "4R special big hit (symbol group B) ”is 59%, and“ 4R normal big hit (symbol group C) ”is 40%. When the big hit type is "10R special big hit (symbol group A)", after the big hit game ends, the effect mode shifts to the rush mode. On the other hand, when the big hit type is "4R specific big hit (symbol group B)" or "4R normal big hit (symbol group C)", after the big hit game, the effect mode shifts to the chance mode. Therefore, when the big hit of the first special symbol is drawn in this normal mode, the rush mode shifts with a probability of 1%, and the chance mode shifts with a probability of 99%.

  The withdrawal mode is basically counted from immediately after the transition to the withdrawal mode, and continues until the variable display number of special symbols reaches "25 times". However, when the number of continuations in the chance mode is increased as described above, the number of continuations in the pullback mode is reduced by the number of additions in the chance mode (maximum 4 rotations) (the maximum number of continuations in the pullback mode is 21 It will be shortened to rotation). That is, the number of continuations in the pullback mode is the remaining number obtained by subtracting the number of continuations (15 to 19 times) in the chance mode from "40 times" corresponding to the number of probability fluctuations (specified ST number). Therefore, the number of times of continuation of the chance mode is increased by the number of the operation holding balls of the second special symbol existing in the fluctuation display of the final time when the number of times of execution of the chance mode reaches the predetermined upper limit number, while the number of times of continuation of the chance mode is increased. The number of continuations will be reduced. Thereby, as the game state corresponding to the pullback mode, there are a normal game state and a latent probability game state, but even if the number of continuations of the pullback mode is increased or decreased, the end of the pullback mode is a latent probability game state (high probability state). ) Can be matched with the end of. Then, when the pullback mode ends, the next variable display shifts to the normal mode.

<Rush mode>
Rush mode is a production mode corresponding to a probability variation game state (high probability high base state) or a time saving game state (low probability high base state). When the production mode shifts to the rush mode, the electric Chu support function is activated, which makes it easier to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 52, and therefore right-handed (shoots the game ball aiming at the right area PA2). By doing) to enter the game ball into the second starting port 52, it becomes a game nature that mainly executes the determination of the win or failure of the second special symbol (variable display of the second special symbol). In this rush mode, if the result of the determination result of the second special symbol corresponds to the big hit, as the big hit type of the second special symbol, "10R specific big hit (symbol group D)" is 30%, "4R special big hit (symbol group E) ”is 30%,“ 10R normal big hit (symbol group F) ”is 20%, and“ 4R normal big hit (symbol group G) ”is 20%. Big hit type is any of "10R special big hit (design group D)", "4R special big hit (design group E)", "10R normal big hit (design group F)", "4R normal big hit (design group G)" Even in that case, after the jackpot game is over, the game goes into the rush mode. Therefore, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is pulled in this rush mode, the rush mode is switched to again with a probability of 100% (looping the rush mode). In addition, the rush mode continues from the end of the big hit game, and continues until the variable display number of special symbols reaches "100 times". The end timing of the electric power support state during the rush mode will be described later. Then, in the rush mode, when the number of fluctuation display of the special symbol reaches "100 times" without the next big hit, this rush mode ends and the next fluctuation display shifts to the normal mode. .

[End timing of power support status]
Next, the end timing of the electric power support state in the third embodiment will be described. Here, FIG. 80 (A) is a time chart for explaining the end timing of the electric support state of the conventional example (conventional technology), and FIG. 80 (B) is the end timing of the electric support state of the present embodiment. It is a time chart for doing. Regarding the ending timing of the electric support state, the chance mode and the rush mode can be applied as the effect modes corresponding to the electric support state. In the following, the case of applying it to the chance mode will be mainly illustrated, but it goes without saying that the same operational effect can be obtained even when applied to the rush mode.

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the big hit of the second special symbol is drawn in the chance mode (electric support state), the rush mode (the state where the number of electric support is given 100 times) after the end of the big hit game. It is a specification that will be decided to move to (that is, a breakthrough will be decided). Then, in the present embodiment, when the presentation mode in which the user is currently staying is the chance mode, a fluctuation display of 15 rotations while staying in the electric support state and a fluctuation display of four rotations after leaving the electric support state (second With a variable display of a total of 19 rotations (variation display related to the remaining reserved ball of the special symbol), the game is designed to break through the barrier aiming for the big hit of the second special symbol. In other words, when it is a big hit in the second special symbol, even if it is a big hit in a high base state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state), low base state (low probability low base state or high probability low base state) Even if it is a big hit in the state), it is a specification that it is decided to shift to the rush mode (a state where the number of electric support is given 100 times) after the big hit game is finished. In the present embodiment, since the jackpot probability is set to be relatively high, the weighting for one rotation is large, and if the variation display number of 19 rotations is slightly increased or decreased, the player It may have a great influence on the profits that the side should obtain or the disadvantages that the amusement store side suffers. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to optimize such a profit-giving opportunity (opportunity for determining whether or not the second special symbol is won / changed / variable display), the following characteristic configuration different from the conventional technology is constructed. is doing.

  First, in the conventional example, as shown in FIG. 80 (A), when the variable display number of the special symbol reaches a predetermined upper limit number from immediately after shifting to the electric support state, the final number (the upper limit number) ) At the end of the symbol fixed time of the variable display, the electric support state was finished. Further, the symbol fixing time of the variable display of the final time is set to a relatively short symbol fixing time A (0.5 seconds) which is the same as the symbol fixing time of the variable display before the final time. Therefore, the fluctuation of the normal symbol starts during the electric support state (final fluctuation display) and immediately before the end of the electric support status (final fluctuation display) (for example, 0.5 seconds before the end of the electric support status). When the fluctuation of the normal symbol stops and the normal symbol stops at the hit symbol, the second starting port 52 is opened for, for example, 6 seconds (the maximum opening time allowed by the rule), the electric support state ends. After (after the variable display of the last time is finished and the symbol fixing time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed), a maximum of four remaining holding balls stored at the end of the variable display of the last time ( By the operation reserve ball of the second special symbol is digested, when the game ball enters the second starting opening 52, a new second operation reserve ball of the second special symbol can be generated by the amount of the remaining retained ball that has been digested. Then, after all the remaining reserved balls have been digested (after the variable display of the second special symbol related to all the remaining reserved balls has ended), the second related to the operation reserved balls of the newly generated second special symbol The variable display of special symbols will be executed. In other words, at least while the second starting port 52 is open, a new operation holding ball is generated each time a game ball is entered into the second starting port 52 after one or more remaining holding balls have been exhausted. One is generated, and the operation holding balls of the second special symbol can always reach the upper limit number (four). Therefore, after the electric support state has ended, in addition to the four remaining holding balls, the variable display of the second special symbol continues for the number of operation holding balls generated during the opening time of the second starting opening 54. This means that the number of times of judgment / variation display of the second special symbol in the chance mode deviates from the initially assumed value (design value) that the maximum is 19 times. In addition, the fluctuation of the normal symbol starts during the electric support state (the fluctuation display of the last time) and the fluctuation of the normal symbol stops after the end of the electric support state (the fluctuation display of the last time) and the normal symbol stops at the hit symbol. In such a case, the second starting opening 52 is opened for, for example, 0.2 seconds, which makes it difficult to enter the second starting opening 52 in the first place. .

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80 (B), when the variable display count of the special symbol reaches a predetermined upper limit count from immediately after shifting to the electric support state, the final count (upper limit count) The electric power support state ends at the start of the symbol fixed time of the variable display. Further, the symbol fixing time of the variable display of the final time is set to the symbol fixing time B (6.5 seconds), which is relatively longer than the symbol fixing time of the variable display before the final time. Moreover, the symbol fixing time B (6.5 seconds) is set to be longer than the maximum opening time (6 seconds) permitted by the rule as the opening time of the second starting port 52. Therefore, the fluctuation of the normal symbol starts during the electric support state (final fluctuation display) and immediately before the end of the electric support status (final fluctuation display) (for example, 0.5 seconds before the end of the electric support status). If the second symbol is opened for 6 seconds (maximum opening time allowed by the rule) by stopping the normal symbol as a hit symbol, after the electric support state ends (variable display at the last time) After the symbol fixing time (6.5 seconds) is started and ends), even if the game ball enters the second starting opening 52, until the symbol fixing time ends, Up to four remaining holding balls (operation holding balls of the second special symbol) stored at the end of the variable display are not digested, and a new operation holding ball of the second special symbol may be generated. Absent. In other words, during this symbol fixed time, the operation reserve ball of the second special symbol (remaining reserve ball) does not decrease by one, and therefore, up to four remaining reserve balls (action reserve ball of the second special symbol) When it is stored, it becomes a state that no one operation reserve ball of the new second special symbol can be stored (a maximum of less than 4 remaining reserve balls (action reserve ball of the second special symbol) is stored. If you have a maximum of four, you can collect a new second special symbol operation reserve ball). Therefore, even after the electric support state has ended, the variable display of the second special symbol continues beyond the initially assumed value (design value) of 4 revolutions (the number of times of judgment and fluctuation of the second special symbol in the chance mode) It is possible to prevent a situation in which the display count deviates from the assumed value of 19 times at the maximum), and the profit to be obtained by the player can be optimized. In addition, the fluctuation of the normal symbol starts during the electric support state (the fluctuation display of the last time) and the fluctuation of the normal symbol stops after the end of the electric support state (the fluctuation display of the last time) and the normal symbol stops at the hit symbol. In this case, since the second starting port 52 is opened for, for example, 0.2 seconds, it is difficult to enter the second starting port 52 in the first place, and in this case also, the deviation does not deviate from the initially assumed value (difficult to deviate). ) It will be.

[Various productions]
In the pachinko gaming machine PM of the third embodiment having such a configuration, as described above, various game effects are controlled and executed by the effect control board 200 and the image control board 300 according to the progress status of the game and the like. Is configured. In the following, of the various game effects, the main effects that are performed when the effect mode in which the player is currently staying is the chance mode will be described.

  81 is a schematic diagram showing an effect flow when the effect mode in which the user is currently staying is the chance mode. In the third embodiment, as a main effect performed in the chance mode, a battle effect performed during the variable display of the first to fifteenth rotations of the chance mode and a final effect performed after the variable display of the fifteenth rotation of the chance mode is finished. It has fixed time production after fluctuation. Since the fluctuating display of the 15th rotation in the chance mode corresponds to the final fluctuating display that triggers the end of the electric support state, it may be referred to as “final fluctuating display” or “final fluctuating” below. is there. Further, in the following, for the sake of convenience, with respect to the special symbol operation holding ball, the result of the special symbol win / fail judgment (or pre-judgment) is a big hit, the operation holding ball is “big hit holding ball”, the special symbol win / fail judgment (or pre-judgment) The operation-reserving ball whose result in () is out is also referred to as "out-reservation ball". In addition, the operation holding ball that is the target of the prefetching notice is also referred to as “trigger holding ball”. Further, the operation holding ball of the second special symbol remaining at the end of the fluctuating display (final fluctuation display) of the 15th rotation in the chance mode is also referred to as “remaining holding ball”.

<Battle production>
The battle effect is an effect that suggests or informs the result of the determination of the special symbol according to the result (win or loss) of the ally character playing against the enemy character. Basically, it is decided that a "big hit" is won when the player wins this battle effect, and that it is "fallen out" when the battle effect is lost.

  This battle effect is performed during the normal battle effect that is performed during the variation display of the first to fourteenth rotations in the chance mode and during the variation display during the fifteenth rotation of the chance mode (during the final variation display of the electric support state). It is roughly divided into the final battle production (special battle production).

≪Normal battle production≫
The normal battle effect is executed when the reach is established (developed into “SP reach C” illustrated in FIG. 73) in the variable display of the 1st to 14th rotations in the chance mode. Therefore, in the variation display of the 1st to 14th rotations in the chance mode, if the reach is not established during the execution of the variation display (SP reach is not developed), the normal battle effect is not executed.

  Here, FIG. 82 (A) is a schematic diagram showing a variation effect pattern table referred to in the first to fourteenth rotations of the chance mode. That is, this variation effect pattern table is configured as a variation effect pattern table corresponding to the variation pattern table 3 in FIG. However, in the figure, for convenience, only the SP-reach type variation effect pattern tables are shown, and the other types (non-reach type, etc.) variation effect pattern tables are omitted. In this variation effect pattern table, one or more variation effect patterns (normal battle effect patterns) that are selection candidates for the variation pattern of the special symbol are assigned, and one or more of the selection candidates are assigned. One variation effect pattern is selected by lottery from the variation effect patterns. Specifically, the variation pattern PH3-4 that is out of alignment is associated with one type of variation effect pattern PEH31 in which the effect result of the normal battle effect is “defeat”. Further, the variation pattern PA3-1 of the big hit is associated with three types of variation effect patterns PEA31 to PEA33 in which the effect result of the normal battle effect is “win”. The effect contents of the variable effect patterns PEH31, PEA31 to PEA33 (ordinary battle effect effect route) will be described later. Further, in the figure, for convenience of explanation, the "selection rate" is shown, but in practice, the determination value (randomness) for determining the variable effect patterns PEH31, PEA31 to 33 according to the effect lottery random number value. A numerical value range) is set, and the variable effect patterns PEH31 and PEA31 to 33 are selected based on which judgment value the effect lottery random number value belongs to.

≪Final battle production≫
The final battle effect is executed when the variation display (final variation display) of the 15th rotation in the chance mode is started. That is, the final battle effect is always performed regardless of whether it is a big hit or a big hit when the display changes to the fifteenth rotation variable display.

Here, FIG. 82B is a schematic diagram showing the variation effect pattern table referred to in the 15th rotation of the chance mode. That is, this variation effect pattern table is configured as a variation effect pattern table corresponding to variation pattern table 4 in FIG. In this variation effect pattern table, a variation pattern of the special symbol, a preliminary determination result (pre-reading result) of the operation reserved ball of the second special symbol, and a variation effect pattern are defined. That is, in the variation effect pattern table, one or a plurality of variation effect patterns that are candidates for selection are assigned to the combination of the variation pattern of the special symbol and the above-mentioned preliminary determination result (prefetch result), and the selection thereof. One variation effect pattern is selected by lottery from one or a plurality of candidate variation effect patterns. Therefore, the variation effect pattern of the final variation display (15th rotation) is different from the variation production pattern of the non-final variation (1st to 14th rotations), and in addition to the variation pattern of the special symbol, the second special symbol. The pre-judgment result (pre-reading result) of the operation-holding ball is decided. Specifically, for the variation pattern PH4-1 of the outlier, when the result of the preliminary determination result (pre-reading result) of the remaining operation holding balls of the second special symbol is that there is no operation holding ball that is a big hit. Is associated with one type of variation effect pattern PEH41 in which the effect result of the final battle effect is “defeat”, and the pre-determination result (prefetch result) of the remaining operation reserve balls of the second special symbol is a big hit operation. When the result is that there is a reserved ball, two types of variable effect patterns PEA41 and PEA42 that result in the final battle effect being "win" are associated. In addition, for the jackpot variation pattern PA4-1, it does not depend on the preliminary determination result (prefetching result) of the remaining operation reserve balls of the second special symbol, or of the remaining operation reserve balls of the second special symbol. Two types of variable effect patterns PEA41 and PEA42 that make the final battle effect result "win" are associated with each other without performing pre-determination (look-ahead). The effect contents of the variable effect patterns PEH41, PEA41, PEA42 (ordinary battle effect effect route) will be described later. Further, in the figure, for convenience of description, the "selection rate" is shown, but actually, the determination value (randomness) for determining the variable effect patterns PEH41, PEA41 to 42 is determined according to the effect lottery random number value. The numerical value range) is set, and the variable effect patterns PEH41 and PEA41 to 42 are selected based on which judgment value the effect lottery random number value belongs to.

  Next, the production flow of each battle production will be described. FIG. 83 is a schematic diagram showing an effect flow of a normal battle effect, and FIG. 84 is a schematic diagram showing an effect flow of a final battle effect. In each drawing, the basic flow of the battle production is shown in time series from left to right on the paper surface.

  First, the flow of normal battle effects will be described with reference to FIG. In the variation display of the 1st to 14th rotations in the chance mode, when the reach is established and the SP reach is developed after the variation display is started, the normal battle effect in which the ally character competes with the enemy character is subsequently developed. (ST101 to ST113).

  In the illustrated example, a plurality of types of effect routes 1 to 4 are prepared as effect routes for the normal battle effect, and the win / loss of the normal battle effect is derived via different effect processes for each effect route. . Roughly speaking, the effect route 1 is a "defeated route" in which the result of the normal battle effect is "defeat", and the effect routes 2 to 4 are "routes for a big hit" in which the result of the normal battle effect is "win". Is. In the present embodiment, the result of the normal battle effect is "win" at the time when the effect that the ally character attacks the enemy character appears (at the time when the "ally attack effect" described later occurs). It is a specification that the winning of the jackpot) is confirmed.

  At the branch point of each of the effect routes 1 to 4, a branch effect is suggested which suggests which of the plural effect routes 1 to 4 the effect route will progress to. In the present embodiment, as a plurality of types of branch effects, a branch effect 1 (preemptive fanning effect: ST102) and a branch effect 2 (enemy attack avoidance fanning effect: ST106) are set.

  Branching production 1 (preemptive agitation production: ST102) shifts to "production route 2", which is a route for a teammate character to make a preemptive attack by supporting whether the preemptive attack is an ally character or an enemy character. This is an effect that suggests whether or not to move to the “effect route 1, 3, 4” which is the route in which the enemy character makes a preemptive attack.

  The branch production 2 (enemy attack avoidance production: ST106) is to avoid whether to move to the "production route 3", which is a route that succeeds in avoiding, by supporting whether or not the attack of the enemy character can be avoided. This is an effect that suggests whether or not to shift to the "effect route 1, 4" which is a route that fails.

  Specifically, the effect route 1 is a battle start effect (ST101) → a preemptive effect effect (ST102) → an enemy attack effect effect (ST105) → an enemy attack avoidance effect effect effect (ST106) → an enemy attack avoidance failure effect effect (ST110) → defeat effect effect. The production progresses in the flow of (ST113).

  The production route 2 progresses in the sequence of battle start production (ST101) → preemptive production (ST102) → ally attack production (ST103) → victory production A (ST104).

The effect route 3 is a battle start effect (ST101) → a preemptive effect effect (ST102) → an enemy attack effect effect (ST105) → an enemy attack avoidance effect effect effect (ST106) → an enemy attack avoidance success effect effect (ST107) → an ally attack effect effect (ST108). → The production progresses in the flow of victory production B (ST109).

  The production route 4 is Toru start production (ST101) → preemptive production (ST102) → enemy attack production (ST105) → enemy attack avoidance production (ST106) → enemy attack avoidance production (ST110) → rescue production (ST111) → → The production progresses in the flow of winning production C (ST113). Note that the relief effect (ST111) is an effect in which a friend character appears and attacks an enemy character after the teammate character has fallen, thereby defeating the enemy character.

  Here, victory effects A to C (ST104, ST109, ST112) mean effects that suggest that the result of the normal battle effect is "win". Victory effect A (effect route 2) is an effect route corresponding to variable effect pattern PEA31, victory effect B (effect route 3) is an effect route corresponding to variable effect pattern PEA32, and victory effect C (effect route). 4) is an effect route corresponding to the variable effect pattern PEA33. On the other hand, the defeat effect (ST113) means an effect that suggests that the result of the normal battle effect is "defeat". The defeat effect (effect route 1) is an effect route corresponding to the variable effect pattern PEH31.

  Next, the effect flow of the final battle effect will be described with reference to FIG. In the fifteenth rotation variation display (final variation display) in the chance mode, the final battle effect in which the teammate character plays against the enemy character is developed from the time when this final variation display is started (ST201 to ST212).

  In the illustrated example, a plurality of types of effect routes 1 to 3 are prepared as effect routes for the final battle effect, and the win / loss of the final battle effect is derived via different effect processes for each effect route. .. Roughly speaking, the effect route 1 is a “defeated route” where the final battle effect result is “defeat”, and the effect routes 2-3 are “big hit routes” where the final battle effect result is a “win”. Is. In the present embodiment, the result of the final battle effect is "win" at the time when the effect that the ally character attacks the enemy character appears (at the time when the "ally attack effect" described later occurs). It is a specification that the winning of the jackpot) is confirmed.

  At the branch point of each of the effect routes 1 to 3, a branch effect that suggests which of the multiple effect routes 1 to 3 the effect route will take is performed. In the present embodiment, a branching effect 1 (enemy attack avoidance effect: ST202) and a branching effect 2 (recovery effect effect: ST207) are set as a plurality of types of branch effects.

  Branch effect 1 (enemy attack avoidance effect: ST202) is to avoid whether the enemy character's attack can be avoided by shifting to "effect route 2" which is a route that can be successfully avoided. This is an effect that suggests whether or not to shift to the “effect route 1, 3” which is a route that fails.

  The branch production 2 (revival resurrection effect: ST207) is to promote whether or not the ally character can be revived after it has fallen, so as to transition to "effect route 3", which is a route that succeeds in reviving, or to revive. It is an effect that suggests whether or not to shift to "effect route 1" which is a route that fails.

Specifically, the effect route 1 is an enemy attack effect (ST201) → an enemy attack avoidance insulting effect (ST202) → an enemy attack avoidance failure effect (ST206) → a recovery instigation effect (ST207) → a recovery failure effect (ST211) → defeat effect. The production progresses in the flow of (ST212).

  The production route 2 progresses in the sequence of enemy attack production (ST201) → enemy attack avoidance production (ST202) → enemy attack avoidance success production (ST203) → friend attack production (ST204) → victory production D (ST205). ..

  The production route 3 is an enemy attack production (ST201) → an enemy attack avoidance production (ST202) → an enemy attack avoidance production (ST206) → a resurrection production production (ST207) → a recovery success production (ST208) → a team attack production (ST209). → The production progresses in the flow of winning production E (ST210).

  Here, victory effects D to E (ST205, ST210) mean effects that suggest that the result of the final battle effect is "win". The victory effect D (effect route 2) is an effect route corresponding to the variable effect pattern PEA41, and the victory effect E (effect route 3) is an effect route corresponding to the variable effect pattern PEA42. On the other hand, the defeat effect (ST212) means an effect that suggests that the result of the final battle effect is "defeat". Note that the defeat effect (effect route 1) is an effect route corresponding to the variable effect pattern PEH41.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the determination result of the final variation display is “out”, even if the result of the final battle effect is victory or defeat, after the end of the final battle effect. (That is, at the start of the symbol fixed time related to the final change display), the fixed time after final change effect described below is performed.

<Fixed time after final change>
After the final fluctuation, the fixed time effect (hereinafter referred to as “fixed time effect”) is, as shown in FIG. 81, the symbol fixed time of the variable display (final fluctuation display) of the 15th rotation of the chance mode is “symbol fixed time B”. (6.5 seconds) ”, that is, when the electric support state ends due to the result of the determination whether or not the special symbol that triggered the execution of this final variation display is“ out ”, the symbol is fixed It is a performance that is performed during the time. However, at the end of this final variation display (electric power support state), if one or more operation-holding balls of the second special symbol remain, the variation display corresponding to the operation-holding ball of this second special symbol The fixed time effect is continuously performed until the (display of one or more times of fluctuations after power-off) is finished. In other words, in the fixed time effect, the operation reserve balls (hereinafter referred to as "remaining reserve balls") of the one or more second special symbols remaining at the end of the final fluctuation display (electric support state) are the final fluctuation display. Assuming that it will be digested after the end of, the symbol fixed time of this final variable display and the execution time (variable time) of variable display and the symbol fixed time when the remaining reserve balls are exhausted are integrated. It is a performance that is performed continuously and continuously. Therefore, the variable display based on the remaining holding balls existing at the end of the electric support is displayed to the player as if it is during the symbol fixed time (during the chance mode) after the final variable display is finished. The remaining retained balls can be digested without any discomfort. In addition, when the symbol fixed time of the final variable display is “symbol fixed time A (0.5 seconds)”, that is, the result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol that triggers the execution of the final variable display is “big hit”. In this case, the fixed time effect is not performed, and after the symbol fixed time (fixed time A) has passed, the game shifts to the big hit game (during fixed time A, "Tennaku RUSHGET" in the screen example at the symbol fixed time in FIG. 87). Is displayed). In the following description, the effect displayed at the fixed time of the variable display when the remaining holding balls are consumed is not described in detail, but it is displayed in the variable display when the remaining holding balls are consumed. The effect is continuously displayed even during the fixed pattern time.

In this fixed time effect, a predetermined screen (predetermined image) is displayed during the entire period of the effect scale. That is, the fixed time effect is configured as an effect that is displayed in a so-called drip manner, which does not limit the display time of the predetermined screen. In addition, during execution of fixed time production (during display of predetermined screen)
Displays the three rows of decorative designs in reduced form as small designs at the edge of the screen.

  In addition, the fixed time performance includes a first fixed time performance performed when the final battle performance result is "defeat" and a second fixed time performance performed when the final battle performance result is "win". It is roughly divided into. That is, which of the first fixed time effect and the second fixed time effect is to be performed is the result of the final battle effect (that is, the result of the hit / miss determination at the start of the last variable display (final change display). "Is out of the condition") and the look-ahead result of the remaining retained ball).

  The first fixed time effect is an effect that suggests that the chance mode is ended when the result of the final battle effect is "defeat" (an effect that displays an opportunity mode end suggestion screen as the predetermined screen). . Therefore, when the first fixed time effect ends, the chance mode ends, and the pullback mode is entered. However, as will be described later in detail, the result of the hit / damage determination that triggered the execution of the final variable display is “out”, and when the hit / damage determination is executed, a big hit in the operation holding ball of the second special symbol Even if the result of the final battle effect is defeated because it is pre-determined that there is no holding ball, the second special is displayed before the final variable display ends (the final battle effect ends). When an operation holding ball that is a big hit is generated as an operation holding ball of the symbol, after the first fixed time effect is finished (after the variable display related to this big holding operation holding ball is finished), it shifts to the big hit game. It will be. At that time, in order to match the performance result of the final battle production (indication of “defeat” due to defeat in battle) with the actual game result (big hit game transition), at the beginning of the big hit game, actually Executes a relief effect (details will be described later) indicating that the player has won the “big hit” instead of the “miss”.

  The second fixed time effect, when the result of the final battle effect is "win", is an effect that suggests that the jackpot game is to be switched to the rush mode after the jackpot game is finished (the predetermined screen is the rush mode transition suggestion screen). It is a display effect). Therefore, when the second fixed time effect is finished, the big hit game is executed, and then the rush mode is entered.

  Next, an example of the effect of the symbol fixed time effect will be described. 85 is a time chart of the first fixed time effect, FIG. 86 is a time chart of when the relief effect is performed at the start of the big hit game after the first fixed time effect is performed, and FIG. 87 is the second fixed time effect. It is a time chart. In addition, in the description of the illustrated example, it is assumed that the variable display of the second special symbol is performed as the variable display of the special symbol unless otherwise specified.

First, an example of an effect of the first fixed time effect will be described with reference to FIG. 85. In the illustrated example, at the start of the fifteenth rotation variation display (final variation display) in the chance mode, the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol, which is the execution trigger of the final variation display, is “out”, and As the pre-judgment result (pre-reading result) in the pre-judgment of the second special symbol that is executed at the start of the final variation display, the operation-holding balls that are "big hits" are not stored (only the three "out-of-order" operation-holding balls) Is remembered). The three operation-holding balls are the operation-holding balls that are present at the start of the final variable display, and thus are subject to prior determination (prefetching) at the start of the variable display. Therefore, based on the result of the determination of whether or not the second special symbol is valid and the preliminary determination result (prefetch result), in the fifteenth rotation variation display (final variation display), the final battle effect in which the battle result is “defeat” is executed. Will be done. Here, during the execution of this final fluctuation display (final battle effect), an operation holding ball “out” is generated as an operation holding ball (fourth operation holding ball) of the new second special symbol, and a final fluctuation. At the end of the display, four operation holding balls of the second special symbol (holding 1 to holding 4) are stored. Since the fourth operation-holding sphere is an operation-holding sphere that did not exist at the start of the final variation display, it is not a target for pre-determination (prefetching) at the start of the variation display. Then, when the ally character is defeated by the enemy character in the final battle production, and the final fluctuation display ends with “out”, at the start of the symbol fixed time B (6.5 seconds) related to this final fluctuation display, the electric power support state is obtained. Will end, and you will fall to the non-electric power support state. In addition, at the start of this symbol fixed time B (at the end of the electric power support state), the first fixed time effect that indicates that the chance mode is ended is started, and the chance mode is displayed as if the fifteenth rotation of the variable display. Is displayed as if it ended (actually, the chance mode ends at the variable display on the 19th rotation, but apparently the chance mode ends at the variable display on the 15th rotation. ). This first fixed time effect, from the start of the symbol fixed time B related to the final fluctuation display, the operation holding ball of the second special symbol stored at the end of the final fluctuation display (four operation holding balls ) Is exhausted (until all the variable displays corresponding to the operation-holding balls of this second special symbol are completed), it is performed as a series of seamlessly connected effects. During execution of the first fixed time effect, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable and stopped state while the decorative pattern is reduced toward the end of the screen while the predetermined screen (chance mode end suggestion screen) is being displayed. Thereby, the period during which the operation-holding ball of the second special symbol is actually digested (variation display of 4 revolutions immediately after the electric support state is removed) is as if the symbol fixed time of the final variation display continues. As shown to the player, it is possible to make it appear as if all the variable display of the second special symbol is completed in the electric power support state. In addition, during the execution of the first fixed time effect, by quickly consuming the operation holding balls of the second special symbol in a very short time, all the operation holding balls of the second special symbol are displayed after the final variation display ends. By compressing the time until the digestion is completed, the first fixed time production can be ended without causing the player to recognize that the operation retaining ball of the second special symbol is digested as much as possible. Then, when this first fixed time effect is finished (because all the operation holding balls of the second special symbol are exhausted), the chance mode is ended, and the operation holding ball of the first special symbol is displayed in the next variable display. Is moved to the pullback mode when the is digested. Although not shown, the effect displayed in the final variation display (in particular, the effect displayed in the final stage of the variation) is the same as or similar to the effect displayed in the symbol fixed time (fixed time effect). Because it is the content (continuous display), the final variable display, the symbol fixed time of the final variable display, the variable display related to the remaining reserved ball, the variable fixed display related to the remaining reserved ball over the fixed time (at least the last remaining reserved ball Up to the variable display or until the symbol fixed time), it is possible to perform a series of seamlessly connected effects.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 86, an example of an effect when the relief effect is performed at the start of the jackpot game after the first fixed time effect is performed (after the final battle effect is defeated) will be described. In the illustrated example, as in the case of FIG. 85 described above, at the start of the fluctuating display (final changing display) of the 15th rotation in the chance mode, the result of the determination of whether or not the second special symbol is the execution trigger of the final changing display is It becomes "off", and the operation-holding spheres that become "big hits" are not stored in the operation-holding spheres of the second special symbol (though only three "hold-off" operation-holding balls are stored. ), As a point different from FIG. 85 described above, an operation holding ball that becomes a “big hit” as an operation holding ball (a fourth operation holding ball) of a new second special symbol during the execution of the final variable display. Is caused. As described above, since the fourth operation-holding sphere is an operation-holding sphere that did not exist at the start of the final variation display, it is not the target of the preliminary determination (prefetching) at the start of the variation display. Therefore, even if the operation holding ball that is the fourth operation holding ball and becomes a "big hit" occurs after the start of the final variation display, the fixed time effect is not the second fixed time effect described below but the first fixed time effect. It becomes time production, that is, the result of the final battle production is defeated. However, even when the result of the final battle production is defeated, when an operation holding ball that is a "big hit" is generated as an operation holding ball of a new second special symbol during execution of this final variation display ( In FIG. 86, when the fourth operation-holding ball and the operation-holding ball that is a “big hit” are generated), the operation holding of the second special symbol stored at the end of the final variation display. Until all the balls (the action-holding balls that become "big hits") are exhausted (until the variable display corresponding to the action-holding balls of this second special symbol ends), after performing the first fixed time performance, By performing the relief effect at the start of the big hit start demonstration in the big hit game that is executed by digesting the operation holding ball that becomes the "big hit" (by sandwiching the relief effect at the start of the big hit game), the final battle effect The remedy that occurs between the result (defeat) and the game result (transition to the big hit game) suggests that the relief effect at the start of the big hit (actually, the "big hit" is won instead of the "outfall") ) So that the book ends are matched. The relief effect is an effect in which it is made to appear that it is out of order, and thereafter, the fact that it is actually a big hit is reported. Although not shown, the effect displayed in the final variation display (in particular, the effect displayed in the final stage of the variation) is the same as or similar to the effect displayed in the symbol fixed time (fixed time effect). Since it is the content (continuous display), the final variation display, the symbol fixed time of the final variation display, the variation display related to the remaining pending ball, the variation fixed display related to the remaining pending ball over the symbol fixed time (at least "big hit" becomes It is possible to perform a series of effects that are seamlessly connected up to the variable display relating to the remaining reserved ball.

Next, an example of an effect of the second fixed time effect will be described with reference to FIG. 87. In the illustrated example, at the start of the fifteenth rotation variation display (final variation display) in the chance mode, the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol, which is the execution trigger of the final variation display, is “out”, and As the pre-judgment result (pre-reading result) in the pre-judgment of the second special symbol executed at the start of the final variation display, the operation-holding ball that is a "big hit" is stored (the third operation-holding ball is a "big hit"). (It is stored as the operation-reserving ball). Since the three operation holding balls including the third one are the operation holding balls existing at the start of the final variable display, they are the targets of the preliminary determination (prefetching) at the start of the variable display. Therefore, on the basis of the result of the determination of whether or not the second special symbol is valid and the result of the preliminary determination (the result of pre-reading), in the fifteenth rotation variation display (final variation display), the final battle effect in which the battle result is “win” is executed. Will be done. Then, when the ally character wins the enemy character in the final battle production and the final variation display ends, at the start of the symbol fixed time B (6.5 seconds) related to the final variation display, the electric support state ends. , Will shift to the non-electric power support state. Also, at the start of this symbol fixed time B (at the end of the electric power support state), the second fixed time effect that suggests to shift to the rush mode after the end of the big hit game is started, as if the fluctuation of the 15th rotation. As if the big hit on the display, more specifically, the big hit at the 15th rotation is shown to shift to the rush mode (actually, the big hit at the fluctuation display at the 18th rotation / the big hit). It shifts to the rush mode with, but apparently it looks like it is a big hit on the fluctuating display of the 15th rotation / it seems to shift to the rush mode with that big hit). In the second fixed time effect, the jackpot operation holding balls stored at the start (or the end) of the final change display from the start of the symbol fixed time B related to the final change display are consumed. Until (until the variable display corresponding to this jackpot holding ball is completed), it is performed as a series of seamlessly connected effects. During execution of the second fixed time effect, the predetermined screen (rush mode transition suggestion screen) is kept displayed, and the display is changed and stopped in a reduced state toward the end of the decorative pattern screen. As a result, the period in which the operation-holding ball of the second special symbol is actually digested (variation display of 3 revolutions immediately after the electric support state is removed) continues as if the symbol fixed time B of the final variation display. It can be shown to the player as if it were, and apparently it can be shown as if the variation display of the second special symbol was all completed in the electric support state (whether a big hit occurred in the final variation of the electric support state). Can be seen as). In addition, during the execution of this second fixed time production, by quickly activating the operation holding balls of the second special symbol in an extremely short time, all the operation holding balls of the second special symbol are displayed after the final variation display is completed. By compressing the time until the digestion is completed, the second fixed time production can be ended without causing the player to recognize that the operation retaining ball of the second special symbol is digested as much as possible. Then, when the second fixed time effect ends (the change display of the big hit ends), the chance mode ends, the big hit game is executed, and then the rush mode is entered. Although not shown, the effect displayed in the final variation display (in particular, the effect displayed in the final stage of the variation) is the same as or similar to the effect displayed in the symbol fixed time (fixed time effect). Since it is the content (continuous display), the final variation display, the symbol fixed time of the final variation display, the variation display related to the remaining pending ball, the variation fixed display related to the remaining pending ball over the symbol fixed time (at least "big hit" becomes A series of effects that are seamlessly connected can be performed until the variable display related to the remaining reserved balls or the symbol fixed time).

  Although not shown in the screen examples shown in FIGS. 85 to 87, the game main body aims at the second starting opening 52 and shoots a game ball with the end of the electric support state as a boundary. Since the game is switched to a game property in which the game ball is shot by aiming at the first starting opening 51, the game ball should be shot toward the right side area PA2 (right hit) on the screen before the end of the electric support state. Although the right-handed image (predetermined effect) that prompts the user is displayed, the right-handed image (predetermined effect) is not displayed on the screen after the end of the electric power support state. That is, in the final battle effect that is performed during execution of the final variation display, the right-handed image (predetermined effect) is displayed, but the fixed time effect (first time) that is performed during the symbol fixed time B after the end of the final variation display. In the fixed time effect and the second fixed time effect, the right-handed image (predetermined effect) is not displayed.

  The main effects achieved in the third embodiment are summarized as follows.

  First, according to the third embodiment, the symbol fixed time when it becomes “out” in the variable display of the final time of the electric support state, the symbol when it becomes “out” in the variable display before the final time By setting the time to be relatively longer than the fixed time and terminating the electrical support state at the start of the symbol fixed time related to the final variation display, the electrical support state (final variation display In the case where the normal symbol hitting symbol stops just before the end of) and the second starting opening 52 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 6 seconds, which is the maximum opening time allowed by the rule), after the electric support state ends ( Even after the game ball enters the second starting opening 52 after the last time the variable display is finished and the symbol fixing time (6.5 seconds) is started), until the symbol fixing time ends. , The remaining reserved balls of the second special symbol stored at the end of the variable display of the last time are not digested, so the remaining reserved number of the second special symbol is accumulated in the upper limit number during the symbol fixing time. For example, a new second special symbol operation-holding ball will not occur. Therefore, according to the third embodiment, like the conventional technique, a new second special symbol is displayed every time the variable display relating to the remaining reserved balls of the second special symbol is performed even after the electric support state is finished. Since it is possible to prevent in advance the situation in which the operation pending balls of the symbols are generated one after another and the variable display of the second special symbol continues more than the expected number of times, the profit should be optimized by the player (the profit-giving opportunity It is possible to realize the fairness and fairness of the game machine without deviating from the specifications of the gaming machine, and as a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. In order to secure the effect of the present embodiment, it is preferable to set the symbol fixing time to be relatively longer than the opening time (maximum opening time) of the second starting port. It should be noted that the maximum opening time is, of course, the longest of the two opening times of the second starting port when it is provided, but only one opening time of the second starting port is provided. If not, the one opening time itself becomes the maximum opening time.

  In addition, according to the third embodiment, at the start of the last time variable display that triggers the end of the electric support state, in addition to the result of the judgment, the operation holding ball of the second special symbol (the electric support state is With reference to the preliminary determination result of the remaining reserved ball that will be exhausted after the end), the content of the symbol variation effect (final battle effect) performed in the variation display of the final time is determined and the final time of the final time is determined. By connecting the stop display related to the variable display (fixed time for the symbol) and the variable display related to the remaining reserved ball as a series of continuous productions (fixed time performance), the process of the variable display related to the remaining reserved ball becomes the final one. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable with the variable display related to the remaining holding ball after exiting the electric support state by making it appear as if the variable display of the variable display of the time is in the variable display or the symbol fixed time, It is possible to create a novel game effect that is not found in the game, and as a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

Further, according to the third embodiment, at the start of the last time variable display that triggers the end of the power support state, the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is “out”, and, of the second special symbol Even if the final variable display becomes a variable display (when the final battle performance is defeated), because there is no large operation holding ball in the operation holding ball, By the end of the variable display of the last time, when an operation holding ball that becomes a "big hit" as an operation holding ball of a new second special symbol is generated, at the start of the big hit game, actually By interposing a specific effect that suggests that it was a big hit, there is a discrepancy between the content of the symbol variation effect (final battle effect) and the fixed time effect (first fixed time effect) and the actual game result. Can be prevented in advance, making it difficult for the player to feel distrust or discomfort (on the contrary, a relief effect can be generated as a final result to enhance the player's satisfaction and uplifting feeling). As a result, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the chance mode and the rush mode are selectively set according to the jackpot type etc. as the effect mode corresponding to the time saving game state or the probability variation game state, and the effect mode currently staying is set. In the chance mode (first advantageous state), the variation pattern selection tendency is different between the variation display of the last time and the variation display before the last time, but the production mode currently staying is the rush mode (second advantage state). In the case of, the variation pattern selection tendency is the same in the variation display of the last time and the variation display before the last time, and the variation pattern selection tendency after the end of the chance mode (first advantageous state) and the rush mode ( By making the variation pattern selection tendency after the end of the (second advantageous state) different, the variation pattern selection tendencies are completely different even in the two effect modes corresponding to the same game state, so the variation A wide variety of pattern tables can be created to create a variety of game characteristics and game effects, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, after the end of the chance mode (first advantageous state), the next effect mode (pull back) until all the operation holding balls of the second special symbol stored at the end are exhausted. However, after the end of the rush mode (second advantageous state), the next performance mode is triggered by the operation reserve ball of the first second special symbol stored at the end being exhausted. With the configuration that shifts to the (normal mode), even in the case of two effect modes corresponding to the same game state, a variety of game characteristics and game effects can be achieved by making a difference in the effect mode transition conditions and transition timings. The game can be created, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Modification of Third Embodiment]
Next, a pachinko game machine according to a modified example of the third embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine according to this modification basically has the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine of the above-described third embodiment, and hereinafter, parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals. The description will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described. That is, in the following description, the same configuration as that of the third embodiment can be applied, except for special cases.

  FIG. 88 is an electric block diagram of a modified example of the third embodiment. The main control board 100 is provided with a setting change unit 900 configured to be able to set the probability (big hit probability) to be judged as a big hit stepwise in the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. ..

The setting change unit 900 includes a setting key (setting key) 901, a setting change switch 902, and a setting display monitor 903. The setting key 901 is a key-type switch operated when confirming or changing the setting of the jackpot probability. The setting change switch 902 is a switch for changing the setting value of the jackpot probability in a plurality of stages (six stages in this example). The setting change switch 902 is also used as a RAM clear switch. That is, when the power is turned on while the setting change switch 902 is operated in order to start the setting change mode described later, at least the information related to the game state (power supply) out of all the information stored in the RAM 103 of the main control board 100. It is information about the game state before disconnection, whether it is during special games, high-accuracy state or low-accuracy state, high base state or low base state, the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol / second special symbol is Some information such as what is the variation pattern selection state and whether or not the variation is in progress) is cleared. However, instead of using the setting change switch 902 also as a RAM clear switch, a dedicated setting change switch may be provided and separated from the RAM clear switch. The setting display monitor 903 is an LED indicator (7-segment LED) that displays the set value set by the setting change switch 902, the jackpot probability, and the like. The setting change unit 900 may be provided on a control board other than the main control board 100 or may be provided on an element other than the control board.

  When the setting key 901 is rotated in a predetermined direction and the setting change switch 902 is turned on, power is supplied to the setting change unit 600 so that the setting change mode (setting value can be changed). Mode). In this setting change mode, each time the setting change switch 902 is operated, the set value is changed in six steps, and the changed present set value is displayed on the setting display monitor 903. Then, when the setting key is returned to the original position, the set value switched as described above is confirmed, the setting change mode is ended, and the mode is shifted to the normal mode (mode in which a game can be played).

  In the setting change unit 900 having such a configuration, it is possible to select any setting value from the setting values of 6 levels by the input operation of the setting change switch 902. Here, FIG. 89 is a schematic diagram showing a jackpot probability setting value table. In this modified example, as the setting values of six levels, there are “setting value 1”, “setting value 2”, “setting value 3”, “setting value 4”, “setting value 5” and “setting value 6”. ing. Specifically, the probability of a big hit for each set value increases step by step in the order of set value 1 <set value 2 <set 3 <set 4 <set value 5 <set value 6.

  Here, in each of the set values 1 to 6, the ratio between the big hit probability in the low probability state and the big hit probability in the high probability state is set to be the same ratio. That is, no matter which setting value 1 to 6 is selected, the ratio between the big hit probability in the low probability state and the big hit probability in the high probability state (the change rate of the big hit probability) is the same. When the current set value is "set value 1", the big hit probability in the low probability state is set to "1/100", and the big hit probability in the high probability state is set to "1/40". When the current set value is "set value 2", the big hit probability in the low probability state is set to "1/96", and the big hit probability in the high probability state is set to "1 / 38.4". When the current set value is "set value 3", the big hit probability in the low probability state is set to "1/92" and the big hit probability in the low probability state is set to "1 / 36.8". When the current set value is "set value 4", the big hit probability in the low probability state is set to "1/88", and the big hit probability in the high probability state is set to "1 / 35.2". When the current setting value is “setting value 5”, the big hit probability in the low probability state is set to “1/84” and the big hit probability in the high probability state is set to “1 / 33.6”. When the current set value is "set value 6", the big hit probability in the low probability state is set to "1/80", and the big hit probability in the high probability state is set to "1/32".

  Similar to the above embodiment, the present modification is configured such that various game effects are controlled and executed by the effect control board 200 and the image control board 300 according to the progress status of the game and the like. Below, among various game effects, the contents of the “setting suggestion effect” that suggests the setting value of the jackpot probability will be described.

<Setting suggestion production>
The setting suggestion effect is an effect that suggests which of the six setting values 1 to 6 the current setting value set by the setting change switch 902 is. This setting suggestion effect includes a first setting suggestion effect performed during the execution of the big hit game and a second setting suggestion effect performed at the end of the electric support state.

<< 1st setting suggestion production >>
First, the first setting suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 90 is a schematic diagram showing the specific lamp 81 used in the first setting suggestion effect.

  The first setting suggesting effect is that a specific lamp 81 provided near the general winning opening 64 on the board surface emits a predetermined light when the game ball enters the general winning opening 64 during execution of the big hit game. By lighting in color, it is an effect that suggests the set value of the jackpot probability. In this modified example, a gaming ball is a general winning in the jackpot gaming state, out of the gaming states (big hit gaming state, electric support state) in which the right-handed striking the gaming ball toward the right area PA2 is the main subject of the game. The first setting suggestion effect is performed when the player enters the mouth 64, but even if the game ball enters the general winning opening 64 in the electric support state (non-special game state), the first setting suggestion effect is Not done

  In this modified example, three types of "white", "green", and "red" are set as the effect patterns (emission color of the specific lamp 81) of the first setting suggestion effect. Further, the emission color of the specific lamp suggests that the current set value of the jackpot probability is relatively high in the order of “white” <“green” <“red”. In other words, "white" is more likely to occur at a lower set value (for example, "set value 1" to "set value 3" are more likely to occur than "set value 4" to "set value 6") and "green". "Is likely to occur with a high set value (for example," set value 4 "to" set value 6 "is more likely to occur than" set value 1 "to" set value 3 "), and" red "is a high setting value. Values are much more likely to occur (for example, "set value 4" to "set value 6" are much more likely to occur than "set value 1" to "set value 3" or are not "set 6". And does not occur).

  Here, FIG. 91 is a time chart when the first setting suggestion effect is performed during the execution of the big hit game. In the present embodiment, the first setting suggestive effect is that when the setting value of the jackpot probability is set relatively high, the jackpot 54 is opened during the jackpot game (the jackpot). 54) when the special winning opening 54 is closed (closed period of the special winning opening 54), the emission color of the specific lamp 81 has a higher expected emission color (the setting value of the big hit probability). Is more likely to be a relatively high emission color).

As shown in the figure, in a situation where the set value of the jackpot probability is a high setting (for example, “set value 4” to “set value 6”), the game ball is the general winning opening 54 during the opening period of the big winning opening 54. In the case of entering the ball, as the emission color of the specific lamp 81, the white selection rate is “80%”, the green selection rate is “15%”, and the red selection rate is “5%”. Further, when the set value of the jackpot probability is high (for example, “set value 4” to “set value 6”), the game ball enters the general winning opening 54 during the closing period of the special winning opening 54. As the emission color of the specific lamp 81, the white selection rate is “60%”, the green selection rate is “25%”, and the red selection rate is “15%”. That is, the period when the special winning opening 54 is closed (the period in which the player shoots a game ball aiming at the right side area PA2) is closed (the player intentionally During the period when the game ball is stopped to be fired), the reliability of the setting suggestion by the first setting suggesting production becomes higher, which increases the player's motivation to fire and improves the operating rate during the big hit game. Can be made. Although not shown, the relationship between the selection ratio of each issue color of the specific lamp 81 and each setting value in a low setting (“setting value 1” to “setting value 3”) is the special winning opening 54. When the game ball enters the general winning opening 54 during the opening period of, the white selection rate is "85%", the green selection rate is "12.5%", and the red selection rate is "2. The same applies when the game ball enters the general winning opening 54 during the closing period of the special winning opening 54 (or the white selection rate is further increased and the red selection rate is further decreased). By doing so, when the game ball enters the general winning opening 54 during the closing period of the special winning opening 54, the case where the game ball enters the general winning opening 54 during the opening period of the special winning opening 54 In comparison, green or red can be easily selected only in the high setting, and even in a situation in which a ball cannot be expected to enter the special winning opening 54 (during the closing period), the player can be motivated to shoot a game ball. As a further modified example, the first setting suggestion effect is a special image (for example, a special image on the screen when the game ball enters the general winning opening 64 in the jackpot game state without using the specific lamp 81). It may be configured to display an effect image, which is an image that makes it appear as if something emitted light.

≪Second setting suggestion production≫
Next, the second setting suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 92 is a schematic diagram showing a screen example of the second setting suggestive effect.

  2nd setting suggestion production, when the production mode which is currently staying is the chance mode, that the electric support state ends when the variable display count of the special symbol reaches the predetermined end count (15 times). As a trigger, by displaying a specific image (character image) on the screen in a predetermined display mode, it is an effect that suggests the set value of the jackpot probability. In addition, during the symbol fixed time after the variable display (final variable display) of the 15th rotation in the chance mode is finished, the specific image (character image) of the second setting suggestive effect and the fixed time described above are displayed on the screen. The production chance mode end suggestion image is displayed separately in a positional relationship that does not overlap each other. Thus, at the end of the power support state, the specific image (character image), the chance mode end suggestion image, and the decorative pattern do not cover each other, and the information of one does not hide the other. As a further modified example, instead of displaying the specific image (character image) during the symbol fixed time after the variation display (final variation display) of the 15th rotation of the chance mode is finished, the 15th rotation of the chance mode is displayed. The specific image specific image (character image) may be displayed during the variable display (final variable display).

  In this modified example, as the effect pattern (display mode of the specific image) of the second setting suggestion effect, “no display”, “copper”, “silver”, “gold”, “giraffe (pattern)”, and “rainbow” are selected. The type is set. The display mode (display color) of the specific image is related to the current setting value of the jackpot probability, and “no display” <“copper” <“silver” <“gold” <“giraffe (pattern)” < In the order of "rainbow", it is suggested that the current set value of the jackpot probability is relatively high. It should be noted that "no display" means that the specific image is not displayed. Further, “copper”, “silver”, “gold”, “giraffe (pattern)”, and “rainbow” mean that the specific image is displayed in its color or display color. Here, as will be described in detail later, “copper” is a display mode indicating that the current set value is “set value 2” or more, and “silver” is the present set value is “set value 3” or more. Is a display mode indicating that the current setting value is “setting value 4” or more, and “Kirin (pattern)” is the current setting value is “setting value 5”. This is a display mode indicating that the above is true, and "rainbow" is a display mode indicating that the current setting value is "setting value 6". That is, "copper" is never displayed when the current setting value is "setting 1", and "silver" is absolutely not displayed when the current setting value is "setting 1" to "setting 2". "Gold" is never displayed when the current setting value is "Setting 1" to "Setting 3", and "Kirin (pattern)" has the current setting value "Setting 1". ~ "Setting 4" is never displayed, and "rainbow" is never displayed if the current set value is "Setting 1" to "Setting 5".

FIG. 93 is a time chart of the second setting suggestive effect. The second setting suggestion effect is that when the current setting value is relatively high, the electric support state (chance mode) is terminated and the non-operation is not performed without a big hit in the electric support state (chance mode). As the number of continuous transitions to the electric power support state (pullback mode) increases (hereinafter referred to as the “continuous termination number”), the display mode of the specific image has a high expectation display mode (the set value of the jackpot probability is relatively high). It is configured so that there is a high possibility that it will be in a display mode indicating that it is in a state.

As shown in the figure, when the current setting value is a high setting (for example, “setting value 6”) and the number of continuous terminations of the power support state is N, the display mode of the specific image is “no display”. "65%", "copper""10%","silver""10%","gold""5%","giraffe" The selection rate is “5%”, and the selection rate for “rainbow” is “5%”.
On the other hand, when the current setting value is a high setting (for example, “setting value 6”) and the number of consecutive endings of the power support state is N + 1, the selection rate of “no display” is set as the display mode of the specific image. "60%", "copper" selectivity is "5%", "silver" selectivity is "5%", "gold" selectivity is "10%", "giraffe" selectivity is "10". The selection rate of "%" and "rainbow" is "10%". That is, when the number of consecutive endings of the electric support state is N + 1th, the high setting suggesting “gold” or more appears as the display mode of the specific image than when the number of consecutive endings of the electric support state is the Nth. Probability improves. Therefore, as the number of times that the barrier to the rush mode (the most advantageous state) cannot be exceeded continues, the reliability of the setting suggestion by the first setting suggesting production becomes higher, so that the player's motivation for playing decreases. Can be prevented and the game can be continued.

  As described above, according to the modified example of the third embodiment, when the current set value of the jackpot probability is relatively high, the jackpot 54 is opened during the jackpot game. Since the reliability (accuracy) of the setting suggestion is high during the period when the special winning opening 54 is closed (the period in which the player intentionally stops the firing of the game ball), the player's motivation to fire is increased. The operation rate during the big hit game can be improved, and as a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

  Further, according to the modified example of the third embodiment, when the current setting value of the jackpot probability is set relatively high, the electric support state is ended without pulling the big jack during the execution of the electric support state. As the number of continuous transitions to the non-electrical support state increases, the reliability (accuracy) of the setting suggestion increases, so that the player's motivation for playing can be reduced by repeatedly exiting the electric support state. It is possible to prevent the game from continuing and to promote the continuation of the game, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  As a modified example of the second setting suggestion effect, when the following disadvantageous state or non-advantageous state continues, it is configured to improve the execution frequency of the setting suggestion or the reliability (accuracy) of the setting suggestion. You may. For example, in a model having at least 16R big hit (high profit big hit) and 4R big hit (low profit big hit) as a big hit type, when 4R big hit (low profit big hit) continues N times or 16R big hit (high profit big hit) If the state is closed without pulling even once, the setting suggestion is always displayed during the special game or during the change display that triggered the end of the state (or during the change display after the end of the state). It may be executed, or the setting suggestion execution frequency or the setting suggestion reliability (accuracy) may be improved. In addition, if you win a specific jackpot (probability variation jackpot), counting from the end of the jackpot game until the variable display number of special symbols reaches the specified ST number In the probability variation machine (ST machine), after pulling the first hit (big hit of the first special symbol in the normal game state), after the big hit game, until the variable display number of special symbols reaches the specified ST number If the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol can not be drawn to the big symbol and it ends (so-called single shot), at the end of the variable display that triggers its termination (or during the symbol fixed time), setting suggestion May be always executed, or the setting suggestion execution frequency or the setting suggestion reliability (accuracy) may be improved. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned model that employs the small hit RUSH mode (second embodiment), the big hit in the big hit type (big hit pattern) that does not trigger the shift to the small hit RUSH mode (substantial probability gaming state) continues for a predetermined number of times. In the case of a special game or a variation display that triggered the transition from a gaming state other than a low-probability low base state to a low-probability low base state (or a low-probability low base state from a game state other than the low-probability low base state The setting suggestion may be always executed during the variation display after the variation display that triggers the transition, or the setting suggestion execution frequency or the setting suggestion reliability (accuracy) may be improved.

<< Setting suggestion using RTC >>
As a further modified example (second modified example) of the third embodiment, the selection rate (appearance frequency) of the effect pattern of each setting suggestive effect is measured by using the RTC function provided in the game machine or the time measured by the RTC. It may be configured to be different depending on the time zone. In the following, as the setting suggestion effect using the RTC function, the case where the setting suggestion effect is applied to the second setting suggestion effect is illustrated, but the setting suggestion effect may be applied to the first setting suggestion effect.

  The production control board 200 includes an RTC (real time clock) for measuring the current time. The RTC has a clock / calendar function for clocking “year”, “month”, “day”, “day of the week”, “hour”, “minute”, and “second”. An oscillation circuit unit that generates a clock signal based on an oscillating operation, a register circuit unit in which the generated time information is written, and a backup battery that enables battery backup for a long time are provided. The sub-main CPU 201 of the effect control board 200 reads the time information temporarily stored in the register circuit unit of the RTC to calculate the time. The RTC clock time, that is, the count value of each register is the current year using a master clock or the like that manages an accurate current time (Japan Standard Time) when the Pachinko gaming machine PM is manufactured or shipped. , Month, day, day, hour, minute, second.

  FIG. 94 is a schematic diagram showing a second setting suggestive effect pattern table. In the figure, the correspondence relationship between the second setting suggestive effect pattern and the selection rate of each time period is defined. The correspondence relationship shown in FIG. 94 is a correspondence relationship when the number of consecutive ends is 0, and as the number of consecutive ends increases, the correspondence relationship becomes as shown in FIG. 93 (for example, described later. In the third time period, the correspondence relationship of "setting value 6" is that the number of continuous terminations is 2 times and 3 times, so that "power supply failure: Nth time" and "power supply failure: N + 1th time" shown in FIG. Changes to the corresponding relationship).

  In this modification, when the current setting value is "setting value 1", only "no display" can be selected as the display mode of the second setting suggestive effect. Therefore, when the specific image is displayed at the execution timing of the second setting suggestive effect (at the end of the power support state), it is determined that the current setting value is “setting value 2” or more (that is, “setting value”). 1 ”is denied).

  Further, since "copper" is the display mode selected when the current setting value is "setting value 2" or more, the current setting value is "set" when the copper-colored specific image is displayed. It is determined that the value is 2 or more.

  "Silver" is a display mode selected when the current setting value is "setting value 3" or more, so the current setting value is "setting value 3" when the silver specific image is displayed. The above is confirmed.

  "Gold" is a display mode selected when the current setting value is "setting value 4" or more, so that the current setting value is "setting value 4" when the gold specific image is displayed. The above is confirmed.

  Since "Kirin" is the display mode selected when the current setting value is "Setting value 5" or more, the current setting value is "Setting value 5" when the specific image of the giraffe pattern is displayed. It is confirmed that it is above.

  "Rainbow" is a display mode that is selected only when the current setting value is "setting value 6". Therefore, when the rainbow-colored specific image is displayed, the current setting value is "setting value 6". Is confirmed.

In addition, in the present modification, the time zone of 24 hours a day including the business hours of the amusement store and the hours before and after that is defined as "first time zone (8:00 to 11:00)" and "second time zone (11 "Hour to 18:00)", "Third time zone (18:00 to 20:00)", "Fourth time zone (20:00 to 23:00)", "Fifth time zone (2
It is divided into 5 time zones, "3-8". In the second setting suggestion effect pattern table, the second setting suggestion effect pattern (display mode of the specific image) is set for each time zone, and the execution timing (RTC time measurement time) of the second setting suggestion effect is determined. The selection rate of the second setting suggestive effect pattern is configured to be different depending on whether the time zone corresponds to.

  The first time zone (8:00 to 11:00) is the first time zone in the morning when the game shop opens. Let's start the game from now on by setting the appearance frequency of "copper color" and "silver color" to be relatively high. It encourages the players to continue playing by increasing their motivation to play.

  The second time zone (11:00 to 18:00) is the longest daytime time zone set within the business hours of the day, and the frequency of appearances is generally suppressed to encourage the player to concentrate on the game. ..

  The third time zone (18:00 to 20:00) is a busy time zone where the number of customers returning from work increases, and the appearance rate of "gold", "giraffe", and "rainbow" is high, and is actively set high. By making suggestions, the player's motivation is increased and the game continues until the store is closed.

  The fourth time zone (20:00 to 23:00) is a time zone just before the game store is closed, and prompts the player to continue the game until the game is closed, and answers the setting suggestion and the actual set value. Significantly increase the appearance rate of "gold", "giraffe", and "rainbow".

  The fifth time zone (23:00 to 8:00) is a time zone outside the business hours of the game store, but since the game store confirms the operation of the game machine, etc., the appearance frequency is the highest among each time period. The setting suggestion can be made while suppressing it.

  As described above, in the present modification, the selection tendency of the setting suggestive effect is changed according to the current time (time zone) clocked by the RTC, so that the appearance frequency with respect to the player is different according to each time zone. Since it is possible to present an index of the jackpot probability and the player can proceed with the game while enjoying guessing the current set value with the passage of time, the effect of setting suggestive production can be further enhanced. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

The following configuration may be applied as a modification of the third embodiment described above. (1) In the third embodiment, the electric power support state is ended at the start of the symbol fixed time in the final fluctuation display, but as a modified example, the electric power support state is ended at the start of the fluctuation display of the final fluctuation display. You may. (2) In the third embodiment described above, the relief effect is executed during the big hit game relating to the remaining hold ball which is a "big hit", but as a modification, the relief effect is executed during the variable display relating to the remaining hold ball. You may comprise. In that case, this variation display (variation display of the jackpot related to the remaining reserve ball) is not a variation display of ultra-shortening (variation pattern of ultra-shortening), but has a performance scale of about 20 seconds (production of about 20 seconds. A variable display (variable pattern) that enables execution is preferable. (3) In the third embodiment, the remaining reserved balls are pre-determined (look-ahead) at the start of the variable display of the final variable display. However, as a modified example, during the change of the final variable display (for example, 20 from the start of the variable display). It may be configured such that the remaining reserved ball is preliminarily determined after (second). According to this, the effect (effect result) of the final variable display can be determined after performing the preliminary determination for the fourth operation holding ball (remaining holding ball) that is generated after the fluctuation display is started. it can. In that case, (a) the effect of the entire variable display is determined at the start of the final variable display, and the effect (effect result) is changed or determined again during the final variable display, or (b) the final Even if it is configured such that the effect of the first half of the variable display (for example, the first 20 seconds) is determined at the start of the variable display and the rest of the effects after that are determined based on the preliminary determination during the final variable display. Good. In this case, at the start of the final fluctuation display, the change judgment is made and the remaining pending balls are preliminarily judged, and the remaining pending balls are preliminarily judged in the middle of the final fluctuation display, and based on those judgment results and the preliminary judgment results. Therefore, it may be configured such that the above-mentioned determinations (a) and (b) are performed, and whether or not the variation is appropriate is determined at the start of the final variation display (the advance determination is not performed at the start of the final variation display. ), The remaining reserve balls may be preliminarily determined during the final variation display, and the determinations such as (a) and (b) above may be made based on the result of the judgment and the result of the preliminary determination. Good.

[Common modification]
Next, modified examples of the first to third embodiments will be described. The gaming machine according to this modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, second embodiment or third embodiment, and has the same configuration below. The same reference numerals are given to the parts and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described.

<Common Modification 1>
In the above-described embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit, the normal probability variation gaming machine that determines the presence or absence of a probability variation transition based on the stop symbol of the special symbol (big hit symbol) is adopted, but in this configuration Without being limited to this, if the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit, it is determined whether or not there is a probability change transition depending on whether or not the game ball enters the specific area during the execution of the big hit game. A probability variation gaming machine may be adopted. Further, as a modified example of the gaming machine of the above embodiment, the probability variation gaming state that is given as a chance to be a big hit with the first special symbol or the second special symbol, with the limit number (upper limit number) set in advance as a limit. Alternatively, a gaming machine having a limiter function for limiting the number of continuous latent game states may be adopted. Further, in the above embodiment, the probability variation function of the special symbol is configured as a normal probability variation machine that continues from the end of the big hit game until the next big hit occurs, but the probability variation function of the special symbol is the specified number of STs. It may be configured as a number-of-times-reliability variable machine that continuously operates only (for example, 100 times).

<Common modification 2>
In the above-described embodiment, the model in which only one big winning hole is mounted in the game area has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a model in which a plurality of big winning holes are mounted in the game area is applied. You may. Further, when adopting a model equipped with a plurality of special winning opening, as the above-mentioned V probability variation gaming machine, a specific area (probability variation function operation area, V area) serving as an activation trigger of the probability variation function of the special symbol is provided. It is possible to mount two or more special winning openings, a first special winning opening and a second special winning opening that does not include this specific area (probability variation function operating area, V area). As an example of the board layout, the first special winning opening and the second special winning opening may be arranged substantially vertically or substantially horizontally in the right area of the game area, or the first special winning opening is arranged. The board area to be played may be different from the board area in which the second special winning opening is arranged. In that case, the number of prize balls (number of unit prize balls) to be paid out when the game balls enter the first special winning opening and the payout when the game balls enter the second special winning opening The number of prize balls (number of unit prize balls) to be displayed may be the same or different. Of the two big winning openings, the first big winning opening (or second big winning opening) is a big winning opening for small win games, and the second big winning opening (or first big winning opening) is for big winning games. It may be configured as a special winning opening. In that case, the number of prize balls (the number of unit prize balls) of the big prize hole for the small hit game may be 10, the number of prize balls of the prize hole (the unit prize ball) for the big hit game may be 15, etc. Good.

<Common modification 3>
In the above-described embodiment, among a plurality of types of gaming states, the latent probability variation gaming state is defined as a gaming state in which the probability varying function of the special symbol and the variation time shortening function of the special symbol are activated, and the electric Chu support function is not activated. However, it is not limited to this, the latent probability variation game state is defined as the gaming state in which only the special symbol stochastic variation function operates, and the special symbol variation time shortening function and the electric Chu support function do not operate. You may. In addition, the variation time shortening function of the special symbol is divided into the variation time shortening function of the first special symbol and the variation time shortening function of the second special symbol, and the latent probability variation game state is the probability variation function of the special symbol and the second. The variation time shortening function of the 2 special symbols is activated, and it may be defined as a gaming state in which the electric-chu support function is not activated. In addition, the electric Chu support function, even if it operates in synchronization with the special symbol variation time reduction function (second special symbol variation time reduction function), the special symbol variation time reduction function (second special symbol variation time) (Shortening function) may be operated independently.

  Next, in order to make it easier to understand the technical significance of the above-described embodiments and modifications, the problems corresponding to the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications will be outlined.

  In the conventional model Pachinko gaming machine, the normal gaming state in which the winning probability of the above winning determination is set to the normal probability, the probability variation gaming state in which the winning probability of the above winning determination is increased, and the result of the above winning determination is suggested or notified. Equipped with various game states such as a time-shortening game state in which the efficiency of symbol fluctuations has been increased, and the transition to the normal game state is triggered by the fact that the number of symbol fluctuation display times reaches a predetermined number in the probability variation game state or the time-saving game state. There are known ones (see, for example, “JP 2011-182873 A”).

  In addition, in the conventional model Pachinko game machine, a model equipped with a probability setting function that allows the jackpot probability of the above-mentioned hit determination to be set in multiple stages by a predetermined setting operation by a clerk of the game store, etc. has been proposed. (See, for example, “JP-A-10-7583”).

  Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment and modification, the above-described configuration is adopted to achieve the above-mentioned operational effects for the purpose of improving the fun of the game.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and can be appropriately improved within the scope of the gist of the present invention. In addition, a combination of the constituent elements described in the above-described embodiments and modifications is appropriately combined, or a part of the constituent elements described in the above-described embodiments and modifications is deleted or converted by a well-known / common technique or the like. These are also included in the scope of the present invention.

PM Pachinko game machine PA Game area PA1 Left side area PA2 Right side area 1 Outer frame 2 Front frame 5 Glass frame 15 Performance button 20 Game board 51 1st starting opening 52 2nd starting opening 53 Operation gate 54 Large winning opening 64 General winning opening 70 Production display device 71 First special symbol display device 72 Second special symbol display device 81 Specific lamp 100 Main control board 200 Production control board 220 Production control means 300 Image control board 400 Discharge control board 500 Power supply board

Claims (1)

A game board with a game area formed,
A first start opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area, into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening which is provided at a position different from the first starting opening in the game area and in which the game ball changes between an open state where it is easy to enter a ball and a closed state where it is difficult to enter a ball,
First random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number value triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening,
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number value triggered by a game ball entering the second starting opening,
First win / fail judgment means for executing win / no judgment based on the random number value acquired by the first random number acquisition means;
A second hit / damage determination means for performing a hit / miss judgment based on the random number value acquired by the second random number acquisition means;
When the result of the hit determination by the first hit determination means or the result of the hit determination by the second hit determination means is a big hit, special game executing means that can shift to a special game advantageous to the player,
There is a normal ball entry state and an easy ball entry state in which the ease of entering the second starting opening is higher than that of the normal ball entry state, and the normal ball entry state or the easy ball entry state is set. Executable entrance state control means,
When a random number value is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, a first reservation storage unit that stores the acquired random number value as a first reservation up to a predetermined upper limit number until the first win / fail judgment permission condition is satisfied. When,
When a random number value is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit, a second hold storage unit that stores the acquired random number value as a second hold up to a predetermined upper limit number until the second win / fail judgment permission condition is satisfied. When,
A first symbol display device in which a first symbol indicating the result of the determination by the first determination unit is displayed variable and stopped.
A second symbol display device in which the second symbol indicating the result of the determination by the second determination unit is displayed in a variable and stopped manner.
In the first symbol display device, a first symbol display control means for displaying a variable display and a stop display of the first symbol,
Second symbol display control means for displaying the second symbol in a variable display and a stop display in the second symbol display device,
An effect display device for displaying a predetermined effect,
And a production determining means for determining the production to be displayed on the production display device,
After the game state is set to the easy-to-enter state, the easy-to-enter state is configured to end when the total number of variable display times of the first symbol and the second symbol reaches a predetermined upper limit number. Was
It is possible to execute a specific effect in a specific variable display that is a variable display that triggers the total number of variable display times of the first symbol and the second symbol to reach a predetermined upper limit number,
The display mode of the specific effect can be determined based on the second hold remaining at the start of the specific change display or at a predetermined timing during execution of the specific change display,
As a display mode of the specific effect, at least a first display mode and a second display mode,
When the result of the hit determination by the first hit determination means or the result of the hit determination performed by the second hit determination means in the specific variation display is a big hit, the specific effect of the first display mode is executed during the execution of the particular variation display. Configured to be possible,
Even when the result of the hit / damage determination by the first hit / miss determination unit or the result of the hit / damage determination by the second hit / miss determination unit in the specific variable display is out of order, at the start of the specific variable display or the specific variable display If there is a specific hold for which the result of the hit determination by the second hit determination means is a big hit in the second hold remaining at a predetermined timing during execution, the first display is performed during execution of the particular variation display. While it is possible to execute a specific effect of the aspect,
If the result of the hit / damage determination by the first hit / damage determination means or the result of the hit / no hit determination by the second hit / damage determination means in the specific variation display is incorrect, the second hold remaining at a predetermined timing during execution of the particular variation display. If the specific hold does not exist in the area, and if the second hold that is the specific hold occurs between the predetermined timing during execution of the specific change display and the end of the specific change display, the specific hold is generated. It is possible to execute the specific effect of the second display mode during the execution of the variable display, and the variable display related to the specific hold that has occurred between the predetermined timing during the execution of the specific variable display and the end time of the specific variable display. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured such that a special effect different from the specific effect can be executed when the execution of the.